updated for version 7.3.1273

Problem: When copying a location list the index might be wrong. Solution: Set the index to one when using the first entry. (Lech Lorens)
updated for version 7.3.1272
2025-12-25 00:25:21 +00:00 · 2013-06-30 13:33:58 +02:00 · 2013-06-30 13:17:24 +02:00 · 2013-06-30 12:21:24 +02:00 · 2013-06-29 23:05:20 +02:00 · 2013-06-29 17:19:28 +02:00
868 changed files with 102450 additions and 23992 deletions
--- a/.gitignore
+++ b/.gitignore
@@ -30,22 +30,30 @@ src/auto/pathdef.c
 *.suo
 *.res
 *.RES
+src/if_perl.c
 src/pathdef.c
 src/Obj*/pathdef.c
 gvimext.dll
 gvimext.lib

+# Mac OSX
+src/xxd/xxd.dSYM
+
 # All platforms
 *.rej
 *.orig
 *.mo
 *.swp
 *~
+*.pyc
+src/po/vim.pot

 # Generated by "make test"
 src/po/*.ck 
 src/testdir/mbyte.vim 
 src/testdir/mzscheme.vim 
+src/testdir/lua.vim 
 src/testdir/small.vim 
 src/testdir/tiny.vim 
 src/testdir/test*.out
+src/testdir/test.log
--- a/38
+++ b/38
@@ -57,6 +57,7 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/popupmnu.c \
 		src/quickfix.c \
 		src/regexp.c \
+		src/regexp_nfa.c \
 		src/regexp.h \
 		src/screen.c \
 		src/search.c \
@@ -73,6 +74,7 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/version.c \
 		src/version.h \
 		src/vim.h \
+		src/winclip.c \
 		src/window.c \
 		src/xxd/xxd.c \
 		src/main.aap \
@@ -81,6 +83,16 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/testdir/test[0-9]*.ok \
 		src/testdir/test49.vim \
 		src/testdir/test60.vim \
+		src/testdir/test83-tags? \
+		src/testdir/python2/*.py \
+		src/testdir/python3/*.py \
+		src/testdir/pythonx/*.py \
+		src/testdir/pythonx/topmodule/__init__.py \
+		src/testdir/pythonx/topmodule/submodule/__init__.py \
+		src/testdir/pythonx/topmodule/submodule/subsubmodule/__init__.py \
+		src/testdir/pythonx/topmodule/submodule/subsubmodule/subsubsubmodule.py \
+		src/testdir/python_after/*.py \
+		src/testdir/python_before/*.py \
 		src/proto.h \
 		src/proto/blowfish.pro \
 		src/proto/buffer.pro \
@@ -129,6 +141,7 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/proto/ui.pro \
 		src/proto/undo.pro \
 		src/proto/version.pro \
+		src/proto/winclip.pro \
 		src/proto/window.pro \


@@ -260,6 +273,7 @@ SRC_DOS =	\
 		src/Make_mvc.mak \
 		src/Make_w16.mak \
 		src/bigvim.bat \
+		src/bigvim64.bat \
 		src/msvcsetup.bat \
 		src/msvc2008.bat \
 		src/msvc2010.bat \
@@ -313,6 +327,7 @@ SRC_DOS =	\
 		src/xxd/Make_bc5.mak \
 		src/xxd/Make_cyg.mak \
 		src/xxd/Make_djg.mak \
+		src/xxd/Make_ming.mak \
 		src/xxd/Make_mvc.mak \
 		nsis/gvim.nsi \
 		nsis/README.txt \
@@ -347,6 +362,13 @@ SRC_DOS_BIN =	\
 		src/vim*.ico \
 		src/vim.tlb \
 		src/vimtbar.lib \
+		src/xpm/COPYRIGHT \
+		src/xpm/README.txt \
+		src/xpm/include/*.h \
+		src/xpm/x64/lib/libXpm.a \
+		src/xpm/x64/lib/libXpm.lib \
+		src/xpm/x86/lib/libXpm.a \
+		src/xpm/x86/lib/libXpm.lib \
 		src/vimtbar.dll \
 		nsis/icons/*.bmp \
 		nsis/icons/*.ico \
@@ -434,6 +456,7 @@ SRC_EXTRA =	\
 		src/os_beos.c \
 		src/os_beos.h \
 		src/os_beos.rsrc \
+		src/proto/os_beos.pro \
 		src/os_mint.h \
 		src/os_vms_fix.com \
 		src/toolbar.phi \
@@ -461,6 +484,7 @@ RT_ALL =	\
 		runtime/macros/hanoi/hanoi.vim \
 		runtime/macros/hanoi/poster \
 		runtime/macros/justify.vim \
+		runtime/macros/less.bat \
 		runtime/macros/less.sh \
 		runtime/macros/less.vim \
 		runtime/macros/life/click.me \
@@ -664,6 +688,8 @@ EXTRA =		\

 # generic language files
 LANG_GEN = \
+		runtime/doc/*-de.1 \
+		runtime/doc/*-de.UTF-8.1 \
 		runtime/doc/*-fr.1 \
 		runtime/doc/*-fr.UTF-8.1 \
 		runtime/doc/*-it.1 \
@@ -680,9 +706,17 @@ LANG_GEN = \
 		runtime/tutor/Makefile \
 		runtime/tutor/tutor.utf-8 \
 		runtime/tutor/tutor.?? \
-		runtime/tutor/tutor.??.* \
+		runtime/tutor/tutor.??.utf-8 \
+		runtime/tutor/tutor.??.euc \
+		runtime/tutor/tutor.??.sjis \
+		runtime/tutor/tutor.??.iso9 \
+		runtime/tutor/tutor.??.big5 \
+		runtime/tutor/tutor.??.cp1250 \
+		runtime/tutor/tutor.??.cp1251 \
+		runtime/tutor/tutor.??.cp737 \
+		runtime/tutor/tutor.??_??.utf-8 \
 		runtime/tutor/tutor.bar \
-		runtime/tutor/tutor.bar.* \
+		runtime/tutor/tutor.bar.utf-8 \
 		runtime/spell/README.txt \
 		runtime/spell/??/*.diff \
 		runtime/spell/??/main.aap \
--- a/README.txt
+++ b/README.txt
@@ -97,10 +97,12 @@ The latest news about Vim can be found on the Vim home page:
 If you have problems, have a look at the Vim FAQ:
 	http://vimdoc.sf.net/vimfaq.html

-Send bug reports to:
-	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
+If you still have problems or any other questions, use one of the mailing
+lists to discuss them with Vim users and developers:
+	http://www.vim.org/maillist.php

-There are several mailing lists for Vim, see http://www.vim.org/maillist.php.
+If nothing else works, report bugs directly:
+	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>


 MAIN AUTHOR
--- a/runtime/autoload/ada.vim
+++ b/runtime/autoload/ada.vim
@@ -29,6 +29,8 @@
 if version < 700
   finish
 endif 
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim

 " Section: Constants {{{1
 "
@@ -619,6 +621,9 @@ lockvar  g:ada#Comment
 lockvar! g:ada#Keywords
 lockvar! g:ada#Ctags_Kinds

+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
+
 finish " 1}}}

 "------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--- a/runtime/autoload/ccomplete.vim
+++ b/runtime/autoload/ccomplete.vim
@@ -1,8 +1,10 @@
 " Vim completion script
 " Language:	C
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change:	2010 Mar 23
+" Last Change:	2012 Jun 20

+let s:cpo_save = &cpo
+set cpo&vim

 " This function is used for the 'omnifunc' option.
 function! ccomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
@@ -498,7 +500,7 @@ function! s:StructMembers(typename, items, all)
  endif
  if !cached
    while 1
-      exe 'silent! ' . n . 'vimgrep /\t' . typename . '\(\t\|$\)/j ' . fnames
+      exe 'silent! keepj noautocmd ' . n . 'vimgrep /\t' . typename . '\(\t\|$\)/j ' . fnames

      let qflist = getqflist()
      if len(qflist) > 0 || match(typename, "::") < 0
@@ -603,3 +605,6 @@ function! s:SearchMembers(matches, items, all)
  endfor
  return res
 endfunc
+
+let &cpo = s:cpo_save
+unlet s:cpo_save
--- a/runtime/autoload/clojurecomplete.vim
+++ b/runtime/autoload/clojurecomplete.vim
--- a/runtime/autoload/getscript.vim
+++ b/runtime/autoload/getscript.vim
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
 " ---------------------------------------------------------------------
 " getscript.vim
-"  Author:	Charles E. Campbell, Jr.
-"  Date:	May 31, 2011
-"  Version:	33
+"  Author:	Charles E. Campbell
+"  Date:	Apr 17, 2013
+"  Version:	35
 "  Installing:	:help glvs-install
 "  Usage:	:help glvs
 "
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
 if exists("g:loaded_getscript")
 finish
 endif
-let g:loaded_getscript= "v33"
+let g:loaded_getscript= "v35"
 if &cp
 echoerr "GetLatestVimScripts is not vi-compatible; not loaded (you need to set nocp)"
 finish
@@ -74,6 +74,11 @@ if !exists("g:GetLatestVimScripts_allowautoinstall")
 let g:GetLatestVimScripts_allowautoinstall= 1
 endif

+" set up default scriptaddr address
+if !exists("g:GetLatestVimScripts_scriptaddr")
+ let g:GetLatestVimScripts_scriptaddr = 'http://vim.sourceforge.net/script.php?script_id='
+endif
+
 "" For debugging:
 "let g:GetLatestVimScripts_wget    = "echo"
 "let g:GetLatestVimScripts_options = "options"
@@ -314,7 +319,7 @@ fun! getscript#GetLatestVimScripts()
  if &mod
   silent! w!
  endif
-  q
+  q!

  " restore events and current directory
  exe "cd ".fnameescape(substitute(origdir,'\','/','ge'))
@@ -415,7 +420,7 @@ fun! s:GetOneScript(...)
  echo 'considering <'.aicmmnt.'> scriptid='.scriptid.' srcid='.srcid

  " grab a copy of the plugin's vim.sourceforge.net webpage
-  let scriptaddr = 'http://vim.sourceforge.net/script.php?script_id='.scriptid
+  let scriptaddr = g:GetLatestVimScripts_scriptaddr.scriptid
  let tmpfile    = tempname()
  let v:errmsg   = ""

@@ -550,30 +555,42 @@ fun! s:GetOneScript(...)
     " decompress
     if sname =~ '\.bz2$'
 "      call Decho("decompress: attempt to bunzip2 ".sname)
-      exe "silent !bunzip2 ".shellescape(sname)
+      exe "sil !bunzip2 ".shellescape(sname)
      let sname= substitute(sname,'\.bz2$','','')
 "      call Decho("decompress: new sname<".sname."> after bunzip2")
     elseif sname =~ '\.gz$'
 "      call Decho("decompress: attempt to gunzip ".sname)
-      exe "silent !gunzip ".shellescape(sname)
+      exe "sil !gunzip ".shellescape(sname)
      let sname= substitute(sname,'\.gz$','','')
 "      call Decho("decompress: new sname<".sname."> after gunzip")
     elseif sname =~ '\.xz$'
 "      call Decho("decompress: attempt to unxz ".sname)
-      exe "silent !unxz ".shellescape(sname)
+      exe "sil !unxz ".shellescape(sname)
      let sname= substitute(sname,'\.xz$','','')
 "      call Decho("decompress: new sname<".sname."> after unxz")
     else
 "      call Decho("no decompression needed")
     endif
     
-     " distribute archive(.zip, .tar, .vba) contents
+     " distribute archive(.zip, .tar, .vba, ...) contents
     if sname =~ '\.zip$'
 "      call Decho("dearchive: attempt to unzip ".sname)
      exe "silent !unzip -o ".shellescape(sname)
     elseif sname =~ '\.tar$'
 "      call Decho("dearchive: attempt to untar ".sname)
      exe "silent !tar -xvf ".shellescape(sname)
+     elseif sname =~ '\.tgz$'
+"      call Decho("dearchive: attempt to untar+gunzip ".sname)
+      exe "silent !tar -zxvf ".shellescape(sname)
+     elseif sname =~ '\.taz$'
+"      call Decho("dearchive: attempt to untar+uncompress ".sname)
+      exe "silent !tar -Zxvf ".shellescape(sname)
+     elseif sname =~ '\.tbz$'
+"      call Decho("dearchive: attempt to untar+bunzip2 ".sname)
+      exe "silent !tar -jxvf ".shellescape(sname)
+     elseif sname =~ '\.txz$'
+"      call Decho("dearchive: attempt to untar+xz ".sname)
+      exe "silent !tar -Jxvf ".shellescape(sname)
     elseif sname =~ '\.vba$'
 "      call Decho("dearchive: attempt to handle a vimball: ".sname)
      silent 1split
--- a/runtime/autoload/netrw.vim
+++ b/runtime/autoload/netrw.vim
--- a/runtime/autoload/netrwFileHandlers.vim
+++ b/runtime/autoload/netrwFileHandlers.vim
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 " netrwFileHandlers: contains various extension-based file handlers for
 "                    netrw's browsers' x command ("eXecute launcher")
-" Author:	Charles E. Campbell, Jr.
-" Date:		Sep 30, 2008
-" Version:	10
-" Copyright:    Copyright (C) 1999-2008 Charles E. Campbell, Jr. {{{1
+" Author:	Charles E. Campbell
+" Date:		May 03, 2013
+" Version:	11b	ASTRO-ONLY
+" Copyright:    Copyright (C) 1999-2012 Charles E. Campbell {{{1
 "               Permission is hereby granted to use and distribute this code,
 "               with or without modifications, provided that this copyright
 "               notice is copied with it. Like anything else that's free,
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
 if exists("g:loaded_netrwFileHandlers") || &cp
 finish
 endif
-let g:loaded_netrwFileHandlers= "v10"
+let g:loaded_netrwFileHandlers= "v11b"
 if v:version < 702
 echohl WarningMsg
 echo "***warning*** this version of netrwFileHandlers needs vim 7.2"
@@ -34,10 +34,10 @@ set cpo&vim
 " netrwFileHandlers#Invoke: {{{1
 fun! netrwFileHandlers#Invoke(exten,fname)
 "  call Dfunc("netrwFileHandlers#Invoke(exten<".a:exten."> fname<".a:fname.">)")
-  let fname= a:fname
+  let exten= a:exten
  " list of supported special characters.  Consider rcs,v --- that can be
  " supported with a NFH_rcsCOMMAv() handler
-  if a:fname =~ '[@:,$!=\-+%?;~]'
+  if exten =~ '[@:,$!=\-+%?;~]'
   let specials= {
 \   '@' : 'AT',
 \   ':' : 'COLON',
@@ -51,20 +51,20 @@ fun! netrwFileHandlers#Invoke(exten,fname)
 \   '?' : 'QUESTION',
 \   ';' : 'SEMICOLON',
 \   '~' : 'TILDE'}
-   let fname= substitute(a:fname,'[@:,$!=\-+%?;~]','\=specials[submatch(0)]','ge')
+   let exten= substitute(a:exten,'[@:,$!=\-+%?;~]','\=specials[submatch(0)]','ge')
 "   call Decho('fname<'.fname.'> done with dictionary')
  endif

-  if a:exten != "" && exists("*NFH_".a:exten)
+  if a:exten != "" && exists("*NFH_".exten)
   " support user NFH_*() functions
 "   call Decho("let ret= netrwFileHandlers#NFH_".a:exten.'("'.fname.'")')
-   exe "let ret= NFH_".a:exten.'("'.fname.'")'
-  elseif a:exten != "" && exists("*s:NFH_".a:exten)
+   exe "let ret= NFH_".exten.'("'.a:fname.'")'
+  elseif a:exten != "" && exists("*s:NFH_".exten)
   " use builtin-NFH_*() functions
 "   call Decho("let ret= netrwFileHandlers#NFH_".a:exten.'("'.fname.'")')
-   exe "let ret= s:NFH_".a:exten.'("'.fname.'")'
+   exe "let ret= s:NFH_".a:exten.'("'.a:fname.'")'
  endif
-  
+
 "  call Dret("netrwFileHandlers#Invoke 0 : ret=".ret)
  return 0
 endfun
@@ -356,6 +356,7 @@ fun! s:NFH_obj(obj)
 endfun

 let &cpo= s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
 " ---------------------------------------------------------------------
 "  Modelines: {{{1
 "  vim: fdm=marker
--- a/runtime/autoload/netrwSettings.vim
+++ b/runtime/autoload/netrwSettings.vim
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
 " netrwSettings.vim: makes netrw settings simpler
-" Date:		Sep 03, 2008
-" Maintainer:	Charles E Campbell, Jr <drchipNOSPAM at campbellfamily dot biz>
-" Version:	13
-" Copyright:    Copyright (C) 1999-2007 Charles E. Campbell, Jr. {{{1
+" Date:		May 03, 2013
+" Maintainer:	Charles E Campbell <drchipNOSPAM at campbellfamily dot biz>
+" Version:	14a	ASTRO-ONLY
+" Copyright:    Copyright (C) 1999-2007 Charles E. Campbell {{{1
 "               Permission is hereby granted to use and distribute this code,
 "               with or without modifications, provided that this copyright
 "               notice is copied with it. Like anything else that's free,
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@
 if exists("g:loaded_netrwSettings") || &cp
  finish
 endif
-let g:loaded_netrwSettings = "v13"
+let g:loaded_netrwSettings = "v14a"
 if v:version < 700
 echohl WarningMsg
 echo "***warning*** this version of netrwSettings needs vim 7.0"
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ fun! netrwSettings#NetrwSettings()
  endif

  put ='+ ---------------------------------------------'
-  put ='+  NetrwSettings:  by Charles E. Campbell, Jr.'
+  put ='+  NetrwSettings:  by Charles E. Campbell'
  put ='+ Press <F1> with cursor atop any line for help'
  put ='+ ---------------------------------------------'
  let s:netrw_settings_stop= line(".")
@@ -88,6 +88,7 @@ fun! netrwSettings#NetrwSettings()
  put = 'let g:netrw_ftpmode           = '.g:netrw_ftpmode
  put = 'let g:netrw_ignorenetrc       = '.g:netrw_ignorenetrc
  put = 'let g:netrw_sshport           = '.g:netrw_sshport
+  put = 'let g:netrw_silent            = '.g:netrw_silent
  put = 'let g:netrw_use_nt_rcp        = '.g:netrw_use_nt_rcp
  put = 'let g:netrw_win95ftp          = '.g:netrw_win95ftp
  let s:netrw_xfer_stop= line(".")
@@ -99,51 +100,81 @@ fun! netrwSettings#NetrwSettings()
  put ='+ Netrw Browser Control'
  put = 'let g:netrw_alto              = '.g:netrw_alto
  put = 'let g:netrw_altv              = '.g:netrw_altv
+  put = 'let g:netrw_banner            = '.g:netrw_banner
+  if exists("g:netrw_bannerbackslash")
+   put = 'let g:netrw_bannerbackslash   = '.g:netrw_bannerbackslash
+  else
+   put = '\" let g:netrw_bannerbackslash   = (not defined)'
+  endif
  put = 'let g:netrw_browse_split      = '.g:netrw_browse_split
  if exists("g:netrw_browsex_viewer")
-   put = 'let g:netrw_browsex_viewer    = '.g:netrw_browsex_viewer
+   put = 'let g:netrw_browsex_viewer   = '.g:netrw_browsex_viewer
  else
-   put = 'let g:netrw_browsex_viewer    = (not defined)'
+   put = '\" let g:netrw_browsex_viewer   = (not defined)'
  endif
  put = 'let g:netrw_compress          = '.g:netrw_compress
-  put = 'let g:netrw_cursorline        = '.g:netrw_cursorline
+  if exists("g:Netrw_corehandler")
+   put = 'let g:Netrw_corehandler      = '.g:Netrw_corehandler
+  else
+   put = '\" let g:Netrw_corehandler      = (not defined)'
+  endif
+  put = 'let g:netrw_ctags             = '.g:netrw_ctags
+  put = 'let g:netrw_cursor            = '.g:netrw_cursor
  let decompressline= line("$")
-  put ='let g:netrw_decompress...'
+  put = 'let g:netrw_decompress        = '.string(g:netrw_decompress)
+  if exists("g:netrw_dynamic_maxfilenamelen")
+   put = 'let g:netrw_dynamic_maxfilenamelen='.g:netrw_dynamic_maxfilenamelen
+  else
+   put = '\" let g:netrw_dynamic_maxfilenamelen= (not defined)'
+  endif
  put = 'let g:netrw_dirhistmax        = '.g:netrw_dirhistmax
+  put = 'let g:netrw_errorlvl          = '.g:netrw_errorlvl
  put = 'let g:netrw_fastbrowse        = '.g:netrw_fastbrowse
  let fnameescline= line("$")
-  put = 'let g:netrw_fname_escape...'
+  put = 'let g:netrw_fname_escape      = '.string(g:netrw_fname_escape)
  put = 'let g:netrw_ftp_browse_reject = '.g:netrw_ftp_browse_reject
  put = 'let g:netrw_ftp_list_cmd      = '.g:netrw_ftp_list_cmd
  put = 'let g:netrw_ftp_sizelist_cmd  = '.g:netrw_ftp_sizelist_cmd
  put = 'let g:netrw_ftp_timelist_cmd  = '.g:netrw_ftp_timelist_cmd
  let globescline= line("$")
-  put ='let g:netrw_glob_escape...'
+  put = 'let g:netrw_glob_escape       = '.string(g:netrw_glob_escape)
  put = 'let g:netrw_hide              = '.g:netrw_hide
+  if exists("g:netrw_home")
+   put = 'let g:netrw_home              = '.g:netrw_home
+  else
+   put = '\" let g:netrw_home              = (not defined)'
+  endif
  put = 'let g:netrw_keepdir           = '.g:netrw_keepdir
  put = 'let g:netrw_list_cmd          = '.g:netrw_list_cmd
  put = 'let g:netrw_list_hide         = '.g:netrw_list_hide
  put = 'let g:netrw_liststyle         = '.g:netrw_liststyle
  put = 'let g:netrw_localcopycmd      = '.g:netrw_localcopycmd
-  put = 'let g:netrw_local_mkdir       = '.g:netrw_local_mkdir
+  put = 'let g:netrw_localmkdir        = '.g:netrw_localmkdir
  put = 'let g:netrw_localmovecmd      = '.g:netrw_localmovecmd
-  put = 'let g:netrw_local_rmdir       = '.g:netrw_local_rmdir
+  put = 'let g:netrw_localrmdir        = '.g:netrw_localrmdir
  put = 'let g:netrw_maxfilenamelen    = '.g:netrw_maxfilenamelen
  put = 'let g:netrw_menu              = '.g:netrw_menu
+  put = 'let g:netrw_mousemaps         = '.g:netrw_mousemaps
  put = 'let g:netrw_mkdir_cmd         = '.g:netrw_mkdir_cmd
+  if exists("g:netrw_nobeval")
+   put = 'let g:netrw_nobeval           = '.g:netrw_nobeval
+  else
+   put = '\" let g:netrw_nobeval           = (not defined)'
+  endif
+  put = 'let g:netrw_remote_mkdir      = '.g:netrw_remote_mkdir
  put = 'let g:netrw_preview           = '.g:netrw_preview
  put = 'let g:netrw_rename_cmd        = '.g:netrw_rename_cmd
  put = 'let g:netrw_retmap            = '.g:netrw_retmap
  put = 'let g:netrw_rm_cmd            = '.g:netrw_rm_cmd
  put = 'let g:netrw_rmdir_cmd         = '.g:netrw_rmdir_cmd
  put = 'let g:netrw_rmf_cmd           = '.g:netrw_rmf_cmd
-  put = 'let g:netrw_silent            = '.g:netrw_silent
  put = 'let g:netrw_sort_by           = '.g:netrw_sort_by
  put = 'let g:netrw_sort_direction    = '.g:netrw_sort_direction
  put = 'let g:netrw_sort_options      = '.g:netrw_sort_options
  put = 'let g:netrw_sort_sequence     = '.g:netrw_sort_sequence
  put = 'let g:netrw_special_syntax    = '.g:netrw_special_syntax
  put = 'let g:netrw_ssh_browse_reject = '.g:netrw_ssh_browse_reject
+  put = 'let g:netrw_ssh_cmd           = '.g:netrw_ssh_cmd
  put = 'let g:netrw_scpport           = '.g:netrw_scpport
  put = 'let g:netrw_sepchr            = '.g:netrw_sepchr
  put = 'let g:netrw_sshport           = '.g:netrw_sshport
--- a/runtime/autoload/phpcomplete.vim
+++ b/runtime/autoload/phpcomplete.vim
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim completion script
 " Language:	PHP
 " Maintainer:	Mikolaj Machowski ( mikmach AT wp DOT pl )
-" Last Change:	2006 May 9
+" Last Change:	2011 Dec 08
 "
 "   TODO:
 "   - Class aware completion:
@@ -650,6 +650,7 @@ function! phpcomplete#GetClassContents(file, name) " {{{
 	" this is the most efficient way. The other way
 	" is to go through the looong string looking for
 	" matching {}
+	let original_window = winnr()
 	below 1new
 	0put =cfile
 	call search('class\s\+'.a:name)
@@ -667,6 +668,9 @@ function! phpcomplete#GetClassContents(file, name) " {{{
 	let classcontent = join(classc, "\n")

 	bw! %
+	" go back to where we started
+	exe original_window.'wincmd w'
+
 	if extends_class != ''
 		let classlocation = phpcomplete#GetClassLocation(extends_class)
 		if filereadable(classlocation)
--- a/runtime/autoload/rubycomplete.vim
+++ b/runtime/autoload/rubycomplete.vim
@@ -1,9 +1,7 @@
 " Vim completion script
 " Language:             Ruby
 " Maintainer:           Mark Guzman <segfault@hasno.info>
-" Last Change:          2009 Sep 28
-" URL:                  http://vim-ruby.rubyforge.org
-" Anon CVS:             See above site
+" URL:                  https://github.com/vim-ruby/vim-ruby
 " Release Coordinator:  Doug Kearns <dougkearns@gmail.com>
 " Maintainer Version:   0.8.1
 " ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -12,16 +10,23 @@
 " ----------------------------------------------------------------------------

 " {{{ requirement checks
+
+function! s:ErrMsg(msg)
+    echohl ErrorMsg
+    echo a:msg
+    echohl None
+endfunction
+
 if !has('ruby')
-    s:ErrMsg( "Error: Rubycomplete requires vim compiled with +ruby" )
-    s:ErrMsg( "Error: falling back to syntax completion" )
+    call s:ErrMsg( "Error: Rubycomplete requires vim compiled with +ruby" )
+    call s:ErrMsg( "Error: falling back to syntax completion" )
    " lets fall back to syntax completion
    setlocal omnifunc=syntaxcomplete#Complete
    finish
 endif

 if version < 700
-    s:ErrMsg( "Error: Required vim >= 7.0" )
+    call s:ErrMsg( "Error: Required vim >= 7.0" )
    finish
 endif
 " }}} requirement checks
@@ -51,12 +56,6 @@ endif
 " {{{ vim-side support functions
 let s:rubycomplete_debug = 0

-function! s:ErrMsg(msg)
-    echohl ErrorMsg
-    echo a:msg
-    echohl None
-endfunction
-
 function! s:dprint(msg)
    if s:rubycomplete_debug == 1
        echom a:msg
@@ -133,7 +132,7 @@ function! s:GetRubyVarType(v)
    let stopline = 1
    let vtp = ''
    let pos = getpos('.')
-    let sstr = '^\s*#\s*@var\s*'.a:v.'\>\s\+[^ \t]\+\s*$'
+    let sstr = '^\s*#\s*@var\s*'.escape(a:v, '*').'\>\s\+[^ \t]\+\s*$'
    let [lnum,lcol] = searchpos(sstr,'nb',stopline)
    if lnum != 0 && lcol != 0
        call setpos('.',pos)
@@ -275,7 +274,7 @@ class VimRubyCompletion
    pare = /^\s*class\s*(.*)\s*<\s*(.*)\s*\n/.match( classdef )
    load_buffer_class( $2 ) if pare != nil  && $2 != name # load parent class if needed

-    mixre = /.*\n\s*include\s*(.*)\s*\n/.match( classdef )
+    mixre = /.*\n\s*(include|prepend)\s*(.*)\s*\n/.match( classdef )
    load_buffer_module( $2 ) if mixre != nil && $2 != name # load mixins if needed

    begin
@@ -364,6 +363,10 @@ class VimRubyCompletion
    print txt if @@debug
  end

+  def escape_vim_singlequote_string(str)
+    str.to_s.gsub(/'/,"\\'")
+  end
+
  def get_buffer_entity_list( type )
    # this will be a little expensive.
    loading_allowed = VIM::evaluate("exists('g:rubycomplete_buffer_loading') && g:rubycomplete_buffer_loading")
@@ -526,9 +529,9 @@ class VimRubyCompletion
  end

  def clean_sel(sel, msg)
-    sel.delete_if { |x| x == nil }
-    sel.uniq!
-    sel.grep(/^#{Regexp.quote(msg)}/) if msg != nil
+    ret = sel.reject{|x|x.nil?}.uniq
+    ret = ret.grep(/^#{Regexp.quote(msg)}/) if msg != nil
+    ret
  end

  def get_rails_view_methods
@@ -767,10 +770,10 @@ class VimRubyCompletion
    constants = clean_sel( constants, message )

    valid = []
-    valid += methods.collect { |m| { :name => m, :type => 'm' } }
-    valid += variables.collect { |v| { :name => v, :type => 'v' } }
-    valid += classes.collect { |c| { :name => c, :type => 't' } }
-    valid += constants.collect { |d| { :name => d, :type => 'd' } }
+    valid += methods.collect { |m| { :name => m.to_s, :type => 'm' } }
+    valid += variables.collect { |v| { :name => v.to_s, :type => 'v' } }
+    valid += classes.collect { |c| { :name => c.to_s, :type => 't' } }
+    valid += constants.collect { |d| { :name => d.to_s, :type => 'd' } }
    valid.sort! { |x,y| x[:name] <=> y[:name] }

    outp = ""
@@ -779,7 +782,7 @@ class VimRubyCompletion
    rg.step(150) do |x|
      stpos = 0+x
      enpos = 150+x
-      valid[stpos..enpos].each { |c| outp += "{'word':'%s','item':'%s','kind':'%s'}," % [ c[:name], c[:name], c[:type] ] }
+      valid[stpos..enpos].each { |c| outp += "{'word':'%s','item':'%s','kind':'%s'}," % [ c[:name], c[:name], c[:type] ].map{|x|escape_vim_singlequote_string(x)} }
      outp.sub!(/,$/, '')

      VIM::command("call extend(g:rubycomplete_completions, [%s])" % outp)
--- a/runtime/autoload/spellfile.vim
+++ b/runtime/autoload/spellfile.vim
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 " Vim script to download a missing spell file
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change:	2008 Nov 29
+" Last Change:	2012 Jan 08

 if !exists('g:spellfile_URL')
  " Prefer using http:// when netrw should be able to use it, since
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ function! spellfile#LoadFile(lang)
    " Remember the buffer number, we check it below.
    new
    let newbufnr = winbufnr(0)
-    setlocal bin
+    setlocal bin fenc=
    echo 'Downloading ' . fname . '...'
    call spellfile#Nread(fname)
    if getline(2) !~ 'VIMspell'
@@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ function! spellfile#LoadFile(lang)
 	  " Our buffer has vanished!?  Open a new window.
 	  echomsg "download buffer disappeared, opening a new one"
 	  new
-	  setlocal bin
+	  setlocal bin fenc=
 	else
 	  exe winnr . "wincmd w"
 	endif
@@ -120,6 +120,7 @@ function! spellfile#LoadFile(lang)
      else
 	let dirname = escape(dirlist[dirchoice], ' ')
      endif
+      setlocal fenc=
      exe "write " . dirname . '/' . fname

      " Also download the .sug file, if the user wants to.
--- a/runtime/autoload/sqlcomplete.vim
+++ b/runtime/autoload/sqlcomplete.vim
@@ -1,16 +1,63 @@
 " Vim OMNI completion script for SQL
 " Language:    SQL
 " Maintainer:  David Fishburn <dfishburn dot vim at gmail dot com>
-" Version:     10.0
-" Last Change: 2010 Jun 11
+" Version:     15.0
+" Last Change: 2013 May 13
+" Homepage:    http://www.vim.org/scripts/script.php?script_id=1572
 " Usage:       For detailed help
-"              ":help sql.txt" 
-"              or ":help ft-sql-omni" 
+"              ":help sql.txt"
+"              or ":help ft-sql-omni"
 "              or read $VIMRUNTIME/doc/sql.txt

 " History
+"
+" TODO
+"     - Jonas Enberg - if no table is found when using column completion
+"       look backwards to a FROM clause and find the first table
+"       and complete it.
+"
+" Version 15.0 (May 2013)
+"     - NF: Changed the SQL precached syntax items, omni_sql_precache_syntax_groups,
+"           to use regular expressions to pick up extended syntax group names.
+"           This requires an updated SyntaxComplete plugin version 13.0.
+"           If the required versions have not been installed, previous
+"           behaviour will not be impacted.
+"
+" Version 14.0 (Dec 2012)
+"     - BF: Added check for cpo
+"
+" Version 13.0 (Dec 2012)
+"     - NF: When completing column lists or drilling into a table
+"           and g:omni_sql_include_owner is enabled, the
+"           only the table name would be replaced with the column
+"           list instead of the table name and owner (if specified).
+"     - NF: When completing column lists using table aliases
+"           and g:omni_sql_include_owner is enabled, account
+"           for the owner name when looking up the table
+"           list instead of the table name and owner (if specified).
+"     - BF: When completing column lists or drilling into a table
+"           and g:omni_sql_include_owner is enabled, the
+"           column list could often not be found for the table.
+"     - BF: When OMNI popped up, possibly the wrong word
+"           would be replaced for column and column list options.
+"
+" Version 12.0 (Feb 2012)
+"     - Partial column name completion did not work when a table
+"       name or table alias was provided (Jonas Enberg).
+"     - Improved the handling of column completion.  First we match any
+"       columns from a previous completion.  If not matches are found, we
+"       consider the partial name to be a table or table alias for the
+"       query and attempt to match on it.
+"
+" Version 11.0 (Jan 2012)
+"     Added g:omni_sql_default_compl_type variable
+"         - You can specify which type of completion to default to
+"           when pressing <C-X><C-O>.  The entire list of available
+"           choices can be found in the calls to sqlcomplete#Map in:
+"               ftplugin/sql.vim
+"
 " Version 10.0
-"     Updated PreCacheSyntax() 
+"     Updated PreCacheSyntax()
 "         - Now returns a List of the syntax items it finds.
 "           This allows other plugins / scripts to use this list for their own
 "           purposes.  In this case XPTemplate can use them for a Choose list.
@@ -18,33 +65,33 @@
 "           warning if not.
 "         - Verifies the parameters are the correct type and displays a
 "           warning if not.
-"     Updated SQLCWarningMsg() 
+"     Updated SQLCWarningMsg()
 "         - Prepends warning message with SQLComplete so you know who issued
 "           the warning.
-"     Updated SQLCErrorMsg() 
+"     Updated SQLCErrorMsg()
 "         - Prepends error message with SQLComplete so you know who issued
 "           the error.
-"     
-" Version 9.0
+"
+" Version 9.0 (May 2010)
 "     This change removes some of the support for tables with spaces in their
-"     names in order to simplify the regexes used to pull out query table 
+"     names in order to simplify the regexes used to pull out query table
 "     aliases for more robust table name and column name code completion.
 "     Full support for "table names with spaces" can be added in again
 "     after 7.3.
 "
 " Version 8.0
-"     Incorrectly re-executed the g:ftplugin_sql_omni_key_right and g:ftplugin_sql_omni_key_left 
+"     Incorrectly re-executed the g:ftplugin_sql_omni_key_right and g:ftplugin_sql_omni_key_left
 "     when drilling in and out of a column list for a table.
 "
-" Version 7.0
+" Version 7.0 (Jan 2010)
 "     Better handling of object names
 "
-" Version 6.0
+" Version 6.0 (Apr 2008)
 "     Supports object names with spaces "my table name"
 "
 " Set completion with CTRL-X CTRL-O to autoloaded function.
 " This check is in place in case this script is
-" sourced directly instead of using the autoload feature. 
+" sourced directly instead of using the autoload feature.
 if exists('&omnifunc')
    " Do not set the option if already set since this
    " results in an E117 warning.
@@ -54,9 +101,11 @@ if exists('&omnifunc')
 endif

 if exists('g:loaded_sql_completion')
-    finish 
+    finish
 endif
-let g:loaded_sql_completion = 100
+let g:loaded_sql_completion = 150
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim

 " Maintains filename of dictionary
 let s:sql_file_table        = ""
@@ -69,17 +118,19 @@ let s:tbl_alias             = []
 let s:tbl_cols              = []
 let s:syn_list              = []
 let s:syn_value             = []
- 
+
 " Used in conjunction with the syntaxcomplete plugin
 let s:save_inc              = ""
 let s:save_exc              = ""
-if exists('g:omni_syntax_group_include_sql')
-    let s:save_inc = g:omni_syntax_group_include_sql
+if !exists('g:omni_syntax_group_include_sql')
+    let g:omni_syntax_group_include_sql = ''
 endif
-if exists('g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_sql')
-    let s:save_exc = g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_sql
+if !exists('g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_sql')
+    let g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_sql = ''
 endif
- 
+let s:save_inc = g:omni_syntax_group_include_sql
+let s:save_exc = g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_sql
+
 " Used with the column list
 let s:save_prev_table       = ""

@@ -90,12 +141,12 @@ endif
 " Default syntax items to precache
 if !exists('g:omni_sql_precache_syntax_groups')
    let g:omni_sql_precache_syntax_groups = [
-                \ 'syntax',
-                \ 'sqlKeyword',
-                \ 'sqlFunction',
-                \ 'sqlOption',
-                \ 'sqlType',
-                \ 'sqlStatement'
+                \ 'syntax\w*',
+                \ 'sqlKeyword\w*',
+                \ 'sqlFunction\w*',
+                \ 'sqlOption\w*',
+                \ 'sqlType\w*',
+                \ 'sqlStatement\w*'
                \ ]
 endif
 " Set ignorecase to the ftplugin standard
@@ -110,14 +161,25 @@ if !exists('g:omni_sql_include_owner')
        if g:loaded_dbext >= 300
            " New to dbext 3.00, by default the table lists include the owner
            " name of the table.  This is used when determining how much of
-            " whatever has been typed should be replaced as part of the 
+            " whatever has been typed should be replaced as part of the
            " code replacement.
            let g:omni_sql_include_owner = 1
        endif
    endif
 endif
+" Default type of completion used when <C-X><C-O> is pressed
+if !exists('g:omni_sql_default_compl_type')
+    let g:omni_sql_default_compl_type = 'table'
+endif

 " This function is used for the 'omnifunc' option.
+" It is called twice by omni and it is responsible
+" for returning the completion list of items.
+" But it must also determine context of what to complete
+" and what to "replace" with the completion.
+" The a:base, is replaced directly with what the user
+" chooses from the choices.
+" The s:prepend provides context for the completion.
 function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)

    " Default to table name completion
@@ -126,6 +188,7 @@ function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
    if exists('b:sql_compl_type')
        let compl_type = b:sql_compl_type
    endif
+    let begindot = 0

    " First pass through this function determines how much of the line should
    " be replaced by whatever is chosen from the completion list
@@ -134,13 +197,12 @@ function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
        let line     = getline('.')
        let start    = col('.') - 1
        let lastword = -1
-        let begindot = 0
        " Check if the first character is a ".", for column completion
        if line[start - 1] == '.'
            let begindot = 1
        endif
        while start > 0
-            " Additional code was required to handle objects which 
+            " Additional code was required to handle objects which
            " can contain spaces like "my table name".
            if line[start - 1] !~ '\(\w\|\.\)'
                " If the previous character is not a period or word character
@@ -150,7 +212,7 @@ function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
            elseif line[start - 1] =~ '\w'
                " If the previous character is word character continue back
                let start -= 1
-            elseif line[start - 1] =~ '\.' && 
+            elseif line[start - 1] =~ '\.' &&
                        \ compl_type =~ 'column\|table\|view\|procedure'
                " If the previous character is a period and we are completing
                " an object which can be specified with a period like this:
@@ -160,7 +222,10 @@ function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
                " If lastword has already been set for column completion
                " break from the loop, since we do not also want to pickup
                " a table name if it was also supplied.
-                if lastword != -1 && compl_type == 'column' 
+                " Unless g:omni_sql_include_owner == 1, then we can
+                " include the ownername.
+                if lastword != -1 && compl_type == 'column'
+                            \ && g:omni_sql_include_owner == 0
                    break
                endif
                " If column completion was specified stop at the "." if
@@ -171,8 +236,8 @@ function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
                endif
                " If omni_sql_include_owner = 0, do not include the table
                " name as part of the substitution, so break here
-                if lastword == -1 && 
-                            \ compl_type =~ 'table\|view\|procedure\column_csv' && 
+                if lastword == -1 &&
+                            \ compl_type =~ '\<\(table\|view\|procedure\|column\|column_csv\)\>' &&
                            \ g:omni_sql_include_owner == 0
                    let lastword = start
                    break
@@ -202,7 +267,7 @@ function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
    let compl_list = []

    " Default to table name completion
-    let compl_type = 'table'
+    let compl_type = g:omni_sql_default_compl_type
    " Allow maps to specify what type of object completion they want
    if exists('b:sql_compl_type')
        let compl_type = b:sql_compl_type
@@ -216,7 +281,7 @@ function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)

    if compl_type == 'table' ||
                \ compl_type == 'procedure' ||
-                \ compl_type == 'view' 
+                \ compl_type == 'view'

        " This type of completion relies upon the dbext.vim plugin
        if s:SQLCCheck4dbext() == -1
@@ -254,7 +319,7 @@ function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)

        if base == ""
            " The last time we displayed a column list we stored
-            " the table name.  If the user selects a column list 
+            " the table name.  If the user selects a column list
            " without a table name of alias present, assume they want
            " the previous column list displayed.
            let base = s:save_prev_table
@@ -269,20 +334,26 @@ function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
            let table  = matchstr( base, '^\(.*\.\)\?\zs.*\ze\..*' )
            let column = matchstr( base, '.*\.\zs.*' )

+            if g:omni_sql_include_owner == 1 && owner == '' && table != '' && column != ''
+                let owner  = table
+                let table  = column
+                let column = ''
+            endif
+
            " It is pretty well impossible to determine if the user
            " has entered:
            "    owner.table
            "    table.column_prefix
-            " So there are a couple of things we can do to mitigate 
+            " So there are a couple of things we can do to mitigate
            " this issue.
            "    1.  Check if the dbext plugin has the option turned
            "        on to even allow owners
            "    2.  Based on 1, if the user is showing a table list
-            "        and the DrillIntoTable (using <Right>) then 
+            "        and the DrillIntoTable (using <Right>) then
            "        this will be owner.table.  In this case, we can
-            "        check to see the table.column exists in the 
+            "        check to see the table.column exists in the
            "        cached table list.  If it does, then we have
-            "        determined the user has actually chosen 
+            "        determined the user has actually chosen
            "        owner.table, not table.column_prefix.
            let found = -1
            if g:omni_sql_include_owner == 1 && owner == ''
@@ -297,17 +368,46 @@ function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
            " If the user has indicated not to use table owners at all and
            " the base ends in a '.' we know they are not providing a column
            " name, so we can shift the items appropriately.
-            if found != -1 || (g:omni_sql_include_owner == 0 && base !~ '\.$')
-                let owner  = table
-                let table  = column
-                let column = ''
-            endif
+            " if found != -1 || (g:omni_sql_include_owner == 0 && base !~ '\.$')
+            "     let owner  = table
+            "     let table  = column
+            "     let column = ''
+            " endif
        else
+            " If no "." was provided and the user asked for
+            " column level completion, first attempt the match
+            " on any previous column lists.  If the user asked
+            " for a list of columns comma separated, continue as usual.
+            if compl_type == 'column' && s:save_prev_table != ''
+                " The last time we displayed a column list we stored
+                " the table name.  If the user selects a column list
+                " without a table name of alias present, assume they want
+                " the previous column list displayed.
+                let table     = s:save_prev_table
+                let list_type = ''
+
+                let compl_list  = s:SQLCGetColumns(table, list_type)
+                if ! empty(compl_list)
+                    " If no column prefix has been provided and the table
+                    " name was provided, append it to each of the items
+                    " returned.
+                    let compl_list = filter(deepcopy(compl_list), 'v:val=~"^'.base.'"' )
+
+                    " If not empty, we have a match on columns
+                    " return the list
+                    if ! empty(compl_list)
+                        return compl_list
+                    endif
+                endif
+            endif
+            " Since no columns were found to match the base supplied
+            " assume the user is trying to complete the column list
+            " for a table (and or an alias to a table).
            let table  = base
        endif

        " Get anything after the . and consider this the table name
-        " If an owner has been specified, then we must consider the 
+        " If an owner has been specified, then we must consider the
        " base to be a partial column name
        " let base  = matchstr( base, '^\(.*\.\)\?\zs.*' )

@@ -322,16 +422,25 @@ function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
                let list_type     = 'csv'
            endif

-            let compl_list  = s:SQLCGetColumns(table, list_type)
+            " If we are including the OWNER for the objects, then for
+            " table completion, if we have it, it should be included
+            " as there can be the same table names in a database yet
+            " with different owner names.
+            if g:omni_sql_include_owner == 1 && owner != '' && table != ''
+                let compl_list  = s:SQLCGetColumns(owner.'.'.table, list_type)
+            else
+                let compl_list  = s:SQLCGetColumns(table, list_type)
+            endif
+
            if column != ''
                " If no column prefix has been provided and the table
                " name was provided, append it to each of the items
                " returned.
-                let compl_list = map(compl_list, "table.'.'.v:val")
+                let compl_list = map(compl_list, 'table.".".v:val')
                if owner != ''
                    " If an owner has been provided append it to each of the
                    " items returned.
-                    let compl_list = map(compl_list, "owner.'.'.v:val")
+                    let compl_list = map(compl_list, 'owner.".".v:val')
                endif
            else
                let base = ''
@@ -345,11 +454,14 @@ function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
        endif
    elseif compl_type == 'resetCache'
        " Reset all cached items
-        let s:tbl_name  = []
-        let s:tbl_alias = []
-        let s:tbl_cols  = []
-        let s:syn_list  = []
-        let s:syn_value = []
+        let s:tbl_name           = []
+        let s:tbl_alias          = []
+        let s:tbl_cols           = []
+        let s:syn_list           = []
+        let s:syn_value          = []
+        let s:sql_file_table     = ""
+        let s:sql_file_procedure = ""
+        let s:sql_file_view      = ""

        let msg = "All SQL cached items have been removed."
        call s:SQLCWarningMsg(msg)
@@ -361,22 +473,41 @@ function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)

    if base != ''
        " Filter the list based on the first few characters the user entered.
-        " Check if the text matches at the beginning 
-        " or 
+        " Check if the text matches at the beginning
+        "         \\(^.base.'\\)
+        " or
        " Match to a owner.table or alias.column type match
+        "         ^\\(\\w\\+\\.\\)\\?'.base.'\\)
        " or
        " Handle names with spaces "my table name"
+        "         "\\(^'.base.'\\|^\\(\\w\\+\\.\\)\\?'.base.'\\)"'
+        "
        let expr = 'v:val '.(g:omni_sql_ignorecase==1?'=~?':'=~#').' "\\(^'.base.'\\|^\\(\\w\\+\\.\\)\\?'.base.'\\)"'
        " let expr = 'v:val '.(g:omni_sql_ignorecase==1?'=~?':'=~#').' "\\(^'.base.'\\)"'
        " let expr = 'v:val '.(g:omni_sql_ignorecase==1?'=~?':'=~#').' "\\(^'.base.'\\|\\(\\.\\)\\?'.base.'\\)"'
        " let expr = 'v:val '.(g:omni_sql_ignorecase==1?'=~?':'=~#').' "\\(^'.base.'\\|\\([^.]*\\)\\?'.base.'\\)"'
        let compl_list = filter(deepcopy(compl_list), expr)
+
+        if empty(compl_list) && compl_type == 'table' && base =~ '\.$'
+            " It is possible we could be looking for column name completion
+            " and the user simply hit C-X C-O to lets try it as well
+            " since we had no hits with the tables.
+            " If the base ends with a . it is hard to know if we are
+            " completing table names or column names.
+            let list_type = ''
+
+            let compl_list  = s:SQLCGetColumns(base, list_type)
+        endif
    endif

    if exists('b:sql_compl_savefunc') && b:sql_compl_savefunc != ""
        let &omnifunc = b:sql_compl_savefunc
    endif

+    if empty(compl_list)
+        call s:SQLCWarningMsg( 'Could not find type['.compl_type.'] using prepend[.'.s:prepended.'] base['.a:base.']' )
+    endif
+
    return compl_list
 endfunc

@@ -384,7 +515,7 @@ function! sqlcomplete#PreCacheSyntax(...)
    let syn_group_arr = []
    let syn_items     = []

-    if a:0 > 0 
+    if a:0 > 0
        if type(a:1) != 3
            call s:SQLCWarningMsg("Parameter is not a list. Example:['syntaxGroup1', 'syntaxGroup2']")
            return ''
@@ -407,7 +538,7 @@ endfunction
 function! sqlcomplete#ResetCacheSyntax(...)
    let syn_group_arr = []

-    if a:0 > 0 
+    if a:0 > 0
        if type(a:1) != 3
            call s:SQLCWarningMsg("Parameter is not a list. Example:['syntaxGroup1', 'syntaxGroup2']")
            return ''
@@ -458,7 +589,7 @@ function! sqlcomplete#DrillIntoTable()
 	" If the popup is not visible, simple perform the normal
 	" key behaviour.
 	" Must use exec since they key must be preceeded by "\"
-	" or feedkeys will simply push each character of the string 
+	" or feedkeys will simply push each character of the string
 	" rather than the "key press".
        exec 'call feedkeys("\'.g:ftplugin_sql_omni_key_right.'", "n")'
    endif
@@ -475,7 +606,7 @@ function! sqlcomplete#DrillOutOfColumns()
 	" If the popup is not visible, simple perform the normal
 	" key behaviour.
 	" Must use exec since they key must be preceeded by "\"
-	" or feedkeys will simply push each character of the string 
+	" or feedkeys will simply push each character of the string
 	" rather than the "key press".
        exec 'call feedkeys("\'.g:ftplugin_sql_omni_key_left.'", "n")'
    endif
@@ -484,16 +615,16 @@ endfunction

 function! s:SQLCWarningMsg(msg)
    echohl WarningMsg
-    echomsg 'SQLComplete:'.a:msg 
+    echomsg 'SQLComplete:'.a:msg
    echohl None
 endfunction
-      
+
 function! s:SQLCErrorMsg(msg)
    echohl ErrorMsg
-    echomsg 'SQLComplete:'.a:msg 
+    echomsg 'SQLComplete:'.a:msg
    echohl None
 endfunction
-      
+
 function! s:SQLCGetSyntaxList(syn_group)
    let syn_group  = a:syn_group
    let compl_list = []
@@ -504,19 +635,23 @@ function! s:SQLCGetSyntaxList(syn_group)
        " Return previously cached value
        let compl_list = s:syn_value[list_idx]
    else
-        " Request the syntax list items from the 
+        let s:save_inc = g:omni_syntax_group_include_sql
+        let s:save_exc = g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_sql
+        let g:omni_syntax_group_include_sql = ''
+        let g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_sql = ''
+
+        " Request the syntax list items from the
        " syntax completion plugin
        if syn_group == 'syntax'
            " Handle this special case.  This allows the user
            " to indicate they want all the syntax items available,
            " so do not specify a specific include list.
-            let g:omni_syntax_group_include_sql = ''
+            let syn_value                       = syntaxcomplete#OmniSyntaxList()
        else
            " The user has specified a specific syntax group
            let g:omni_syntax_group_include_sql = syn_group
+            let syn_value                       = syntaxcomplete#OmniSyntaxList(syn_group)
        endif
-        let g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_sql = ''
-        let syn_value                       = syntaxcomplete#OmniSyntaxList()
        let g:omni_syntax_group_include_sql = s:save_inc
        let g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_sql = s:save_exc
        " Cache these values for later use
@@ -552,7 +687,7 @@ function! s:SQLCAddAlias(table_name, table_alias, cols)
    let table_alias = a:table_alias
    let cols        = a:cols

-    if g:omni_sql_use_tbl_alias != 'n' 
+    if g:omni_sql_use_tbl_alias != 'n'
        if table_alias == ''
            if 'da' =~? g:omni_sql_use_tbl_alias
                if table_name =~ '_'
@@ -562,13 +697,13 @@ function! s:SQLCAddAlias(table_name, table_alias, cols)
                    setlocal iskeyword-=_

                    " Get the first letter of each word
-                    " [[:alpha:]] is used instead of \w 
+                    " [[:alpha:]] is used instead of \w
                    " to catch extended accented characters
                    "
-                    let table_alias = substitute( 
-                                \ table_name, 
-                                \ '\<[[:alpha:]]\+\>_\?', 
-                                \ '\=strpart(submatch(0), 0, 1)', 
+                    let table_alias = substitute(
+                                \ table_name,
+                                \ '\<[[:alpha:]]\+\>_\?',
+                                \ '\=strpart(submatch(0), 0, 1)',
                                \ 'g'
                                \ )
                    " Restore original value
@@ -596,7 +731,7 @@ function! s:SQLCAddAlias(table_name, table_alias, cols)
    return cols
 endfunction

-function! s:SQLCGetObjectOwner(object) 
+function! s:SQLCGetObjectOwner(object)
    " The owner regex matches a word at the start of the string which is
    " followed by a dot, but doesn't include the dot in the result.
    " ^           - from beginning of line
@@ -609,11 +744,29 @@ function! s:SQLCGetObjectOwner(object)
    " let owner = matchstr( a:object, '^\s*\zs.*\ze\.' )
    let owner = matchstr( a:object, '^\("\|\[\)\?\zs\.\{-}\ze\("\|\]\)\?\.' )
    return owner
-endfunction 
+endfunction

 function! s:SQLCGetColumns(table_name, list_type)
+    if a:table_name =~ '\.'
+        " Check if the owner/creator has been specified
+        let owner  = matchstr( a:table_name, '^\zs.*\ze\..*\..*' )
+        let table  = matchstr( a:table_name, '^\(.*\.\)\?\zs.*\ze\..*' )
+        let column = matchstr( a:table_name, '.*\.\zs.*' )
+
+        if g:omni_sql_include_owner == 1 && owner == '' && table != '' && column != ''
+            let owner  = table
+            let table  = column
+            let column = ''
+        endif
+    else
+        let owner  = ''
+        let table  = matchstr(a:table_name, '^["\[\]a-zA-Z0-9_ ]\+\ze\.\?')
+        let column = ''
+    endif
+
    " Check if the table name was provided as part of the column name
-    let table_name   = matchstr(a:table_name, '^["\[\]a-zA-Z0-9_ ]\+\ze\.\?')
+    " let table_name   = matchstr(a:table_name, '^["\[\]a-zA-Z0-9_ ]\+\ze\.\?')
+    let table_name   = table
    let table_cols   = []
    let table_alias  = ''
    let move_to_top  = 1
@@ -636,7 +789,7 @@ function! s:SQLCGetColumns(table_name, list_type)
    if list_idx > -1
        let table_cols = split(s:tbl_cols[list_idx], '\n')
    else
-        " Check if we have already cached the column list for this table 
+        " Check if we have already cached the column list for this table
        " by its alias, assuming the table_name provided was actually
        " the alias for the table instead
        "     select *
@@ -654,7 +807,7 @@ function! s:SQLCGetColumns(table_name, list_type)
    " And the table ends in a "." or we are looking for a column list
    " if list_idx == -1 && (a:table_name =~ '\.' || b:sql_compl_type =~ 'column')
    " if list_idx == -1 && (a:table_name =~ '\.' || a:list_type =~ 'csv')
-    if list_idx == -1 
+    if list_idx == -1
         let saveY      = @y
         let saveSearch = @/
         let saveWScan  = &wrapscan
@@ -665,7 +818,7 @@ function! s:SQLCGetColumns(table_name, list_type)
         setlocal nowrapscan
         " If . was entered, look at the word just before the .
         " We are looking for something like this:
-         "    select * 
+         "    select *
         "      from customer c
         "     where c.
         " So when . is pressed, we need to find 'c'
@@ -692,15 +845,15 @@ function! s:SQLCGetColumns(table_name, list_type)
         " if query =~? '^\c\(select\)'
         if query =~? '^\(select\|update\|delete\)'
             let found = 1
-             "  \(\(\<\w\+\>\)\.\)\?   - 
+             "  \(\(\<\w\+\>\)\.\)\?   -
             " '\c\(from\|join\|,\).\{-}'  - Starting at the from clause (case insensitive)
             " '\zs\(\(\<\w\+\>\)\.\)\?' - Get the owner name (optional)
-             " '\<\w\+\>\ze' - Get the table name 
+             " '\<\w\+\>\ze' - Get the table name
             " '\s\+\<'.table_name.'\>' - Followed by the alias
             " '\s*\.\@!.*'  - Cannot be followed by a .
             " '\(\<where\>\|$\)' - Must be followed by a WHERE clause
             " '.*'  - Exclude the rest of the line in the match
-             " let table_name_new = matchstr(@y, 
+             " let table_name_new = matchstr(@y,
             "             \ '\c\(from\|join\|,\).\{-}'.
             "             \ '\zs\(\("\|\[\)\?.\{-}\("\|\]\)\.\)\?'.
             "             \ '\("\|\[\)\?.\{-}\("\|\]\)\?\ze'.
@@ -711,7 +864,16 @@ function! s:SQLCGetColumns(table_name, list_type)
             "             \ '\(\<where\>\|$\)'.
             "             \ '.*'
             "             \ )
-             let table_name_new = matchstr(@y, 
+             "
+             "
+             " ''\c\(\<from\>\|\<join\>\|,\)\s*'  - Starting at the from clause (case insensitive)
+             " '\zs\(\("\|\[\)\?\w\+\("\|\]\)\?\.\)\?' - Get the owner name (optional)
+             " '\("\|\[\)\?\w\+\("\|\]\)\?\ze' - Get the table name
+             " '\s\+\%(as\s\+\)\?\<'.matchstr(table_name, '.\{-}\ze\.\?$').'\>' - Followed by the alias
+             " '\s*\.\@!.*'  - Cannot be followed by a .
+             " '\(\<where\>\|$\)' - Must be followed by a WHERE clause
+             " '.*'  - Exclude the rest of the line in the match
+             let table_name_new = matchstr(@y,
                         \ '\c\(\<from\>\|\<join\>\|,\)\s*'.
                         \ '\zs\(\("\|\[\)\?\w\+\("\|\]\)\?\.\)\?'.
                         \ '\("\|\[\)\?\w\+\("\|\]\)\?\ze'.
@@ -725,7 +887,12 @@ function! s:SQLCGetColumns(table_name, list_type)

             if table_name_new != ''
                 let table_alias = table_name
-                 let table_name  = matchstr( table_name_new, '^\(.*\.\)\?\zs.*\ze' )
+                 if g:omni_sql_include_owner == 1
+                    let table_name  = matchstr( table_name_new, '^\zs\(.\{-}\.\)\?\(.\{-}\.\)\?.*\ze' )
+                 else
+                     " let table_name  = matchstr( table_name_new, '^\(.*\.\)\?\zs.*\ze' )
+                    let table_name  = matchstr( table_name_new, '^\(.\{-}\.\)\?\zs\(.\{-}\.\)\?.*\ze' )
+                 endif

                 let list_idx = index(s:tbl_name, table_name, 0, &ignorecase)
                 if list_idx > -1
@@ -753,7 +920,7 @@ function! s:SQLCGetColumns(table_name, list_type)

         " Return to previous location
         call cursor(curline, curcol)
-         
+
         if found == 0
             if g:loaded_dbext > 300
                 exec 'DBSetOption use_tbl_alias='.saveSettingAlias
@@ -762,12 +929,13 @@ function! s:SQLCGetColumns(table_name, list_type)
             " Not a SQL statement, do not display a list
             return []
         endif
-    endif 
+    endif

    if empty(table_cols)
        " Specify silent mode, no messages to the user (tbl, 1)
        " Specify do not comma separate (tbl, 1, 1)
-        let table_cols_str = DB_getListColumn(table_name, 1, 1)
+        " let table_cols_str = DB_getListColumn(table_name, 1, 1)
+        let table_cols_str = DB_getListColumn((owner!=''?owner.'.':'').table_name, 1, 1)

        if table_cols_str != ""
            let s:tbl_name  = add( s:tbl_name,  table_name )
@@ -793,3 +961,7 @@ function! s:SQLCGetColumns(table_name, list_type)

    return table_cols
 endfunction
+"  Restore:
+let &cpo= s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
+" vim: ts=4 fdm=marker
--- a/runtime/autoload/syntaxcomplete.vim
+++ b/runtime/autoload/syntaxcomplete.vim
@@ -1,38 +1,80 @@
 " Vim completion script
 " Language:    All languages, uses existing syntax highlighting rules
 " Maintainer:  David Fishburn <dfishburn dot vim at gmail dot com>
-" Version:     7.0
-" Last Change: 2010 Jul 29
-" Usage:       For detailed help, ":help ft-syntax-omni" 
+" Version:     13.0
+" Last Change: 2013 May 14
+" Usage:       For detailed help, ":help ft-syntax-omni"

 " History
 "
+" Version 13.0
+"   - Extended the option omni_syntax_group_include_{filetype}
+"     to accept a comma separated list of regex's rather than
+"     string.  For example, for the javascript filetype you could
+"     use:
+"        let g:omni_syntax_group_include_javascript = 'javascript\w\+,jquery\w\+'
+"   - Some syntax files (perl.vim) use the match // syntax as a mechanism
+"     to identify keywords.  This update attempts to parse the
+"     match syntax and pull out syntax items which are at least
+"     3 words or more.
+"
+" Version 12.0
+"   - It is possible to have '-' as part of iskeyword, when
+"     checking for character ranges, tighten up the regex.
+"     E688: More targets than List items.
+"
+" Version 11.0
+"   - Corrected which characters required escaping during
+"     substitution calls.
+"
+" Version 10.0
+"   - Cycle through all the character ranges specified in the
+"     iskeyword option and build a list of valid word separators.
+"     Prior to this change, only actual characters were used,
+"     where for example ASCII "45" == "-".  If "45" were used
+"     in iskeyword the hyphen would not be picked up.
+"     This introduces a new option, since the character ranges
+"     specified could be multibyte:
+"         let g:omni_syntax_use_single_byte = 1
+"   - This by default will only allow single byte ASCII
+"     characters to be added and an additional check to ensure
+"     the charater is printable (see documentation for isprint).
+"
+" Version 9.0
+"   - Add the check for cpo.
+"
+" Version 8.0
+"   - Updated SyntaxCSyntaxGroupItems()
+"         - Some additional syntax items were also allowed
+"           on nextgroup= lines which were ignored by default.
+"           Now these lines are processed independently.
+"
 " Version 7.0
-"     Updated syntaxcomplete#OmniSyntaxList()
+"   - Updated syntaxcomplete#OmniSyntaxList()
 "         - Looking up the syntax groups defined from a syntax file
-"           looked for only 1 format of {filetype}GroupName, but some 
+"           looked for only 1 format of {filetype}GroupName, but some
 "           syntax writers use this format as well:
 "               {b:current_syntax}GroupName
-"           OmniSyntaxList() will now check for both if the first
+"   -       OmniSyntaxList() will now check for both if the first
 "           method does not find a match.
 "
 " Version 6.0
-"     Added syntaxcomplete#OmniSyntaxList()
-"         - Allows other plugins to use this for their own 
+"   - Added syntaxcomplete#OmniSyntaxList()
+"         - Allows other plugins to use this for their own
 "           purposes.
 "         - It will return a List of all syntax items for the
-"           syntax group name passed in.  
-"         - XPTemplate for SQL will use this function via the 
+"           syntax group name passed in.
+"         - XPTemplate for SQL will use this function via the
 "           sqlcomplete plugin to populate a Choose box.
 "
 " Version 5.0
-"     Updated SyntaxCSyntaxGroupItems()
+"   - Updated SyntaxCSyntaxGroupItems()
 "         - When processing a list of syntax groups, the final group
 "           was missed in function SyntaxCSyntaxGroupItems.
 "
 " Set completion with CTRL-X CTRL-O to autoloaded function.
 " This check is in place in case this script is
-" sourced directly instead of using the autoload feature. 
+" sourced directly instead of using the autoload feature.
 if exists('+omnifunc')
    " Do not set the option if already set since this
    " results in an E117 warning.
@@ -42,9 +84,13 @@ if exists('+omnifunc')
 endif

 if exists('g:loaded_syntax_completion')
-    finish 
+    finish
 endif
-let g:loaded_syntax_completion = 70
+let g:loaded_syntax_completion = 130
+
+" Turn on support for line continuations when creating the script
+let s:cpo_save = &cpo
+set cpo&vim

 " Set ignorecase to the ftplugin standard
 " This is the default setting, but if you define a buffer local
@@ -61,6 +107,18 @@ if !exists('g:omni_syntax_use_iskeyword')
    let g:omni_syntax_use_iskeyword = 1
 endif

+" When using iskeyword, this setting controls whether the characters
+" should be limited to single byte characters.
+if !exists('g:omni_syntax_use_single_byte')
+    let g:omni_syntax_use_single_byte = 1
+endif
+
+" When using iskeyword, this setting controls whether the characters
+" should be limited to single byte characters.
+if !exists('g:omni_syntax_use_iskeyword_numeric')
+    let g:omni_syntax_use_iskeyword_numeric = 1
+endif
+
 " Only display items in the completion window that are at least
 " this many characters in length.
 " This is the default setting, but if you define a buffer local
@@ -71,8 +129,10 @@ endif

 " This script will build a completion list based on the syntax
 " elements defined by the files in $VIMRUNTIME/syntax.
-let s:syn_remove_words = 'match,matchgroup=,contains,'.
-            \ 'links to,start=,end=,nextgroup='
+" let s:syn_remove_words = 'match,matchgroup=,contains,'.
+let s:syn_remove_words = 'matchgroup=,contains,'.
+            \ 'links to,start=,end='
+            " \ 'links to,start=,end=,nextgroup='

 let s:cache_name = []
 let s:cache_list = []
@@ -151,7 +211,7 @@ endfunc
 function! syntaxcomplete#OmniSyntaxList(...)
    if a:0 > 0
        let parms = []
-        if 3 == type(a:1) 
+        if 3 == type(a:1)
            let parms = a:1
        elseif 1 == type(a:1)
            let parms = split(a:1, ',')
@@ -165,7 +225,7 @@ endfunc
 function! OmniSyntaxList(...)
    let list_parms = []
    if a:0 > 0
-        if 3 == type(a:1) 
+        if 3 == type(a:1)
            let list_parms = a:1
        elseif 1 == type(a:1)
            let list_parms = split(a:1, ',')
@@ -201,18 +261,18 @@ function! OmniSyntaxList(...)

    let saveL = @l
    let filetype = substitute(&filetype, '\.', '_', 'g')
-    
+
    if empty(list_parms)
        " Default the include group to include the requested syntax group
        let syntax_group_include_{filetype} = ''
        " Check if there are any overrides specified for this filetype
        if exists('g:omni_syntax_group_include_'.filetype)
            let syntax_group_include_{filetype} =
-                        \ substitute( g:omni_syntax_group_include_{filetype},'\s\+','','g') 
+                        \ substitute( g:omni_syntax_group_include_{filetype},'\s\+','','g')
            let list_parms = split(g:omni_syntax_group_include_{filetype}, ',')
            if syntax_group_include_{filetype} =~ '\w'
-                let syntax_group_include_{filetype} = 
-                            \ substitute( syntax_group_include_{filetype}, 
+                let syntax_group_include_{filetype} =
+                            \ substitute( syntax_group_include_{filetype},
                            \ '\s*,\s*', '\\|', 'g'
                            \ )
            endif
@@ -222,24 +282,34 @@ function! OmniSyntaxList(...)
    endif

    " Loop through all the syntax groupnames, and build a
-    " syntax file which contains these names.  This can 
+    " syntax file which contains these names.  This can
    " work generically for any filetype that does not already
    " have a plugin defined.
    " This ASSUMES the syntax groupname BEGINS with the name
-    " of the filetype.  From my casual viewing of the vim7\syntax 
+    " of the filetype.  From my casual viewing of the vim7\syntax
    " directory this is true for almost all syntax definitions.
    " As an example, the SQL syntax groups have this pattern:
    "     sqlType
    "     sqlOperators
    "     sqlKeyword ...
-    redir @l
-    silent! exec 'syntax list '.join(list_parms)
-    redir END
+    if !empty(list_parms) && empty(substitute(join(list_parms), '[a-zA-Z ]', '', 'g'))
+        " If list_parms only includes word characters, use it to limit
+        " the syntax elements.
+        " If using regex syntax list will fail to find those items, so
+        " simply grab the who syntax list.
+        redir @l
+        silent! exec 'syntax list '.join(list_parms)
+        redir END
+    else
+        redir @l
+        silent! exec 'syntax list'
+        redir END
+    endif

    let syntax_full = "\n".@l
    let @l = saveL

-    if syntax_full =~ 'E28' 
+    if syntax_full =~ 'E28'
                \ || syntax_full =~ 'E411'
                \ || syntax_full =~ 'E415'
                \ || syntax_full =~ 'No Syntax items'
@@ -249,7 +319,7 @@ function! OmniSyntaxList(...)
    let filetype = substitute(&filetype, '\.', '_', 'g')

    let list_exclude_groups = []
-    if a:0 > 0 
+    if a:0 > 0
        " Do nothing since we have specific a specific list of groups
    else
        " Default the exclude group to nothing
@@ -257,93 +327,178 @@ function! OmniSyntaxList(...)
        " Check if there are any overrides specified for this filetype
        if exists('g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_'.filetype)
            let syntax_group_exclude_{filetype} =
-                        \ substitute( g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_{filetype},'\s\+','','g') 
+                        \ substitute( g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_{filetype},'\s\+','','g')
            let list_exclude_groups = split(g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_{filetype}, ',')
-            if syntax_group_exclude_{filetype} =~ '\w' 
-                let syntax_group_exclude_{filetype} = 
-                            \ substitute( syntax_group_exclude_{filetype}, 
+            if syntax_group_exclude_{filetype} =~ '\w'
+                let syntax_group_exclude_{filetype} =
+                            \ substitute( syntax_group_exclude_{filetype},
                            \ '\s*,\s*', '\\|', 'g'
                            \ )
            endif
        endif
    endif

-    " Sometimes filetypes can be composite names, like c.doxygen
-    " Loop through each individual part looking for the syntax
-    " items specific to each individual filetype.
+    if empty(list_parms)
+        let list_parms = [&filetype.'\w\+']
+    endif
+
    let syn_list = ''
-    let ftindex  = 0
-    let ftindex  = match(&filetype, '\w\+', ftindex)
+    let index    = 0
+    for group_regex in list_parms
+        " Sometimes filetypes can be composite names, like c.doxygen
+        " Loop through each individual part looking for the syntax
+        " items specific to each individual filetype.
+        " let ftindex  = 0
+        " let ftindex  = match(syntax_full, group_regex, ftindex)

-    while ftindex > -1
-        let ft_part_name = matchstr( &filetype, '\w\+', ftindex )
+        " while ftindex > -1
+            " let ft_part_name = matchstr( syntax_full, '\w\+', ftindex )

-        " Syntax rules can contain items for more than just the current 
-        " filetype.  They can contain additional items added by the user
-        " via autocmds or their vimrc.
-        " Some syntax files can be combined (html, php, jsp).
-        " We want only items that begin with the filetype we are interested in.
-        let next_group_regex = '\n' .
-                    \ '\zs'.ft_part_name.'\w\+\ze'.
-                    \ '\s\+xxx\s\+' 
-        let index    = 0
-        let index    = match(syntax_full, next_group_regex, index)
-
-        if index == -1 && exists('b:current_syntax') && ft_part_name != b:current_syntax
-            " There appears to be two standards when writing syntax files.
-            " Either items begin as:
-            "     syn keyword {filetype}Keyword         values ...
-            "     let b:current_syntax = "sql"
-            "     let b:current_syntax = "sqlanywhere"
-            " Or
-            "     syn keyword {syntax_filename}Keyword  values ...
-            "     let b:current_syntax = "mysql"
-            " So, we will make the format of finding the syntax group names
-            " a bit more flexible and look for both if the first fails to 
-            " find a match.
+            " Syntax rules can contain items for more than just the current
+            " filetype.  They can contain additional items added by the user
+            " via autocmds or their vimrc.
+            " Some syntax files can be combined (html, php, jsp).
+            " We want only items that begin with the filetype we are interested in.
            let next_group_regex = '\n' .
-                        \ '\zs'.b:current_syntax.'\w\+\ze'.
-                        \ '\s\+xxx\s\+' 
-            let index    = 0
+                        \ '\zs'.group_regex.'\ze'.
+                        \ '\s\+xxx\s\+'
            let index    = match(syntax_full, next_group_regex, index)
-        endif

-        while index > -1
-            let group_name = matchstr( syntax_full, '\w\+', index )
-
-            let get_syn_list = 1
-            for exclude_group_name in list_exclude_groups
-                if '\<'.exclude_group_name.'\>' =~ '\<'.group_name.'\>'
-                    let get_syn_list = 0
-                endif
-            endfor
-        
-            " This code is no longer needed in version 6.0 since we have
-            " augmented the syntax list command to only retrieve the syntax 
-            " groups we are interested in.
-            "
-            " if get_syn_list == 1
-            "     if syntax_group_include_{filetype} != ''
-            "         if '\<'.syntax_group_include_{filetype}.'\>' !~ '\<'.group_name.'\>'
-            "             let get_syn_list = 0
-            "         endif
-            "     endif
-            " endif
-
-            if get_syn_list == 1
-                " Pass in the full syntax listing, plus the group name we 
-                " are interested in.
-                let extra_syn_list = s:SyntaxCSyntaxGroupItems(group_name, syntax_full)
-                let syn_list = syn_list . extra_syn_list . "\n"
+            " For the matched group name, strip off any of the regex special
+            " characters and see if we get a match with the current syntax
+            if index == -1 && exists('b:current_syntax') && substitute(group_regex, '[^a-zA-Z ]\+.*', '', 'g') !~ '^'.b:current_syntax
+                " There appears to be two standards when writing syntax files.
+                " Either items begin as:
+                "     syn keyword {filetype}Keyword         values ...
+                "     let b:current_syntax = "sql"
+                "     let b:current_syntax = "sqlanywhere"
+                " Or
+                "     syn keyword {syntax_filename}Keyword  values ...
+                "     let b:current_syntax = "mysql"
+                " So, we will make the format of finding the syntax group names
+                " a bit more flexible and look for both if the first fails to
+                " find a match.
+                let next_group_regex = '\n' .
+                            \ '\zs'.b:current_syntax.'\w\+\ze'.
+                            \ '\s\+xxx\s\+'
+                let index    = 0
+                let index    = match(syntax_full, next_group_regex, index)
            endif

-            let index = index + strlen(group_name)
-            let index = match(syntax_full, next_group_regex, index)
-        endwhile
+            while index > -1
+                let group_name = matchstr( syntax_full, '\w\+', index )

-        let ftindex  = ftindex + len(ft_part_name)
-        let ftindex  = match( &filetype, '\w\+', ftindex )
-    endwhile
+                let get_syn_list = 1
+                for exclude_group_name in list_exclude_groups
+                    if '\<'.exclude_group_name.'\>' =~ '\<'.group_name.'\>'
+                        let get_syn_list = 0
+                    endif
+                endfor
+
+                " This code is no longer needed in version 6.0 since we have
+                " augmented the syntax list command to only retrieve the syntax
+                " groups we are interested in.
+                "
+                " if get_syn_list == 1
+                "     if syntax_group_include_{filetype} != ''
+                "         if '\<'.syntax_group_include_{filetype}.'\>' !~ '\<'.group_name.'\>'
+                "             let get_syn_list = 0
+                "         endif
+                "     endif
+                " endif
+
+                if get_syn_list == 1
+                    " Pass in the full syntax listing, plus the group name we
+                    " are interested in.
+                    let extra_syn_list = s:SyntaxCSyntaxGroupItems(group_name, syntax_full)
+                    let syn_list = syn_list . extra_syn_list . "\n"
+                endif
+
+                let index = index + strlen(group_name)
+                let index = match(syntax_full, next_group_regex, index)
+            endwhile
+
+            " let ftindex  = ftindex + len(ft_part_name)
+            " let ftindex  = match( syntax_full, group_regex, ftindex )
+        " endwhile
+    endfor
+
+"   " Sometimes filetypes can be composite names, like c.doxygen
+"   " Loop through each individual part looking for the syntax
+"   " items specific to each individual filetype.
+"   let syn_list = ''
+"   let ftindex  = 0
+"   let ftindex  = match(&filetype, '\w\+', ftindex)
+
+"   while ftindex > -1
+"       let ft_part_name = matchstr( &filetype, '\w\+', ftindex )
+
+"       " Syntax rules can contain items for more than just the current
+"       " filetype.  They can contain additional items added by the user
+"       " via autocmds or their vimrc.
+"       " Some syntax files can be combined (html, php, jsp).
+"       " We want only items that begin with the filetype we are interested in.
+"       let next_group_regex = '\n' .
+"                   \ '\zs'.ft_part_name.'\w\+\ze'.
+"                   \ '\s\+xxx\s\+'
+"       let index    = 0
+"       let index    = match(syntax_full, next_group_regex, index)
+
+"       if index == -1 && exists('b:current_syntax') && ft_part_name != b:current_syntax
+"           " There appears to be two standards when writing syntax files.
+"           " Either items begin as:
+"           "     syn keyword {filetype}Keyword         values ...
+"           "     let b:current_syntax = "sql"
+"           "     let b:current_syntax = "sqlanywhere"
+"           " Or
+"           "     syn keyword {syntax_filename}Keyword  values ...
+"           "     let b:current_syntax = "mysql"
+"           " So, we will make the format of finding the syntax group names
+"           " a bit more flexible and look for both if the first fails to
+"           " find a match.
+"           let next_group_regex = '\n' .
+"                       \ '\zs'.b:current_syntax.'\w\+\ze'.
+"                       \ '\s\+xxx\s\+'
+"           let index    = 0
+"           let index    = match(syntax_full, next_group_regex, index)
+"       endif
+
+"       while index > -1
+"           let group_name = matchstr( syntax_full, '\w\+', index )
+
+"           let get_syn_list = 1
+"           for exclude_group_name in list_exclude_groups
+"               if '\<'.exclude_group_name.'\>' =~ '\<'.group_name.'\>'
+"                   let get_syn_list = 0
+"               endif
+"           endfor
+
+"           " This code is no longer needed in version 6.0 since we have
+"           " augmented the syntax list command to only retrieve the syntax
+"           " groups we are interested in.
+"           "
+"           " if get_syn_list == 1
+"           "     if syntax_group_include_{filetype} != ''
+"           "         if '\<'.syntax_group_include_{filetype}.'\>' !~ '\<'.group_name.'\>'
+"           "             let get_syn_list = 0
+"           "         endif
+"           "     endif
+"           " endif
+
+"           if get_syn_list == 1
+"               " Pass in the full syntax listing, plus the group name we
+"               " are interested in.
+"               let extra_syn_list = s:SyntaxCSyntaxGroupItems(group_name, syntax_full)
+"               let syn_list = syn_list . extra_syn_list . "\n"
+"           endif
+
+"           let index = index + strlen(group_name)
+"           let index = match(syntax_full, next_group_regex, index)
+"       endwhile
+
+"       let ftindex  = ftindex + len(ft_part_name)
+"       let ftindex  = match( &filetype, '\w\+', ftindex )
+"   endwhile

    " Convert the string to a List and sort it.
    let compl_list = sort(split(syn_list))
@@ -385,7 +540,7 @@ function! s:SyntaxCSyntaxGroupItems( group_name, syntax_full )
    "     \|           - 2nd potential match
    "     \%$          - matches end of the file or string
    "     \)           - end a group
-    let syntax_group = matchstr(a:syntax_full, 
+    let syntax_group = matchstr(a:syntax_full,
                \ "\n".a:group_name.'\s\+xxx\s\+\zs.\{-}\ze\(\n\w\|\%$\)'
                \ )

@@ -395,26 +550,97 @@ function! s:SyntaxCSyntaxGroupItems( group_name, syntax_full )

        " We only want the words for the lines begining with
        " containedin, but there could be other items.
-        
+
        " Tried to remove all lines that do not begin with contained
        " but this does not work in all cases since you can have
        "    contained nextgroup=...
        " So this will strip off the ending of lines with known
        " keywords.
-        let syn_list = substitute( 
+        let syn_list = substitute(
                    \    syntax_group, '\<\('.
                    \    substitute(
                    \      escape(s:syn_remove_words, '\\/.*$^~[]')
                    \      , ',', '\\|', 'g'
                    \    ).
                    \    '\).\{-}\%($\|'."\n".'\)'
-                    \    , "\n", 'g' 
+                    \    , "\n", 'g'
                    \  )

-        " Now strip off the newline + blank space + contained
-        let syn_list = substitute( 
-                    \    syn_list, '\%(^\|\n\)\@<=\s*\<\(contained\)'
-                    \    , "", 'g' 
+        " Attempt to deal with lines using the match syntax
+        " javaScriptDocTags xxx match /@\(param\|argument\|requires\|file\)\>/
+        " Though it can use any types of regex, so this plugin will attempt
+        " to restrict it
+        " 1.  Only use \( or \%( constructs remove all else
+        " 2   Remove and []s
+        " 3.  Account for match //constructs
+        "                       \%(\%(ms\|me\|hs\|he\|rs\|re\|lc\)\S\+\)\?
+        " 4.  Hope for the best
+        "
+        "
+        let syn_list_old = syn_list
+        while syn_list =~ '\<match\>\s\+\/'
+            if syn_list =~ 'perlElseIfError'
+                let syn_list = syn_list
+            endif
+            " Check if the match has words at least 3 characters long
+            if syn_list =~ '\<match \/\zs.\{-}\<\w\{3,}\>.\{-}\ze\\\@<!\/\%(\%(ms\|me\|hs\|he\|rs\|re\|lc\)\S\+\)\?\s\+'
+                " Remove everything after / and before the first \(
+                let syn_list = substitute( syn_list, '\<match \/\zs.\{-}\ze\\%\?(.\{-}\\\@<!\/\%(\%(ms\|me\|hs\|he\|rs\|re\|lc\)\S\+\)\?\s\+', '', 'g' )
+                " Remove everything after \) and up to the ending /
+                let syn_list = substitute( syn_list, '\<match \/.\{-}\\)\zs.\{-}\ze\/\%(\%(ms\|me\|hs\|he\|rs\|re\|lc\)\S\+\)\?\s\+', '', 'g' )
+
+                " Remove any character classes
+                " let syn_list = substitute( syn_list, '\<match /\zs.\{-}\[[^]]*\].\{-}\ze\/ ', '', 'g' )
+                let syn_list = substitute( syn_list, '\%(\<match \/[^/]\{-}\)\@<=\[[^]]*\]\ze.\{-}\\\@<!\/\%(\%(ms\|me\|hs\|he\|rs\|re\|lc\)\S\+\)\?', '', 'g' )
+                " Remove any words < 3 characters
+                let syn_list = substitute( syn_list, '\%(\<match \/[^/]\{-}\)\@<=\<\w\{1,2}\>\ze.\{-}\\\@<!\/\%(\%(ms\|me\|hs\|he\|rs\|re\|lc\)\S\+\)\?\s\+', '', 'g' )
+                " Remove all non-word characters
+                " let syn_list = substitute( syn_list, '\<match /\zs.\{-}\<\W\+\>.\{-}\ze\/ ', "", 'g' )
+                " let syn_list = substitute( syn_list, '\%(\<match \/[^/]\{-}\)\@<=\W\+\ze.\{-}\/ ', ' ', 'g' )
+                " Do this by using the outer substitue() call to gather all
+                " text between the match /.../ tags.
+                " The inner substitute() call operates on the text selected
+                " and replaces all non-word characters.
+                let syn_list = substitute( syn_list, '\<match \/\zs\(.\{-}\)\ze\\\@<!\/\%(\%(ms\|me\|hs\|he\|rs\|re\|lc\)\S\+\)\?\s\+'
+                            \ , '\=substitute(submatch(1), "\\W\\+", " ", "g")'
+                            \ , 'g' )
+                " Remove the match / / syntax
+                let syn_list = substitute( syn_list, '\<match \/\(.\{-}\)\/\%(\%(ms\|me\|hs\|he\|rs\|re\|lc\)\S\+\)\?\s\+', '\1', 'g' )
+            else
+                " No words long enough, remove the match
+                " Remove the match syntax
+                " let syn_list = substitute( syn_list, '\<match \/[^\/]*\/\%(\%(ms\|me\|hs\|he\|rs\|re\|lc\)\S\+\)\?\s\+', '', 'g' )
+                let syn_list = substitute( syn_list, '\<match \/\%(.\{-}\)\?\/\%(\%(ms\|me\|hs\|he\|rs\|re\|lc\)\S\+\)\?\s\+', '', 'g' )
+            endif
+            if syn_list =~ '\<match\>\s\+\/'
+                " Problem removing the match / / tags
+                let syn_list = ''
+            endif
+        endwhile
+
+
+        " Now strip off the newline + blank space + contained.
+        " Also include lines with nextgroup=@someName skip_key_words syntax_element
+                    " \    syn_list, '\%(^\|\n\)\@<=\s*\<\(contained\|nextgroup=\)'
+                    " \    syn_list, '\%(^\|\n\)\@<=\s*\<\(contained\|nextgroup=[@a-zA-Z,]*\)'
+        let syn_list = substitute(
+                    \    syn_list, '\<\(contained\|nextgroup=[@a-zA-Z,]*\)'
+                    \    , "", 'g'
+                    \ )
+
+        " This can leave lines like this
+        "     =@vimMenuList  skipwhite onoremenu
+        " Strip the special option keywords first
+        "     :h :syn-skipwhite*
+        let syn_list = substitute(
+                    \    syn_list, '\<\(skipwhite\|skipnl\|skipempty\)\>'
+                    \    , "", 'g'
+                    \ )
+
+        " Now remove the remainder of the nextgroup=@someName lines
+        let syn_list = substitute(
+                    \    syn_list, '\%(^\|\n\)\@<=\s*\(@\w\+\)'
+                    \    , "", 'g'
                    \ )

        if b:omni_syntax_use_iskeyword == 0
@@ -423,19 +649,74 @@ function! s:SyntaxCSyntaxGroupItems( group_name, syntax_full )
            " This will replace non-word characters with spaces.
            let syn_list = substitute( syn_list, '[^0-9A-Za-z_ ]', ' ', 'g' )
        else
-            let accept_chars = ','.&iskeyword.','
-            " Remove all character ranges
-            " let accept_chars = substitute(accept_chars, ',[^,]\+-[^,]\+,', ',', 'g')
-            let accept_chars = substitute(accept_chars, ',\@<=[^,]\+-[^,]\+,', '', 'g')
-            " Remove all numeric specifications
-            " let accept_chars = substitute(accept_chars, ',\d\{-},', ',', 'g')
-            let accept_chars = substitute(accept_chars, ',\@<=\d\{-},', '', 'g')
-            " Remove all commas
-            let accept_chars = substitute(accept_chars, ',', '', 'g')
-            " Escape special regex characters
-            let accept_chars = escape(accept_chars, '\\/.*$^~[]' )
-            " Remove all characters that are not acceptable
-            let syn_list = substitute( syn_list, '[^0-9A-Za-z_ '.accept_chars.']', ' ', 'g' )
+            if g:omni_syntax_use_iskeyword_numeric == 1
+                " iskeyword can contain value like this
+                " 38,42,43,45,47-58,60-62,64-90,97-122,_,+,-,*,/,%,<,=,>,:,$,?,!,@-@,94
+                " Numeric values convert to their ASCII equivalent using the
+                " nr2char() function.
+                "     &       38
+                "     *       42
+                "     +       43
+                "     -       45
+                "     ^       94
+                " Iterate through all numeric specifications and convert those
+                " to their ascii equivalent ensuring the character is printable.
+                " If so, add it to the list.
+                let accepted_chars = ''
+                for item in split(&iskeyword, ',')
+                    if item =~ '\d-\d'
+                        " This is a character range (ie 47-58),
+                        " cycle through each character within the range
+                        let [b:start, b:end] = split(item, '-')
+                        for range_item in range( b:start, b:end )
+                            if range_item <= 127 || g:omni_syntax_use_single_byte == 0
+                                if nr2char(range_item) =~ '\p'
+                                    let accepted_chars = accepted_chars . nr2char(range_item)
+                                endif
+                            endif
+                        endfor
+                    elseif item =~ '^\d\+$'
+                        " Only numeric, translate to a character
+                        if item < 127 || g:omni_syntax_use_single_byte == 0
+                            if nr2char(item) =~ '\p'
+                                let accepted_chars = accepted_chars . nr2char(item)
+                            endif
+                        endif
+                    else
+                        if char2nr(item) < 127 || g:omni_syntax_use_single_byte == 0
+                            if item =~ '\p'
+                                let accepted_chars = accepted_chars . item
+                            endif
+                        endif
+                    endif
+                endfor
+                " Escape special regex characters
+                " Looks like the wrong chars are escaped.  In a collection,
+                "      :h /[]
+                "      only `]', `\', `-' and `^' are special:
+                " let accepted_chars = escape(accepted_chars, '\\/.*$^~[]' )
+                let accepted_chars = escape(accepted_chars, ']\-^' )
+                " Remove all characters that are not acceptable
+                let syn_list = substitute( syn_list, '[^A-Za-z'.accepted_chars.']', ' ', 'g' )
+            else
+                let accept_chars = ','.&iskeyword.','
+                " Remove all character ranges
+                " let accept_chars = substitute(accept_chars, ',[^,]\+-[^,]\+,', ',', 'g')
+                let accept_chars = substitute(accept_chars, ',\@<=[^,]\+-[^,]\+,', '', 'g')
+                " Remove all numeric specifications
+                " let accept_chars = substitute(accept_chars, ',\d\{-},', ',', 'g')
+                let accept_chars = substitute(accept_chars, ',\@<=\d\{-},', '', 'g')
+                " Remove all commas
+                let accept_chars = substitute(accept_chars, ',', '', 'g')
+                " Escape special regex characters
+                " Looks like the wrong chars are escaped.  In a collection,
+                "      :h /[]
+                "      only `]', `\', `-' and `^' are special:
+                " let accept_chars = escape(accept_chars, '\\/.*$^~[]' )
+                let accept_chars = escape(accept_chars, ']\-^' )
+                " Remove all characters that are not acceptable
+                let syn_list = substitute( syn_list, '[^0-9A-Za-z_'.accept_chars.']', ' ', 'g' )
+            endif
        endif

        if b:omni_syntax_minimum_length > 0
@@ -448,3 +729,27 @@ function! s:SyntaxCSyntaxGroupItems( group_name, syntax_full )

    return syn_list
 endfunction
+
+function! OmniSyntaxShowChars(spec)
+  let result = []
+  for item in split(a:spec, ',')
+    if len(item) > 1
+      if item == '@-@'
+        call add(result, char2nr(item))
+      else
+        call extend(result, call('range', split(item, '-')))
+      endif
+    else
+      if item == '@'  " assume this is [A-Za-z]
+        for [c1, c2] in [['A', 'Z'], ['a', 'z']]
+          call extend(result, range(char2nr(c1), char2nr(c2)))
+        endfor
+      else
+        call add(result, char2nr(item))
+      endif
+    endif
+  endfor
+  return join(map(result, 'nr2char(v:val)'), ', ')
+endfunction
+let &cpo = s:cpo_save
+unlet s:cpo_save
--- a/runtime/autoload/tar.vim
+++ b/runtime/autoload/tar.vim
@@ -1,13 +1,13 @@
 " tar.vim: Handles browsing tarfiles
 "            AUTOLOAD PORTION
-" Date:			May 31, 2011
-" Version:		27
-" Maintainer:	Charles E Campbell, Jr <NdrOchip@ScampbellPfamily.AbizM-NOSPAM>
+" Date:			Apr 17, 2013
+" Version:		29
+" Maintainer:	Charles E Campbell <NdrOchip@ScampbellPfamily.AbizM-NOSPAM>
 " License:		Vim License  (see vim's :help license)
 "
 "	Contains many ideas from Michael Toren's <tar.vim>
 "
-" Copyright:    Copyright (C) 2005-2011 Charles E. Campbell, Jr. {{{1
+" Copyright:    Copyright (C) 2005-2011 Charles E. Campbell {{{1
 "               Permission is hereby granted to use and distribute this code,
 "               with or without modifications, provided that this copyright
 "               notice is copied with it. Like anything else that's free,
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
 if &cp || exists("g:loaded_tar")
 finish
 endif
-let g:loaded_tar= "v27"
+let g:loaded_tar= "v29"
 if v:version < 702
 echohl WarningMsg
 echo "***warning*** this version of tar needs vim 7.2"
@@ -31,6 +31,7 @@ if v:version < 702
 endif
 let s:keepcpo= &cpo
 set cpo&vim
+"DechoTabOn
 "call Decho("loading autoload/tar.vim")

 " ---------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -80,7 +81,7 @@ endif

 " set up shell quoting character
 if !exists("g:tar_shq")
- if exists("&shq") && &shq != ""
+ if exists("+shq") && exists("&shq") && &shq != ""
  let g:tar_shq= &shq
 elseif has("win32") || has("win95") || has("win64") || has("win16")
  if exists("g:netrw_cygwin") && g:netrw_cygwin
@@ -143,11 +144,11 @@ fun! tar#Browse(tarfile)
  call setline(lastline+2,'" Browsing tarfile '.a:tarfile)
  call setline(lastline+3,'" Select a file with cursor and press ENTER')
  keepj $put =''
-  keepj 0d
+  keepj sil! 0d
  keepj $

  let tarfile= a:tarfile
-  if has("win32") && executable("cygpath")
+  if has("win32unix") && executable("cygpath")
   " assuming cygwin
   let tarfile=substitute(system("cygpath -u ".shellescape(tarfile,0)),'\n$','','e')
  endif
@@ -158,10 +159,10 @@ fun! tar#Browse(tarfile)
  elseif tarfile =~# '\.lrp'
 "   call Decho("2: exe silent r! cat -- ".shellescape(tarfile,1)."|gzip -d -c -|".g:tar_cmd." -".g:tar_browseoptions." - ")
   exe "sil! r! cat -- ".shellescape(tarfile,1)."|gzip -d -c -|".g:tar_cmd." -".g:tar_browseoptions." - "
-  elseif tarfile =~# '\.bz2$'
+  elseif tarfile =~# '\.\(bz2\|tbz\|tb2\)$'
 "   call Decho("3: exe silent r! bzip2 -d -c -- ".shellescape(tarfile,1)." | ".g:tar_cmd." -".g:tar_browseoptions." - ")
   exe "sil! r! bzip2 -d -c -- ".shellescape(tarfile,1)." | ".g:tar_cmd." -".g:tar_browseoptions." - "
-  elseif tarfile =~# '\.lzma$'
+  elseif tarfile =~# '\.\(lzma\|tlz\)$'
 "   call Decho("3: exe silent r! lzma -d -c -- ".shellescape(tarfile,1)." | ".g:tar_cmd." -".g:tar_browseoptions." - ")
   exe "sil! r! lzma -d -c -- ".shellescape(tarfile,1)." | ".g:tar_cmd." -".g:tar_browseoptions." - "
  elseif tarfile =~# '\.\(xz\|txz\)$'
@@ -227,7 +228,7 @@ fun! s:TarBrowseSelect()
  " about to make a new window, need to use b:tarfile
  let tarfile= b:tarfile
  let curfile= expand("%")
-  if has("win32") && executable("cygpath")
+  if has("win32unix") && executable("cygpath")
   " assuming cygwin
   let tarfile=substitute(system("cygpath -u ".shellescape(tarfile,0)),'\n$','','e')
  endif
@@ -239,6 +240,8 @@ fun! s:TarBrowseSelect()
  let s:tblfile_{winnr()}= curfile
  call tar#Read("tarfile:".tarfile.'::'.fname,1)
  filetype detect
+  set nomod
+  exe 'com! -buffer -nargs=? -complete=file TarDiff	:call tar#Diff(<q-args>,"'.fnameescape(fname).'")'

  let &report= repkeep
 "  call Dret("TarBrowseSelect : s:tblfile_".winnr()."<".s:tblfile_{winnr()}.">")
@@ -252,7 +255,7 @@ fun! tar#Read(fname,mode)
  set report=10
  let tarfile = substitute(a:fname,'tarfile:\(.\{-}\)::.*$','\1','')
  let fname   = substitute(a:fname,'tarfile:.\{-}::\(.*\)$','\1','')
-  if has("win32") && executable("cygpath")
+  if has("win32unix") && executable("cygpath")
   " assuming cygwin
   let tarfile=substitute(system("cygpath -u ".shellescape(tarfile,0)),'\n$','','e')
  endif
@@ -425,7 +428,7 @@ fun! tar#Write(fname)
 
   if fname =~ '/'
    let dirpath = substitute(fname,'/[^/]\+$','','e')
-    if executable("cygpath")
+    if has("win32unix") && executable("cygpath")
     let dirpath = substitute(system("cygpath ".shellescape(dirpath, 0)),'\n','','e')
    endif
    call mkdir(dirpath,"p")
@@ -445,7 +448,7 @@ fun! tar#Write(fname)
    let tar_secure= " "
   endif
   exe "w! ".fnameescape(fname)
-   if executable("cygpath")
+   if has("win32unix") && executable("cygpath")
    let tarfile = substitute(system("cygpath ".shellescape(tarfile,0)),'\n','','e')
   endif
 
@@ -500,6 +503,30 @@ fun! tar#Write(fname)
 "  call Dret("tar#Write")
 endfun

+" ---------------------------------------------------------------------
+" tar#Diff: {{{2
+fun! tar#Diff(userfname,fname)
+"  call Dfunc("tar#Diff(userfname<".a:userfname."> fname<".a:fname.")")
+  let fname= a:fname
+  if a:userfname != ""
+   let fname= a:userfname
+  endif
+  if filereadable(fname)
+   " sets current file (from tarball) for diff'ing
+   " splits window vertically
+   " opens original file, sets it for diff'ing
+   " sets up b:tardiff_otherbuf variables so each buffer knows about the other (for closing purposes)
+   diffthis
+   wincmd v
+   exe "e ".fnameescape(fname)
+   diffthis
+  else
+   redraw!
+   echo "***warning*** unable to read file<".fname.">"
+  endif
+"  call Dret("tar#Diff")
+endfun
+
 " ---------------------------------------------------------------------
 " s:Rmdir: {{{2
 fun! s:Rmdir(fname)
--- a/runtime/autoload/tohtml.vim
+++ b/runtime/autoload/tohtml.vim
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 " Vim autoload file for the tohtml plugin.
 " Maintainer: Ben Fritz <fritzophrenic@gmail.com>
-" Last Change: 2011 Apr 05
+" Last Change: 2013 Jun 19
 "
 " Additional contributors:
 "
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@

 " this file uses line continuations
 let s:cpo_sav = &cpo
-set cpo-=C
+set cpo&vim

 " Automatically find charsets from all encodings supported natively by Vim. With
 " the 8bit- and 2byte- prefixes, Vim can actually support more encodings than
@@ -391,12 +391,25 @@ func! tohtml#Diff2HTML(win_list, buf_list) "{{{
  call add(html, '<meta name="plugin-version" content="'.g:loaded_2html_plugin.'"'.tag_close)
  call add(html, '<meta name="settings" content="'.
 	\ join(filter(keys(s:settings),'s:settings[v:val]'),',').
+	\ ',prevent_copy='.s:settings.prevent_copy.
 	\ '"'.tag_close)
+  call add(html, '<meta name="colorscheme" content="'.
+	\ (exists('g:colors_name')
+	\ ? g:colors_name
+	\ : 'none'). '"'.tag_close)

  call add(html, '</head>')
  let body_line_num = len(html)
-  call add(html, '<body>')
-  call add(html, '<table border="1" width="100%">')
+  if !empty(s:settings.prevent_copy)
+    call add(html, "<body onload='FixCharWidth();".(s:settings.line_ids ? " JumpToLine();" : "")."'>")
+    call add(html, "<!-- hidden divs used by javascript to get the width of a char -->")
+    call add(html, "<div id='oneCharWidth'>0</div>")
+    call add(html, "<div id='oneInputWidth'><input size='1' value='0'".tag_close."</div>")
+    call add(html, "<div id='oneEmWidth' style='width: 1em;'></div>")
+  else
+    call add(html, '<body'.(s:settings.line_ids ? ' onload="JumpToLine();"' : '').'>')
+  endif
+  call add(html, "<table border='1' width='100%' id='vimCodeElement".s:settings.id_suffix."'>")

  call add(html, '<tr>')
  for buf in a:win_list
@@ -454,16 +467,19 @@ func! tohtml#Diff2HTML(win_list, buf_list) "{{{
      let insert_index = diff_style_start
    endif

-    " Delete those parts that are not needed so
-    " we can include the rest into the resulting table
-    1,/^<body/d_
+    " Delete those parts that are not needed so we can include the rest into the
+    " resulting table.
+    1,/^<body.*\%(\n<!--.*-->\_s\+.*id='oneCharWidth'.*\_s\+.*id='oneInputWidth'.*\_s\+.*id='oneEmWidth'\)\?\zs/d_
    $
    ?</body>?,$d_
    let temp = getline(1,'$')
+    " clean out id on the main content container because we already set it on
+    " the table
+    let temp[0] = substitute(temp[0], " id='vimCodeElement[^']*'", "", "")
    " undo deletion of start and end part
    " so we can later save the file as valid html
    " TODO: restore using grabbed lines if undolevel is 1?
-    normal 2u
+    normal! 2u
    if s:settings.use_css
      call add(html, '<td valign="top"><div>')
    elseif s:settings.use_xhtml
@@ -487,6 +503,11 @@ func! tohtml#Diff2HTML(win_list, buf_list) "{{{
  call add(html, s:body_end_line)
  call add(html, '</html>')

+  " The generated HTML is admittedly ugly and takes a LONG time to fold.
+  " Make sure the user doesn't do syntax folding when loading a generated file,
+  " using a modeline.
+  call add(html, '<!-- vim: set foldmethod=manual : -->')
+
  let i = 1
  let name = "Diff" . (s:settings.use_xhtml ? ".xhtml" : ".html")
  " Find an unused file name if current file name is already in use
@@ -520,12 +541,94 @@ func! tohtml#Diff2HTML(win_list, buf_list) "{{{
    1
    let style_start = search('^</head>')-1

-    " Insert javascript to toggle matching folds open and closed in all windows,
-    " if dynamic folding is active. {{{
+    " add required javascript in reverse order so we can just call append again
+    " and again without adjusting {{{
+
+    " insert script closing tag
+    call append(style_start, [
+	  \ '',
+	  \ s:settings.use_xhtml ? '//]]>' : '-->',
+	  \ "</script>"
+	  \ ])
+
+    " insert script which corrects the size of small input elements in
+    " prevent_copy mode. See 2html.vim for details on why this is needed and how
+    " it works.
+    if !empty(s:settings.prevent_copy)
+      call append(style_start, [
+	    \ '',
+	    \ '/* simulate a "ch" unit by asking the browser how big a zero character is */',
+	    \ 'function FixCharWidth() {',
+	    \ '  /* get the hidden element which gives the width of a single character */',
+	    \ '  var goodWidth = document.getElementById("oneCharWidth").clientWidth;',
+	    \ '  /* get all input elements, we''ll filter on class later */',
+	    \ '  var inputTags = document.getElementsByTagName("input");',
+	    \ '  var ratio = 5;',
+	    \ '  var inputWidth = document.getElementById("oneInputWidth").clientWidth;',
+	    \ '  var emWidth = document.getElementById("oneEmWidth").clientWidth;',
+	    \ '  if (inputWidth > goodWidth) {',
+	    \ '    while (ratio < 100*goodWidth/emWidth && ratio < 100) {',
+	    \ '      ratio += 5;',
+	    \ '    }',
+	    \ '    document.getElementById("vimCodeElement'.s:settings.id_suffix.'").className = "em"+ratio;',
+	    \ '  }',
+	    \ '}'
+	    \ ])
+    endif
+    "
+    " insert javascript to get IDs from line numbers, and to open a fold before
+    " jumping to any lines contained therein
+    call append(style_start, [
+	  \ "  /* Always jump to new location even if the line was hidden inside a fold, or",
+	  \ "   * we corrected the raw number to a line ID.",
+	  \ "   */",
+	  \ "  if (lineElem) {",
+	  \ "    lineElem.scrollIntoView(true);",
+	  \ "  }",
+	  \ "  return true;",
+	  \ "}",
+	  \ "if ('onhashchange' in window) {",
+	  \ "  window.onhashchange = JumpToLine;",
+	  \ "}"
+	  \ ])
+    if s:settings.dynamic_folds
+      call append(style_start, [
+	    \ "",
+	    \ "  /* navigate upwards in the DOM tree to open all folds containing the line */",
+	    \ "  var node = lineElem;",
+	    \ "  while (node && node.id != 'vimCodeElement".s:settings.id_suffix."')",
+	    \ "  {",
+	    \ "    if (node.className == 'closed-fold')",
+	    \ "    {",
+	    \ "      /* toggle open the fold ID (remove window ID) */",
+	    \ "      toggleFold(node.id.substr(4));",
+	    \ "    }",
+	    \ "    node = node.parentNode;",
+	    \ "  }",
+	    \ ])
+    endif
+    call append(style_start, [
+	  \ "",
+	  \ "/* function to open any folds containing a jumped-to line before jumping to it */",
+	  \ "function JumpToLine()",
+	  \ "{",
+	  \ "  var lineNum;",
+	  \ "  lineNum = window.location.hash;",
+	  \ "  lineNum = lineNum.substr(1); /* strip off '#' */",
+	  \ "",
+	  \ "  if (lineNum.indexOf('L') == -1) {",
+	  \ "    lineNum = 'L'+lineNum;",
+	  \ "  }",
+	  \ "  if (lineNum.indexOf('W') == -1) {",
+	  \ "    lineNum = 'W1'+lineNum;",
+	  \ "  }",
+	  \ "  lineElem = document.getElementById(lineNum);"
+	  \ ])
+
+    " Insert javascript to toggle matching folds open and closed in all windows,
+    " if dynamic folding is active.
    if s:settings.dynamic_folds
      call append(style_start, [
-	    \  "<script type='text/javascript'>",
-	    \  s:settings.use_xhtml ? '//<![CDATA[' : "  <!--",
 	    \  "  function toggleFold(objID)",
 	    \  "  {",
 	    \  "    for (win_num = 1; win_num <= ".len(a:buf_list)."; win_num++)",
@@ -542,10 +645,14 @@ func! tohtml#Diff2HTML(win_list, buf_list) "{{{
 	    \  "      }",
 	    \  "    }",
 	    \  "  }",
-	    \  s:settings.use_xhtml ? '//]]>' : "  -->",
-	    \  "</script>"
 	    \ ])
-    endif "}}}
+    endif
+
+    " insert script tag; javascript is always needed for the line number
+    " normalization for URL hashes
+    call append(style_start, [
+	  \ "<script type='text/javascript'>",
+	  \ s:settings.use_xhtml ? '//<![CDATA[' : "<!--"])

    " Insert styles from all the generated html documents and additional styles
    " for the table-based layout of the side-by-side diff. The diff should take
@@ -609,11 +716,13 @@ func! tohtml#GetUserSettings() "{{{
    call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings, 'ignore_conceal', 0 )
    call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings, 'ignore_folding', 0 )
    call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings,  'dynamic_folds', 0 )
-    call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings,  'no_foldcolumn', 0 )
+    call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings,  'no_foldcolumn', user_settings.ignore_folding)
    call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings,   'hover_unfold', 0 )
    call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings,         'no_pre', 0 )
+    call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings,     'no_invalid', 0 )
    call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings,   'whole_filler', 0 )
    call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings,      'use_xhtml', 0 )
+    call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings,       'line_ids', user_settings.number_lines )
    " }}}
    
    " override those settings that need it {{{
@@ -637,6 +746,8 @@ func! tohtml#GetUserSettings() "{{{
    " dynamic folding implies css
    if user_settings.dynamic_folds
      let user_settings.use_css = 1
+    else
+      let user_settings.no_foldcolumn = 1 " won't do anything but for consistency and for the test suite
    endif

    " if we're not using CSS we cannot use a pre section because <font> tags
@@ -663,6 +774,7 @@ func! tohtml#GetUserSettings() "{{{
    endif
    " }}}

+    " textual options
    if exists("g:html_use_encoding") "{{{
      " user specified the desired MIME charset, figure out proper
      " 'fileencoding' from it or warn the user if we cannot
@@ -705,6 +817,59 @@ func! tohtml#GetUserSettings() "{{{
      endif
    endif "}}}

+    " Default to making nothing uncopyable, because we default to
+    " not-standards way of doing things, and also because Microsoft Word and
+    " others paste the <input> elements anyway.
+    "
+    " html_prevent_copy only has an effect when using CSS.
+    "
+    " All options:
+    "	  f - fold column
+    "	  n - line numbers (also within fold text)
+    "	  t - fold text
+    "	  d - diff filler
+    "	  c - concealed text (reserved future)
+    "	  l - listchars (reserved possible future)
+    "	  s - signs (reserved possible future)
+    "
+    " Normal text is always selectable.
+    let user_settings.prevent_copy = ""
+    if user_settings.use_css
+      if exists("g:html_prevent_copy")
+	if user_settings.dynamic_folds && !user_settings.no_foldcolumn && g:html_prevent_copy =~# 'f'
+	  let user_settings.prevent_copy .= 'f'
+	endif
+	if user_settings.number_lines && g:html_prevent_copy =~# 'n'
+	  let user_settings.prevent_copy .= 'n'
+	endif
+	if &diff && g:html_prevent_copy =~# 'd'
+	  let user_settings.prevent_copy .= 'd'
+	endif
+	if !user_settings.ignore_folding && g:html_prevent_copy =~# 't'
+	  let user_settings.prevent_copy .= 't'
+	endif
+      else
+	let user_settings.prevent_copy = ""
+      endif
+    endif
+    if empty(user_settings.prevent_copy)
+      let user_settings.no_invalid = 0
+    endif
+
+    if exists('g:html_id_expr')
+      let user_settings.id_suffix = eval(g:html_id_expr)
+      if user_settings.id_suffix !~ '^[-_:.A-Za-z0-9]*$'
+	echohl WarningMsg
+	echomsg '2html: g:html_id_expr evaluated to invalid string for HTML id attributes'
+	echomsg '2html: Omitting user-specified suffix'
+	echohl None
+	sleep 3
+	let user_settings.id_suffix=""
+      endif
+    else
+      let user_settings.id_suffix=""
+    endif
+
    " TODO: font

    return user_settings
--- a/runtime/autoload/vimball.vim
+++ b/runtime/autoload/vimball.vim
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " vimball.vim : construct a file containing both paths and files
 " Author:	Charles E. Campbell, Jr.
-" Date:		Apr 02, 2011
-" Version:	33
+" Date:		Jan 17, 2012
+" Version:	35
 " GetLatestVimScripts: 1502 1 :AutoInstall: vimball.vim
 " Copyright: (c) 2004-2011 by Charles E. Campbell, Jr.
 "            The VIM LICENSE applies to Vimball.vim, and Vimball.txt
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@
 if &cp || exists("g:loaded_vimball")
 finish
 endif
-let g:loaded_vimball = "v33"
+let g:loaded_vimball = "v35"
 if v:version < 702
 echohl WarningMsg
 echo "***warning*** this version of vimball needs vim 7.2"
@@ -220,7 +220,16 @@ fun! vimball#Vimball(really,...)

  " go to vim plugin home
  if a:0 > 0
+   " let user specify the directory where the vimball is to be unpacked.
+   " If, however, the user did not specify a full path, set the home to be below the current directory
   let home= expand(a:1)
+   if has("win32") || has("win95") || has("win64") || has("win16")
+	if home !~ '^\a:[/\\]'
+	 let home= getcwd().'/'.a:1
+	endif
+   elseif home !~ '^/'
+	let home= getcwd().'/'.a:1
+   endif
  else
   let home= vimball#VimballHome()
  endif
@@ -282,11 +291,14 @@ fun! vimball#Vimball(really,...)
 "    call Decho("making directories if they don't exist yet (fname<".fname.">)")
    let fnamebuf= substitute(fname,'\\','/','g')
 	let dirpath = substitute(home,'\\','/','g')
+"	call Decho("init: fnamebuf<".fnamebuf.">")
+"	call Decho("init: dirpath <".dirpath.">")
    while fnamebuf =~ '/'
     let dirname  = dirpath."/".substitute(fnamebuf,'/.*$','','')
 	 let dirpath  = dirname
     let fnamebuf = substitute(fnamebuf,'^.\{-}/\(.*\)$','\1','')
 "	 call Decho("dirname<".dirname.">")
+"	 call Decho("dirpath<".dirpath.">")
     if !isdirectory(dirname)
 "      call Decho("making <".dirname.">")
      if exists("g:vimball_mkdir")
@@ -569,9 +581,19 @@ endfun
 fun! s:ChgDir(newdir)
 "  call Dfunc("ChgDir(newdir<".a:newdir.">)")
  if (has("win32") || has("win95") || has("win64") || has("win16"))
-   exe 'silent cd '.fnameescape(substitute(a:newdir,'/','\\','g'))
+   try
+    exe 'silent cd '.fnameescape(substitute(a:newdir,'/','\\','g'))
+   catch  /^Vim\%((\a\+)\)\=:E/
+    call mkdir(fnameescape(substitute(a:newdir,'/','\\','g')))
+    exe 'silent cd '.fnameescape(substitute(a:newdir,'/','\\','g'))
+   endtry
  else
-   exe 'silent cd '.fnameescape(a:newdir)
+   try
+    exe 'silent cd '.fnameescape(a:newdir)
+   catch  /^Vim\%((\a\+)\)\=:E/
+    call mkdir(fnameescape(a:newdir))
+    exe 'silent cd '.fnameescape(a:newdir)
+   endtry
  endif
 "  call Dret("ChgDir : curdir<".getcwd().">")
 endfun
@@ -745,6 +767,9 @@ fun! vimball#RestoreSettings()
 "  call Dret("RestoreSettings")
 endfun

+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
+
 " ---------------------------------------------------------------------
 " Modelines: {{{1
 " vim: fdm=marker
--- a/runtime/autoload/xmlcomplete.vim
+++ b/runtime/autoload/xmlcomplete.vim
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim completion script
 " Language:	XML
 " Maintainer:	Mikolaj Machowski ( mikmach AT wp DOT pl )
-" Last Change:	2006 Aug 15
+" Last Change:	2013 Jun 29
 " Version: 1.9
 "
 " Changelog:
@@ -475,12 +475,12 @@ function! s:InCommentAt(line, col)
 endfunction

 function! s:SetKeywords()
-	let g:IsKeywordBak=&iskeyword
-	let &iskeyword='33-255'
+	let s:IsKeywordBak=&l:iskeyword
+	let &l:iskeyword='33-255'
 endfunction

 function! s:RestoreKeywords()
-	let &iskeyword=g:IsKeywordBak
+	let &l:iskeyword=s:IsKeywordBak
 endfunction

 function! s:Push(el, sname)
--- a/runtime/autoload/zip.vim
+++ b/runtime/autoload/zip.vim
@@ -1,10 +1,10 @@
 " zip.vim: Handles browsing zipfiles
 "            AUTOLOAD PORTION
-" Date:		May 24, 2011
-" Version:	24
-" Maintainer:	Charles E Campbell, Jr <NdrOchip@ScampbellPfamily.AbizM-NOSPAM>
+" Date:		Apr 17, 2013
+" Version:	26
+" Maintainer:	Charles E Campbell <NdrOchip@ScampbellPfamily.AbizM-NOSPAM>
 " License:	Vim License  (see vim's :help license)
-" Copyright:    Copyright (C) 2005-2011 Charles E. Campbell, Jr. {{{1
+" Copyright:    Copyright (C) 2005-2012 Charles E. Campbell {{{1
 "               Permission is hereby granted to use and distribute this code,
 "               with or without modifications, provided that this copyright
 "               notice is copied with it. Like anything else that's free,
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@
 if &cp || exists("g:loaded_zip")
 finish
 endif
-let g:loaded_zip= "v24"
+let g:loaded_zip= "v26"
 if v:version < 702
 echohl WarningMsg
 echo "***warning*** this version of zip needs vim 7.2"
@@ -104,12 +104,12 @@ fun! zip#Browse(zipfile)

  " give header
  call append(0, ['" zip.vim version '.g:loaded_zip,
-                \ '" Browsing zipfile '.a:zipfile,
-                \ '" Select a file with cursor and press ENTER'])
+ \                '" Browsing zipfile '.a:zipfile,
+ \                '" Select a file with cursor and press ENTER'])
  keepj $

 "  call Decho("exe silent r! ".g:zip_unzipcmd." -l -- ".s:Escape(a:zipfile,1))
-  exe "silent r! ".g:zip_unzipcmd." -Z -1 -- ".s:Escape(a:zipfile,1)
+  exe "keepj sil! r! ".g:zip_unzipcmd." -Z -1 -- ".s:Escape(a:zipfile,1)
  if v:shell_error != 0
   redraw!
   echohl WarningMsg | echo "***warning*** (zip#Browse) ".fnameescape(a:zipfile)." is not a zip file" | echohl None
@@ -188,13 +188,23 @@ fun! zip#Read(fname,mode)
  else
   let zipfile = substitute(a:fname,'^.\{-}zipfile:\(.\{-}\)::[^\\].*$','\1','')
   let fname   = substitute(a:fname,'^.\{-}zipfile:.\{-}::\([^\\].*\)$','\1','')
-   let fname = substitute(fname, '[', '[[]', 'g')
+   let fname   = substitute(fname, '[', '[[]', 'g')
  endif
 "  call Decho("zipfile<".zipfile.">")
 "  call Decho("fname  <".fname.">")

-"  call Decho("exe r! ".g:zip_unzipcmd." -p -- ".s:Escape(zipfile,1)." ".s:Escape(fnameescape(fname),1))
-  exe "keepj sil! r! ".g:zip_unzipcmd." -p -- ".s:Escape(zipfile,1)." ".s:Escape(fnameescape(fname),1)
+  " the following code does much the same thing as
+  "   exe "keepj sil! r! ".g:zip_unzipcmd." -p -- ".s:Escape(zipfile,1)." ".s:Escape(fnameescape(fname),1)
+  " but allows zipfile:... entries in quickfix lists
+  let temp = tempname()
+  let fn   = expand('%:p')
+  exe "sil! !".g:zip_unzipcmd." -p -- ".s:Escape(zipfile,1)." ".s:Escape(fnameescape(fname),1).' > '.temp
+"  call Decho("exe sil! !".g:zip_unzipcmd." -p -- ".s:Escape(zipfile,1)." ".s:Escape(fnameescape(fname),1).' > '.temp)
+  sil exe 'keepalt file '.temp
+  sil keepj e!
+  sil exe 'keepalt file '.fnameescape(fn)
+  call delete(temp)
+
  filetype detect

  " cleanup
@@ -267,7 +277,7 @@ fun! zip#Write(fname)

  if fname =~ '/'
   let dirpath = substitute(fname,'/[^/]\+$','','e')
-   if executable("cygpath")
+   if has("win32unix") && executable("cygpath")
    let dirpath = substitute(system("cygpath ".s:Escape(dirpath,0)),'\n','','e')
   endif
 "   call Decho("mkdir(dirpath<".dirpath.">,p)")
@@ -279,7 +289,7 @@ fun! zip#Write(fname)
 "  call Decho("zipfile<".zipfile."> fname<".fname.">")

  exe "w! ".fnameescape(fname)
-  if executable("cygpath")
+  if has("win32unix") && executable("cygpath")
   let zipfile = substitute(system("cygpath ".s:Escape(zipfile,0)),'\n','','e')
  endif

--- a/runtime/colors/koehler.vim
+++ b/runtime/colors/koehler.vim
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 " vim: tw=0 ts=4 sw=4
 " Vim color file
 " Maintainer:	Ron Aaron <ron@ronware.org>
-" Last Change:	2006 Dec 10
+" Last Change:	2013 May 23

 hi clear
 set background=dark
@@ -43,6 +43,8 @@ hi MatchParen	  term=reverse  ctermfg=blue guibg=Blue
 hi TabLine		  term=bold,reverse  cterm=bold ctermfg=lightblue ctermbg=white gui=bold guifg=blue guibg=white
 hi TabLineFill	  term=bold,reverse  cterm=bold ctermfg=lightblue ctermbg=white gui=bold guifg=blue guibg=white
 hi TabLineSel	  term=reverse	ctermfg=white ctermbg=lightblue guifg=white guibg=blue
+hi Underlined	  term=underline cterm=bold,underline ctermfg=lightblue guifg=lightblue gui=bold,underline
+hi Ignore		  ctermfg=black ctermbg=black guifg=black guibg=black
 hi link IncSearch		Visual
 hi link String			Constant
 hi link Character		Constant
--- a/runtime/colors/ron.vim
+++ b/runtime/colors/ron.vim
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 " vim: tw=0 ts=4 sw=4
 " Vim color file
 " Maintainer:	Ron Aaron <ron@ronware.org>
-" Last Change:	2003 May 02
+" Last Change:	2013 May 24

 set background=dark
 hi clear
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ if exists("syntax_on")
 endif
 let g:colors_name = "ron"
 hi Normal		guifg=cyan	guibg=black
-hi NonText		guifg=brown
+hi NonText		guifg=yellow guibg=#303030
 hi comment		guifg=green
 hi constant		guifg=cyan	gui=bold
 hi identifier	guifg=cyan	gui=NONE
@@ -24,10 +24,11 @@ hi WarningMsg	guifg=Black	guibg=Green
 hi Error		guibg=Red
 hi Todo			guifg=Black	guibg=orange
 hi Cursor		guibg=#60a060 guifg=#00ff00
-hi Search		guibg=lightslateblue
+hi Search		guibg=darkgray guifg=black gui=bold 
 hi IncSearch	gui=NONE guibg=steelblue
 hi LineNr		guifg=darkgrey
 hi title		guifg=darkgrey
+hi ShowMarksHL ctermfg=cyan ctermbg=lightblue cterm=bold guifg=yellow guibg=black  gui=bold
 hi StatusLineNC	gui=NONE guifg=lightblue guibg=darkblue
 hi StatusLine	gui=bold	guifg=cyan	guibg=blue
 hi label		guifg=gold2
@@ -41,3 +42,4 @@ hi DiffDelete   guibg=coral
 hi Folded		guibg=gray30
 hi FoldColumn	guibg=gray30 guifg=white
 hi cIf0			guifg=gray
+hi diffOnly	guifg=red gui=bold
--- a/runtime/compiler/cs.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/cs.vim
@@ -2,12 +2,14 @@
 " Compiler:	Microsoft Visual Studio C#
 " Maintainer:	Zhou YiChao (broken.zhou@gmail.com)
 " Previous Maintainer:	Joseph H. Yao (hyao@sina.com)
-" Last Change:	2011 Apr 21
+" Last Change:	2012 Apr 30

 if exists("current_compiler")
  finish
 endif
 let current_compiler = "cs"
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim

 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
  command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
@@ -19,3 +21,6 @@ CompilerSet errorformat+=%f(%l\\,%v):\ %t%*[^:]:\ %m,
            \%tarning%*[^:]:\ %m

 CompilerSet makeprg=csc\ %
+
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
--- a/runtime/compiler/decada.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/decada.vim
@@ -15,11 +15,11 @@
 "    Help Page: compiler-decada
 "------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-if (exists("current_compiler")	    &&
-   \ current_compiler == "decada")  ||
-   \ version < 700
+if (exists("current_compiler") && current_compiler == "decada") || version < 700
   finish
 endif
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim

 let current_compiler = "decada"

@@ -44,6 +44,9 @@ endif
 execute "CompilerSet makeprg="     . escape (g:decada.Make_Command, ' ')
 execute "CompilerSet errorformat=" . escape (g:decada.Error_Format, ' ')

+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
+
 finish " 1}}}

 "------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--- a/runtime/compiler/erlang.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/erlang.vim
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+" Vim compiler file
+" Compiler:     Erlang
+" Maintainer:	Dmitry Vasiliev <dima at hlabs dot org>
+" Last Change:	2012-02-13
+
+if exists("current_compiler")
+  finish
+endif
+let current_compiler = "erlang"
+
+CompilerSet makeprg=erlc\ -Wall\ %
+
+CompilerSet errorformat=%f:%l:\ %m
--- a/runtime/compiler/eruby.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/eruby.vim
@@ -1,9 +1,7 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Language:		eRuby
 " Maintainer:		Doug Kearns <dougkearns@gmail.com>
-" Last Change:		2008 Aug 1
-" URL:			http://vim-ruby.rubyforge.org
-" Anon CVS:		See above site
+" URL:			https://github.com/vim-ruby/vim-ruby
 " Release Coordinator:	Doug Kearns <dougkearns@gmail.com>

 if exists("current_compiler")
--- a/runtime/compiler/g95.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/g95.vim
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Compiler: G95
 " Maintainer: H Xu <xuhdev@gmail.com>
 " Version: 0.1.3
-" Last Change: 2011 Apr 01
+" Last Change: 2012 Apr 30
 " Homepage: http://www.vim.org/scripts/script.php?script_id=3492
 "           https://bitbucket.org/xuhdev/compiler-g95.vim
 " License: Same as Vim
@@ -10,6 +10,8 @@ if exists('current_compiler')
    finish
 endif
 let current_compiler = 'g95'
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim

 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
  command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
@@ -21,3 +23,6 @@ CompilerSet errorformat=
            \%-Z%trror:\ %m,
            \%-Z%tarning\ (%n):\ %m,
            \%-C%.%#
+
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
--- a/runtime/compiler/gcc.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/gcc.vim
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ endif
 let current_compiler = "gcc"

 let s:cpo_save = &cpo
-set cpo-=C
+set cpo&vim

 CompilerSet errorformat=
      \%*[^\"]\"%f\"%*\\D%l:%c:\ %m,
--- a/runtime/compiler/gfortran.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/gfortran.vim
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Compiler: GNU Fortran Compiler
 " Maintainer: H Xu <xuhdev@gmail.com>
 " Version: 0.1.3
-" Last Change: 19 March 2011
+" Last Change: 2012 Apr 30
 " Homepage: http://www.vim.org/scripts/script.php?script_id=3496
 "           https://bitbucket.org/xuhdev/compiler-gfortran.vim
 " License: Same as Vim
@@ -10,6 +10,8 @@ if exists('current_compiler')
    finish
 endif
 let current_compiler = 'gfortran'
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim

 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
  command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
@@ -20,3 +22,6 @@ CompilerSet errorformat=
            \%-Z%trror:\ %m,
            \%-Z%tarning:\ %m,
            \%-C%.%#
+
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
--- a/runtime/compiler/gnat.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/gnat.vim
@@ -17,11 +17,11 @@
 "    Help Page: compiler-gnat
 "------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-if (exists("current_compiler")	    &&
-   \ current_compiler == "gnat")    ||
-   \ version < 700
+if (exists("current_compiler")&& current_compiler == "gnat") || version < 700
   finish
 endif
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim

 let current_compiler = "gnat"

@@ -62,6 +62,9 @@ endif
 execute "CompilerSet makeprg="     . escape (g:gnat.Get_Command('Make'), ' ')
 execute "CompilerSet errorformat=" . escape (g:gnat.Error_Format, ' ')

+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
+
 finish " 1}}}

 "------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--- a/runtime/compiler/haml.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/haml.vim
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+" Vim compiler file
+" Compiler:	Haml
+" Maintainer:	Tim Pope <vimNOSPAM@tpope.org>
+" Last Change:	2013 May 30
+
+if exists("current_compiler")
+  finish
+endif
+let current_compiler = "haml"
+
+if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
+  command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
+endif
+
+let s:cpo_save = &cpo
+set cpo-=C
+
+CompilerSet makeprg=haml\ -c
+
+CompilerSet errorformat=
+      \Haml\ %trror\ on\ line\ %l:\ %m,
+      \Syntax\ %trror\ on\ line\ %l:\ %m,
+      \%-G%.%#
+
+let &cpo = s:cpo_save
+unlet s:cpo_save
+
+" vim:set sw=2 sts=2:
--- a/runtime/compiler/hp_acc.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/hp_acc.vim
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 " Compiler:	HP aCC
 " Maintainer:	Matthias Ulrich <matthias-ulrich@web.de>
 " URL:          http://www.subhome.de/vim/hp_acc.vim
-" Last Change:	2005 Nov 19
+" Last Change:	2012 Apr 30
 "
 "  aCC --version says: "HP ANSI C++ B3910B A.03.13"
 "  This compiler has been tested on:
@@ -19,6 +19,8 @@ if exists("current_compiler")
  finish
 endif
 let current_compiler = "hp_acc"
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim

 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
  command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
@@ -30,4 +32,7 @@ CompilerSet errorformat=%A%trror\ %n\:\ \"%f\"\\,\ line\ %l\ \#\ %m,
         \%Z\ \ \ \ %p^%.%#,
         \%-C%.%#

+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
+
 " vim:ts=8:sw=4:cindent
--- a/runtime/compiler/ifort.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/ifort.vim
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Compiler: Intel Fortran Compiler
 " Maintainer: H Xu <xuhdev@gmail.com>
 " Version: 0.1.1
-" Last Change: 19 March 2011
+" Last Change: 2012 Apr 30
 " Homepage: http://www.vim.org/scripts/script.php?script_id=3497
 "           https://bitbucket.org/xuhdev/compiler-ifort.vim
 " License: Same as Vim
@@ -10,6 +10,8 @@ if exists('current_compiler')
    finish
 endif
 let current_compiler = 'ifort'
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim

 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
  command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
@@ -20,3 +22,6 @@ CompilerSet errorformat=
            \%A%f(%l):\ %tarning\ \#%n:\ %m,
            \%-Z%p^,
            \%-G%.%#
+
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
--- a/runtime/compiler/intel.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/intel.vim
@@ -1,12 +1,14 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Compiler:     Intel C++ 7.1
 " Maintainer:   David Harrison <david_jr@users.sourceforge.net>
-" Last Change:  2004 May 16
+" Last Change:  2012 Apr 30

 if exists("current_compiler")
  finish
 endif
 let current_compiler = "intel"
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim

 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
  command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
@@ -19,3 +21,6 @@ CompilerSet errorformat=%E%f(%l):\ error:\ %m,
 		    \%-Z\ \ %p^,
 		    \%-G\\s%#,
 		    \%-G%.%#
+
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
--- a/runtime/compiler/irix5_c.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/irix5_c.vim
@@ -1,12 +1,14 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Compiler:	SGI IRIX 5.3 cc
 " Maintainer:	David Harrison <david_jr@users.sourceforge.net>
-" Last Change:	2004 Mar 27
+" Last Change:	2012 Apr 30

 if exists("current_compiler")
  finish
 endif
 let current_compiler = "irix5_c"
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim

 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
  command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
@@ -19,3 +21,6 @@ CompilerSet errorformat=\%Ecfe:\ Error:\ %f\\,\ line\ %l:\ %m,
 		     \%-Z\ %p^,
 		     \-G\\s%#,
 		     \%-G%.%#
+
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
--- a/runtime/compiler/irix5_cpp.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/irix5_cpp.vim
@@ -1,12 +1,14 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Compiler:	SGI IRIX 5.3 CC or NCC
 " Maintainer:	David Harrison <david_jr@users.sourceforge.net>
-" Last Change:	2004 Mar 27
+" Last Change:	2012 Apr 30

 if exists("current_compiler")
  finish
 endif
 let current_compiler = "irix5_cpp"
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim

 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
  command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
@@ -19,3 +21,6 @@ CompilerSet errorformat=%E\"%f\"\\,\ line\ %l:\ error(%n):\ ,
 		      \%-Z\ \ %p%^,
 		      \%+C\ %\\{10}%.%#,
 		      \%-G%.%#
+
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
--- a/runtime/compiler/mcs.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/mcs.vim
@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Compiler:    Mono C# Compiler
 " Maintainer:  Jarek Sobiecki <harijari@go2.pl>
-" Latest Revision: 2006-06-18
+" Last Updated By: Peter Collingbourne
+" Latest Revision: 2012 Jul 19

 if exists("current_compiler")
  finish
@@ -12,13 +13,18 @@ let s:cpo_save = &cpo
 set cpo-=C

 setlocal errorformat=
+         \%D%.%#Project\ \"%f/%[%^/\"]%#\"%.%#,
+         \%X%.%#Done\ building\ project\ \"%f/%[%^/\"]%#\"%.%#,
+         \%-G%\\s%.%#,
+         \%E%f(%l):\ error\ CS%n:%m,
+         \%W%f(%l):\ warning\ CS%n:%m,
         \%E%f(%l\\,%c):\ error\ CS%n:%m,
         \%W%f(%l\\,%c):\ warning\ CS%n:%m,
         \%E%>syntax\ error\\,%m,%Z%f(%l\\,%c):\ error\ CS%n:%m,
         \%D%*\\a[%*\\d]:\ Entering\ directory\ `%f',
         \%X%*\\a[%*\\d]:\ Leaving\ directory\ `%f',
         \%DMaking\ %*\\a\ in\ %f,
-         \%G-%.%#
+         \%-G%.%#

 let &cpo = s:cpo_save
 unlet s:cpo_save
--- a/runtime/compiler/mips_c.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/mips_c.vim
@@ -1,12 +1,14 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Compiler:	SGI IRIX 6.5 MIPS C (cc)
 " Maintainer:	David Harrison <david_jr@users.sourceforge.net>
-" Last Change:	2004 Mar 27
+" Last Change:	2012 Apr 30

 if exists("current_compiler")
  finish
 endif
 let current_compiler = "mips_c"
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim

 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
  command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
@@ -19,3 +21,6 @@ CompilerSet errorformat=%Ecc\-%n\ %.%#:\ ERROR\ File\ =\ %f\%\\,\ Line\ =\ %l,
 		    \%-Z\ \ %p^,
 		    \%-G\\s%#,
 		    \%-G%.%#
+
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
--- a/runtime/compiler/mipspro_c89.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/mipspro_c89.vim
@@ -1,12 +1,14 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Compiler:	SGI IRIX 6.5 MIPSPro C (c89)
 " Maintainer:	David Harrison <david_jr@users.sourceforge.net>
-" Last Change:	2004 Mar 27
+" Last Change:	2012 Apr 30

 if exists("current_compiler")
  finish
 endif
 let current_compiler = "mipspro_c89"
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim

 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
  command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
@@ -20,3 +22,6 @@ CompilerSet errorformat=%Ecc\-%n\ %.%#:\ ERROR\ File\ =\ %f\%\\,\ Line\ =\ %l,
 		    \%+C\ \ %m,
 		    \%-G\\s%#,
 		    \%-G%.%#
+
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
--- a/runtime/compiler/mipspro_cpp.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/mipspro_cpp.vim
@@ -1,12 +1,14 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Compiler:	SGI IRIX 6.5 MIPSPro C++ (CC)
 " Maintainer:	David Harrison <david_jr@users.sourceforge.net>
-" Last Change:	2004 Mar 27
+" Last Change:	2012 Apr 30

 if exists("current_compiler")
  finish
 endif
 let current_compiler = "mipspro_cpp"
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim

 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
  command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
@@ -19,3 +21,6 @@ CompilerSet errorformat=%Ecc\-%n\ %.%#:\ ERROR\ File\ =\ %f\%\\,\ Line\ =\ %l,
 		    \%-Z\ \ %p^,
 		    \%-G\\s%#,
 		    \%-G%.%#
+
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
--- a/runtime/compiler/msbuild.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/msbuild.vim
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+" Vim compiler file
+" Compiler:	Microsoft Visual Studio C#
+" Maintainer:	Chiel ten Brinke (ctje92@gmail.com)
+" Last Change:	2013 May 13
+
+if exists("current_compiler")
+  finish
+endif
+let current_compiler = "msbuild"
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim
+
+if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
+  command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
+endif
+
+CompilerSet errorformat=\ %#%f(%l\\\,%c):\ %m
+CompilerSet makeprg=msbuild\ /nologo\ /v:q\ /property:GenerateFullPaths=true
+
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
--- a/runtime/compiler/ocaml.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/ocaml.vim
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+" Vim Compiler File
+" Compiler:	ocaml
+" Maintainer:	See ftplugin/ocaml.vim (?)
+" Last Change:	June 2013 by Marc Weber
+"
+" Marc Weber's comments:
+" Setting makeprg doesn't make sense, because there is ocamlc, ocamlopt,
+" ocamake and whatnot. So which one to use?
+"
+" This error format was moved from ftplugin/ocaml.vim to this file,
+" because ftplugin is the wrong file to set an error format
+" and the error format itself is annoying because it joins many lines in this
+" error case:
+"
+"    Error: The implementation foo.ml does not match the interface foo.cmi:
+"    Modules do not match case.
+"
+" So having it here makes people opt-in
+
+
+if exists("current_compiler")
+    finish
+endif
+let current_compiler = "ocaml"
+
+let s:cpo_save = &cpo
+set cpo&vim
+
+CompilerSet errorformat =
+      \%EFile\ \"%f\"\\,\ line\ %l\\,\ characters\ %c-%*\\d:,
+      \%EFile\ \"%f\"\\,\ line\ %l\\,\ character\ %c:%m,
+      \%+EReference\ to\ unbound\ regexp\ name\ %m,
+      \%Eocamlyacc:\ e\ -\ line\ %l\ of\ \"%f\"\\,\ %m,
+      \%Wocamlyacc:\ w\ -\ %m,
+      \%-Zmake%.%#,
+      \%C%m,
+      \%D%*\\a[%*\\d]:\ Entering\ directory\ `%f',
+      \%X%*\\a[%*\\d]:\ Leaving\ directory\ `%f',
+      \%D%*\\a:\ Entering\ directory\ `%f',
+      \%X%*\\a:\ Leaving\ directory\ `%f',
+      \%DMaking\ %*\\a\ in\ %f
+
+let &cpo = s:cpo_save
+unlet s:cpo_save
--- a/runtime/compiler/rake.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/rake.vim
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+" Vim compiler file
+" Language:		Rake
+" Maintainer:		Tim Pope <vimNOSPAM@tpope.org>
+" URL:			https://github.com/vim-ruby/vim-ruby
+" Release Coordinator:	Doug Kearns <dougkearns@gmail.com>
+
+if exists("current_compiler")
+  finish
+endif
+let current_compiler = "rake"
+
+if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
+  command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
+endif
+
+let s:cpo_save = &cpo
+set cpo-=C
+
+CompilerSet makeprg=rake
+
+CompilerSet errorformat=
+      \%D(in\ %f),
+      \%\\s%#from\ %f:%l:%m,
+      \%\\s%#from\ %f:%l:,
+      \%\\s%##\ %f:%l:%m,
+      \%\\s%##\ %f:%l,
+      \%\\s%#[%f:%l:\ %#%m,
+      \%\\s%#%f:%l:\ %#%m,
+      \%\\s%#%f:%l:,
+      \%m\ [%f:%l]:
+
+let &cpo = s:cpo_save
+unlet s:cpo_save
+
+" vim: nowrap sw=2 sts=2 ts=8:
--- a/runtime/compiler/rspec.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/rspec.vim
@@ -1,9 +1,7 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Language:		RSpec
 " Maintainer:		Tim Pope <vimNOSPAM@tpope.org>
-" Last Change:		2009 Dec 22
-" URL:			http://vim-ruby.rubyforge.org
-" Anon CVS:		See above site
+" URL:			https://github.com/vim-ruby/vim-ruby
 " Release Coordinator:	Doug Kearns <dougkearns@gmail.com>

 if exists("current_compiler")
@@ -18,21 +16,15 @@ endif
 let s:cpo_save = &cpo
 set cpo-=C

-CompilerSet makeprg=spec
+CompilerSet makeprg=rspec

 CompilerSet errorformat=
-    \%+W'%.%#'\ FAILED,
-    \%+I'%.%#'\ FIXED,
-    \%-Cexpected:%.%#,
-    \%-C\ \ \ \ \ got:%.%#,
+    \%f:%l:\ %tarning:\ %m,
    \%E%.%#:in\ `load':\ %f:%l:%m,
-    \%C%f:%l:,
-    \%W%f:%l:\ warning:\ %m,
-    \%E%f:%l:in\ %*[^:]:\ %m,
-    \%E%f:%l:\ %m,
-    \%-Z%\tfrom\ %f:%l,
-    \%-Z%p^%.%#,
-    \%-C%.%#,
+    \%E%f:%l:in\ `%*[^']':\ %m,
+    \%-Z\ \ \ \ \ \#\ %f:%l:%.%#,
+    \%E\ \ %\\d%\\+)%.%#,
+    \%C\ \ \ \ \ %m,
    \%-G%.%#

 let &cpo = s:cpo_save
--- a/runtime/compiler/rst.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/rst.vim
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ endif
 let current_compiler = "rst"

 let s:cpo_save = &cpo
-set cpo-=C
+set cpo&vim

 setlocal errorformat=
      \%f:%l:\ (%tEBUG/0)\ %m,
--- a/runtime/compiler/ruby.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/ruby.vim
@@ -1,33 +1,10 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Language:		Ruby
 " Function:		Syntax check and/or error reporting
-" Maintainer:		Tim Hammerquist <timh at rubyforge.org>
-" Last Change:		2008 Aug 1
-" URL:			http://vim-ruby.rubyforge.org
-" Anon CVS:		See above site
+" Maintainer:		Tim Pope <vimNOSPAM@tpope.org>
+" URL:			https://github.com/vim-ruby/vim-ruby
 " Release Coordinator:	Doug Kearns <dougkearns@gmail.com>
 " ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-"
-" Changelog:
-" 0.2:	script saves and restores 'cpoptions' value to prevent problems with
-"	line continuations
-" 0.1:	initial release
-"
-" Contributors:
-"   Hugh Sasse <hgs@dmu.ac.uk>
-"   Doug Kearns <djkea2@gus.gscit.monash.edu.au>
-"
-" Todo:
-"   match error type %m
-"
-" Comments:
-"   I know this file isn't perfect.  If you have any questions, suggestions,
-"   patches, etc., please don't hesitate to let me know.
-"
-"   This is my first experience with 'errorformat' and compiler plugins and
-"   I welcome any input from more experienced (or clearer-thinking)
-"   individuals.
-" ----------------------------------------------------------------------------

 if exists("current_compiler")
  finish
--- a/runtime/compiler/rubyunit.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/rubyunit.vim
@@ -1,9 +1,7 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Language:		Test::Unit - Ruby Unit Testing Framework
 " Maintainer:		Doug Kearns <dougkearns@gmail.com>
-" Last Change:		2008 Aug 1
-" URL:			http://vim-ruby.rubyforge.org
-" Anon CVS:		See above site
+" URL:			https://github.com/vim-ruby/vim-ruby
 " Release Coordinator:	Doug Kearns <dougkearns@gmail.com>

 if exists("current_compiler")
--- a/runtime/compiler/sass.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/sass.vim
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+" Vim compiler file
+" Compiler:	Sass
+" Maintainer:	Tim Pope <vimNOSPAM@tpope.org>
+" Last Change:	2013 May 30
+
+if exists("current_compiler")
+  finish
+endif
+let current_compiler = "sass"
+
+if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
+  command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
+endif
+
+let s:cpo_save = &cpo
+set cpo-=C
+
+CompilerSet makeprg=sass\ -c
+
+CompilerSet errorformat=
+      \%f:%l:%m\ (Sass::Syntax%trror),
+      \%ESyntax\ %trror:%m,
+      \%C%\\s%\\+on\ line\ %l\ of\ %f,
+      \%Z%.%#,
+      \%-G%.%#
+
+let &cpo = s:cpo_save
+unlet s:cpo_save
+
+" vim:set sw=2 sts=2:
--- a/runtime/compiler/tex.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/tex.vim
@@ -1,11 +1,13 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Compiler:     TeX
 " Maintainer:   Artem Chuprina <ran@ran.pp.ru>
-" Last Change:  2004 Mar 27
+" Last Change:  2012 Apr 30

 if exists("current_compiler")
 	finish
 endif
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim

 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
  command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
@@ -30,9 +32,6 @@ else
 	let current_compiler = 'make'
 endif

-let s:cpo_save = &cpo
-set cpo-=C
-
 " Value errorformat are taken from vim help, see :help errorformat-LaTeX, with
 " addition from Srinath Avadhanula <srinath@fastmail.fm>
 CompilerSet errorformat=%E!\ LaTeX\ %trror:\ %m,
@@ -64,5 +63,5 @@ CompilerSet errorformat=%E!\ LaTeX\ %trror:\ %m,
 	\%+Q%*[^()])%r,
 	\%+Q[%\\d%*[^()])%r

-let &cpo = s:cpo_save
-unlet s:cpo_save
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
--- a/runtime/compiler/xbuild.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/xbuild.vim
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+" Vim compiler file
+" Compiler:	Mono C#
+" Maintainer:	Chiel ten Brinke (ctje92@gmail.com)
+" Last Change:	2013 May 13
+
+if exists("current_compiler")
+  finish
+endif
+
+let current_compiler = "xbuild"
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim
+
+if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
+  command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
+endif
+
+CompilerSet errorformat=\ %#%f(%l\\\,%c):\ %m
+CompilerSet makeprg=xbuild\ /nologo\ /v:q\ /property:GenerateFullPaths=true
+
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
--- a/runtime/compiler/xmllint.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/xmllint.vim
@@ -1,8 +1,7 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Compiler:	xmllint
-" Maintainer:	Doug Kearns <djkea2@gus.gscit.monash.edu.au>
-" URL:		http://gus.gscit.monash.edu.au/~djkea2/vim/compiler/xmllint.vim
-" Last Change:	2004 Nov 27
+" Maintainer:	Doug Kearns <dougkearns@gmail.com>
+" Last Change:	2013 Jun 1

 if exists("current_compiler")
  finish
@@ -18,10 +17,8 @@ set cpo-=C

 CompilerSet makeprg=xmllint\ --valid\ --noout\ 

-CompilerSet errorformat=%E%f:%l:\ error:\ %m,
-		    \%W%f:%l:\ warning:\ %m,
-		    \%E%f:%l:\ validity\ error:\ %m,
-		    \%W%f:%l:\ validity\ warning:\ %m,
+CompilerSet errorformat=%+E%f:%l:\ %.%#\ error\ :\ %m,
+		    \%+W%f:%l:\ %.%#\ warning\ :\ %m,
 		    \%-Z%p^,
 		    \%-G%.%#

--- a/runtime/doc/autocmd.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/autocmd.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*autocmd.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 May 19
+*autocmd.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2013 Jun 15


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ files matching *.c.  You can also use autocommands to implement advanced
 features, such as editing compressed files (see |gzip-example|).  The usual
 place to put autocommands is in your .vimrc or .exrc file.

-							*E203* *E204* *E143*
+						*E203* *E204* *E143* *E855*
 WARNING: Using autocommands is very powerful, and may lead to unexpected side
 effects.  Be careful not to destroy your text.
 - It's a good idea to do some testing on an expendable copy of a file first.
@@ -263,8 +263,10 @@ Name			triggered by ~
 	Startup and exit
 |VimEnter|		after doing all the startup stuff
 |GUIEnter|		after starting the GUI successfully
+|GUIFailed|		after starting the GUI failed
 |TermResponse|		after the terminal response to |t_RV| is received

+|QuitPre|		when using `:quit`, before deciding whether to quit
 |VimLeavePre|		before exiting Vim, before writing the viminfo file
 |VimLeave|		before exiting Vim, after writing the viminfo file

@@ -312,6 +314,7 @@ Name			triggered by ~
 |SessionLoadPost|	after loading a session file

 |MenuPopup|		just before showing the popup menu
+|CompleteDone|		after Insert mode completion is done

 |User|			to be used in combination with ":doautocmd"

@@ -385,6 +388,10 @@ BufRead or BufReadPost		When starting to edit a new buffer, after
 				This does NOT work for ":r file".  Not used
 				when the file doesn't exist.  Also used after
 				successfully recovering a file.
+				Also triggered for the filetypedetect group
+				when executing ":filetype detect" and when
+				writing an unnamed buffer in a way that the
+				buffer gets a name.
 							*BufReadCmd*
 BufReadCmd			Before starting to edit a new buffer.  Should
 				read the file into the buffer. |Cmd-event|
@@ -448,6 +455,9 @@ BufWriteCmd			Before writing the whole buffer to a file.
 				'modified' if successful, unless '+' is in
 				'cpo' and writing to another file |cpo-+|.
 				The buffer contents should not be changed.
+				When the command resets 'modified' the undo
+				information is adjusted to mark older undo
+				states as 'modified', like |:write| does.
 				|Cmd-event|
 							*BufWritePost*
 BufWritePost			After writing the whole buffer to a file
@@ -471,6 +481,11 @@ CmdwinLeave			Before leaving the command-line window.
 							*ColorScheme*
 ColorScheme			After loading a color scheme. |:colorscheme|

+							*CompleteDone*
+CompleteDone			After Insert mode completion is done.  Either
+				when something was completed or abandoning
+				completion. |ins-completion|
+
 							*CursorHold*
 CursorHold			When the user doesn't press a key for the time
 				specified with 'updatetime'.  Not re-triggered
@@ -498,16 +513,18 @@ CursorHold			When the user doesn't press a key for the time
 CursorHoldI			Just like CursorHold, but in Insert mode.

 							*CursorMoved*
-CursorMoved			After the cursor was moved in Normal mode.
-				Also when the text of the cursor line has been
-				changed, e.g., with "x", "rx" or "p".
+CursorMoved			After the cursor was moved in Normal or Visual
+				mode.  Also when the text of the cursor line
+				has been changed, e.g., with "x", "rx" or "p".
 				Not triggered when there is typeahead or when
 				an operator is pending.
 				For an example see |match-parens|.
-				Careful: Don't do anything that the user does
-				not expect or that is slow.
+				Careful: This is triggered very often, don't
+				do anything that the user does not expect or
+				that is slow.
 							*CursorMovedI*
 CursorMovedI			After the cursor was moved in Insert mode.
+				Not triggered when the popup menu is visible.
 				Otherwise the same as CursorMoved.
 							*EncodingChanged*
 EncodingChanged			Fires off after the 'encoding' option has been
@@ -674,8 +691,11 @@ InsertCharPre			When a character is typed in Insert mode,
 InsertEnter			Just before starting Insert mode.  Also for
 				Replace mode and Virtual Replace mode.  The
 				|v:insertmode| variable indicates the mode.
-				Be careful not to move the cursor or do
-				anything else that the user does not expect.
+				Be careful not to do anything else that the
+				user does not expect.
+				The cursor is restored afterwards.  If you do
+				not want that set |v:char| to a non-empty
+				string.
 							*InsertLeave*
 InsertLeave			When leaving Insert mode.  Also when using
 				CTRL-O |i_CTRL-O|.  But not for |i_CTRL-C|.
@@ -695,7 +715,10 @@ MenuPopup			Just before showing the popup menu (under the
 QuickFixCmdPre			Before a quickfix command is run (|:make|,
 				|:lmake|, |:grep|, |:lgrep|, |:grepadd|,
 				|:lgrepadd|, |:vimgrep|, |:lvimgrep|,
-				|:vimgrepadd|, |:lvimgrepadd|, |:cscope|).
+				|:vimgrepadd|, |:lvimgrepadd|, |:cscope|,
+				|:cfile|, |:cgetfile|, |:caddfile|, |:lfile|,
+				|:lgetfile|, |:laddfile|, |:helpgrep|,
+				|:lhelpgrep|).
 				The pattern is matched against the command
 				being run.  When |:grep| is used but 'grepprg'
 				is set to "internal" it still matches "grep".
@@ -706,7 +729,16 @@ QuickFixCmdPre			Before a quickfix command is run (|:make|,
 							*QuickFixCmdPost*
 QuickFixCmdPost			Like QuickFixCmdPre, but after a quickfix
 				command is run, before jumping to the first
-				location.  See |QuickFixCmdPost-example|.
+				location. For |:cfile| and |:lfile| commands
+				it is run after error file is read and before
+				moving to the first error. 
+				See |QuickFixCmdPost-example|.
+							*QuitPre*
+QuitPre				When using `:quit`, `:wq` or `:qall`, before
+				deciding whether it closes the current window
+				or quits Vim.  Can be used to close any
+				non-essential window if the current window is
+				the last ordinary window.
 							*RemoteReply*
 RemoteReply			When a reply from a Vim that functions as
 				server was received |server2client()|.  The
@@ -803,12 +835,27 @@ TermResponse			After the response to |t_RV| is received from
 				triggered halfway executing another event,
 				especially if file I/O, a shell command or
 				anything else that takes time is involved.
+							*TextChanged*
+TextChanged			After a change was made to the text in the
+				current buffer in Normal mode.  That is when
+				|b:changedtick| has changed.
+				Not triggered when there is typeahead or when
+				an operator is pending.
+				Careful: This is triggered very often, don't
+				do anything that the user does not expect or
+				that is slow.
+							*TextChangedI*
+TextChangedI			After a change was made to the text in the
+				current buffer in Insert mode.
+				Not triggered when the popup menu is visible.
+				Otherwise the same as TextChanged.
 							*User*
 User				Never executed automatically.  To be used for
 				autocommands that are only executed with
 				":doautocmd".
 							*UserGettingBored*
-UserGettingBored		When the user hits CTRL-C.  Just kidding! :-)
+UserGettingBored		When the user presses the same key 42 times.
+				Just kidding! :-)
 							*VimEnter*
 VimEnter			After doing all the startup stuff, including
 				loading .vimrc files, executing the "-c cmd"
@@ -1048,7 +1095,7 @@ Note that the 'eventignore' option applies here too.  Events listed in this
 option will not cause any commands to be executed.

 					*:do* *:doau* *:doautocmd* *E217*
-:do[autocmd] [group] {event} [fname]
+:do[autocmd] [<nomodeline>] [group] {event} [fname]
 			Apply the autocommands matching [fname] (default:
 			current file name) for {event} to the current buffer.
 			You can use this when the current file name does not
@@ -1057,8 +1104,8 @@ option will not cause any commands to be executed.
 			It's possible to use this inside an autocommand too,
 			so you can base the autocommands for one extension on
 			another extension.  Example: >
-				:au Bufenter *.cpp so ~/.vimrc_cpp
-				:au Bufenter *.cpp doau BufEnter x.c
+				:au BufEnter *.cpp so ~/.vimrc_cpp
+				:au BufEnter *.cpp doau BufEnter x.c
 <			Be careful to avoid endless loops.  See
 			|autocmd-nested|.

@@ -1067,14 +1114,17 @@ option will not cause any commands to be executed.
 			argument is included, Vim executes only the matching
 			autocommands for that group.  Note: if you use an
 			undefined group name, Vim gives you an error message.
-
+							*<nomodeline>*
 			After applying the autocommands the modelines are
 			processed, so that their settings overrule the
 			settings from autocommands, like what happens when
-			editing a file.
+			editing a file. This is skipped when the <nomodeline>
+			argument is present. You probably want to use
+			<nomodeline> for events that are not used when loading
+			a buffer, such as |User|.

 						*:doautoa* *:doautoall*
-:doautoa[ll] [group] {event} [fname]
+:doautoa[ll] [<nomodeline>] [group] {event} [fname]
 			Like ":doautocmd", but apply the autocommands to each
 			loaded buffer.  Note that [fname] is used to select
 			the autocommands, not the buffers to which they are
--- a/runtime/doc/change.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/change.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*change.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Jun 19
+*change.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2013 Mar 19


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ For inserting text see |insert.txt|.
 			"D" deletes the highlighted text plus all text until
 			the end of the line.  {not in Vi}

-						*:d* *:de* *:del* *:delete*
+					*:d* *:de* *:del* *:delete* *:dl*
 :[range]d[elete] [x]	Delete [range] lines (default: current line) [into
 			register x].

@@ -80,15 +80,16 @@ For inserting text see |insert.txt|.
 			(default: current line |cmdline-ranges|) [into
 			register x].

-These commands delete text.  You can repeat them with the "." command
-(except ":d") and undo them.  Use Visual mode to delete blocks of text.  See
+These commands delete text.  You can repeat them with the `.` command
+(except `:d`) and undo them.  Use Visual mode to delete blocks of text.  See
 |registers| for an explanation of registers.

 An exception for the d{motion} command: If the motion is not linewise, the
 start and end of the motion are not in the same line, and there are only
 blanks before the start and after the end of the motion, the delete becomes
 linewise.  This means that the delete also removes the line of blanks that you
-might expect to remain.
+might expect to remain. Use the |o_v| operator to force the motion to be
+characterwise.

 Trying to delete an empty region of text (e.g., "d0" in the first column)
 is an error when 'cpoptions' includes the 'E' flag.
@@ -131,7 +132,7 @@ gJ			Join [count] lines, with a minimum of two lines.
 			See |ex-flags| for [flags].

 These commands delete the <EOL> between lines.  This has the effect of joining
-multiple lines into one line.  You can repeat these commands (except ":j") and
+multiple lines into one line.  You can repeat these commands (except `:j`) and
 undo them.

 These commands, except "gJ", insert one space in place of the <EOL> unless
@@ -259,6 +260,12 @@ r{char}			Replace the character under the cursor with {char}.
 			<CR>.  CTRL-V <NL> replaces with a <Nul>.
 			{Vi: CTRL-V <CR> still replaces with a line break,
 			cannot replace something with a <CR>}
+
+			If {char} is CTRL-E or CTRL-Y the character from the
+			line below or above is used, just like with |i_CTRL-E|
+			and |i_CTRL-Y|.  This also works with a count, thus
+			`10r<C-E>` copies 10 characters from the line below.
+
 			If you give a [count], Vim replaces [count] characters
 			with [count] {char}s.  When {char} is a <CR> or <NL>,
 			however, Vim inserts only one <CR>: "5r<CR>" replaces
@@ -464,9 +471,9 @@ much as possible to make the indent.  You can use ">><<" to replace an indent
 made out of spaces with the same indent made out of <Tab>s (and a few spaces
 if necessary).  If the 'expandtab' option is on, Vim uses only spaces.  Then
 you can use ">><<" to replace <Tab>s in the indent by spaces (or use
-":retab!").
+`:retab!`).

-To move a line several 'shiftwidth's, use Visual mode or the ":" commands.
+To move a line several 'shiftwidth's, use Visual mode or the `:` commands.
 For example: >
 	Vjj4>		move three lines 4 indents to the right
 	:<<<		move current line 3 indents to the left
@@ -486,7 +493,7 @@ Examples of filters are "sort", which sorts lines alphabetically, and
 works like a filter; not all versions do).  The 'shell' option specifies the
 shell Vim uses to execute the filter command (See also the 'shelltype'
 option).  You can repeat filter commands with ".".  Vim does not recognize a
-comment (starting with '"') after the ":!" command.
+comment (starting with '"') after the `:!` command.

 							*!*
 !{motion}{filter}	Filter {motion} text lines through the external
@@ -573,34 +580,37 @@ For other systems the tmpnam() library function is used.
 			Repeat last :substitute with same search pattern and
 			substitute string, but without the same flags.  You
 			may add [flags], see |:s_flags|.
-			Note that after ":substitute" the '&' flag can't be
+			Note that after `:substitute` the '&' flag can't be
 			used, it's recognized as a pattern separator.
-			The space between ":substitute" and the 'c', 'g' and
+			The space between `:substitute` and the 'c', 'g' and
 			'r' flags isn't required, but in scripts it's a good
 			idea to keep it to avoid confusion.

 :[range]~[&][flags] [count]					*:~*
 			Repeat last substitute with same substitute string
 			but with last used search pattern.  This is like
-			":&r".  See |:s_flags| for [flags].
+			`:&r`.  See |:s_flags| for [flags].

 								*&*
-&			Synonym for ":s" (repeat last substitute).  Note
+&			Synonym for `:s` (repeat last substitute).  Note
 			that the flags are not remembered, thus it might
-			actually work differently.  You can use ":&&" to keep
+			actually work differently.  You can use `:&&` to keep
 			the flags.

 								*g&*
-g&			Synonym for ":%s//~/&" (repeat last substitute on all
-			lines with the same flags).
+g&			Synonym for `:%s//~/&` (repeat last substitute with
+			last search pattern on all lines with the same flags).
+			For example, when you first do a substitution with
+			`:s/pattern/repl/flags` and then `/search` for
+			something else, `g&` will do `:%s/search/repl/flags`.
 			Mnemonic: global substitute. {not in Vi}

 						*:snomagic* *:sno*
-:[range]sno[magic] ...	Same as ":substitute", but always use 'nomagic'.
+:[range]sno[magic] ...	Same as `:substitute`, but always use 'nomagic'.
 			{not in Vi}

 						*:smagic* *:sm*
-:[range]sm[agic] ...	Same as ":substitute", but always use 'magic'.
+:[range]sm[agic] ...	Same as `:substitute`, but always use 'magic'.
 			{not in Vi}

 							*:s_flags*
@@ -610,7 +620,7 @@ The flags that you can use for the substitute commands:
 	command.  Examples: >
 		:&&
 		:s/this/that/&
-<	Note that ":s" and ":&" don't keep the flags.
+<	Note that `:s` and `:&` don't keep the flags.
 	{not in Vi}

 [c]	Confirm each substitution.  Vim highlights the matching string (with
@@ -659,6 +669,8 @@ The flags that you can use for the substitute commands:
 [n]	Report the number of matches, do not actually substitute.  The [c]
 	flag is ignored.  The matches are reported as if 'report' is zero.
 	Useful to |count-items|.
+	If \= |sub-replace-expression| is used, the expression will be
+	evaluated in the |sandbox| at every match.

 [p]	Print the line containing the last substitute.

@@ -666,14 +678,14 @@ The flags that you can use for the substitute commands:

 [l]	Like [p] but print the text like |:list|.

-[r]	Only useful in combination with ":&" or ":s" without arguments.  ":&r"
-	works the same way as ":~":  When the search pattern is empty, use the
+[r]	Only useful in combination with `:&` or `:s` without arguments.  `:&r`
+	works the same way as `:~`:  When the search pattern is empty, use the
 	previously used search pattern instead of the search pattern from the
-	last substitute or ":global".  If the last command that did a search
-	was a substitute or ":global", there is no effect.  If the last
+	last substitute or `:global`.  If the last command that did a search
+	was a substitute or `:global`, there is no effect.  If the last
 	command was a search command such as "/", use the pattern from that
 	command.
-	For ":s" with an argument this already happens: >
+	For `:s` with an argument this already happens: >
 		:s/blue/red/
 		/green
 		:s//red/   or  :~   or  :&r
@@ -690,9 +702,9 @@ reason is that the flags can only be found by skipping the pattern, and in
 order to skip the pattern the "magicness" must be known.  Catch 22!

 If the {pattern} for the substitute command is empty, the command uses the
-pattern from the last substitute or ":global" command.  If there is none, but
+pattern from the last substitute or `:global` command.  If there is none, but
 there is a previous search pattern, that one is used.  With the [r] flag, the
-command uses the pattern from the last substitute, ":global", or search
+command uses the pattern from the last substitute, `:global`, or search
 command.

 If the {string} is omitted the substitute is done as if it's empty.  Thus the
@@ -772,6 +784,11 @@ Examples: >
  :s/abcde/abc^Mde/		 modifies "abcde"    to "abc", "de" (two lines)
  :s/$/\^M/			 modifies "abcde"    to "abcde^M"
  :s/\w\+/\u\0/g		 modifies "bla bla"  to "Bla Bla"
+  :s/\w\+/\L\u/g		 modifies "BLA bla"  to "Bla Bla"
+
+Note: "\L\u" can be used to capitalize the first letter of a word.  This is
+not compatible with Vi and older versions of Vim, where the "\u" would cancel
+out the "\L". Same for "\U\l".

 Note: In previous versions CTRL-V was handled in a special way.  Since this is
 not Vi compatible, this was removed.  Use a backslash instead.
@@ -847,7 +864,7 @@ This replaces each 'E' character with a euro sign.  Read more in |<Char->|.


 4.4 Changing tabs					*change-tabs*
-							*:ret* *:retab*
+							*:ret* *:retab* *:retab!*
 :[range]ret[ab][!] [new_tabstop]
 			Replace all sequences of white-space containing a
 			<Tab> with new strings of white-space using the new
@@ -866,7 +883,7 @@ This replaces each 'E' character with a euro sign.  Read more in |<Char->|.
 			Careful: This command modifies any <Tab> characters
 			inside of strings in a C program.  Use "\t" to avoid
 			this (that's a good habit anyway).
-			":retab!" may also change a sequence of spaces by
+			`:retab!` may also change a sequence of spaces by
 			<Tab> characters, which can mess up a printf().
 			{not in Vi}
 			Not available when |+ex_extra| feature was disabled at
@@ -976,8 +993,12 @@ inside of strings can change!  Also see 'softtabstop' option. >
 			current line).  This always works |linewise|, thus
 			this command can be used to put a yanked block as new
 			lines.
-			The cursor is left on the first non-blank in the last
-			new line.
+			If no register is specified, it depends on the 'cb'
+			option: If 'cb' contains "unnamedplus", paste from the
+			+ register |quoteplus|.  Otherwise, if 'cb' contains
+			"unnamed", paste from the * register |quotestar|.
+			Otherwise, paste from the unnamed register
+			|quote_quote|.
 			The register can also be '=' followed by an optional
 			expression.  The expression continues until the end of
 			the command.  You need to escape the '|' and '"'
@@ -1182,7 +1203,7 @@ nothing is returned.  {not in Vi}

 9. Last search pattern register	"/			*quote_/* *quote/*
 Contains the most recent search-pattern.  This is used for "n" and 'hlsearch'.
-It is writable with ":let", you can change it to have 'hlsearch' highlight
+It is writable with `:let`, you can change it to have 'hlsearch' highlight
 other matches without actually searching.  You can't yank or delete into this
 register.  The search direction is available in |v:searchforward|.
 Note that the valued is restored when returning from a function
@@ -1190,12 +1211,12 @@ Note that the valued is restored when returning from a function
 {not in Vi}

 							*@/*
-You can write to a register with a ":let" command |:let-@|.  Example: >
+You can write to a register with a `:let` command |:let-@|.  Example: >
 	:let @/ = "the"

 If you use a put command without specifying a register, Vim uses the register
 that was last filled (this is also the contents of the unnamed register).  If
-you are confused, use the ":dis" command to find out what Vim will put (this
+you are confused, use the `:dis` command to find out what Vim will put (this
 command displays all named and numbered registers; the unnamed register is
 labelled '"').

@@ -1491,6 +1512,7 @@ n	When formatting text, recognize numbered lists.  This actually uses
 			first line of a paragraph
 		second line of the same paragraph
 		third line.
+<	This also works inside comments, ignoring the comment leader.
 v	Vi-compatible auto-wrapping in insert mode: Only break a line at a
 	blank that you have entered during the current insert command.  (Note:
 	this is not 100% Vi compatible.  Vi has some "unexpected features" or
@@ -1511,6 +1533,12 @@ B	When joining lines, don't insert a space between two multi-byte
 	characters.  Overruled by the 'M' flag.
 1	Don't break a line after a one-letter word.  It's broken before it
 	instead (if possible).
+j	Where it makes sense, remove a comment leader when joining lines.  For
+	example, joining:
+		int i;   // the index ~
+		         // in the list ~
+	Becomes:
+		int i;   // the index in the list ~


 With 't' and 'c' you can specify when Vim performs auto-wrapping:
@@ -1554,7 +1582,7 @@ Some examples:
 	:set fo=tcrq
 <

-Automatic formatting					*auto-format*
+Automatic formatting				*auto-format* *autoformat*

 When the 'a' flag is present in 'formatoptions' text is formatted
 automatically when inserting text or deleting text.  This works nice for
@@ -1663,7 +1691,7 @@ found here: |sort()|.
 			last search pattern is used.  This allows trying out
 			a pattern first.

-Note that using ":sort" with ":global" doesn't sort the matching lines, it's
+Note that using `:sort` with `:global` doesn't sort the matching lines, it's
 quite useless.

 The details about sorting depend on the library function used.  There is no
--- a/runtime/doc/cmdline.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/cmdline.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*cmdline.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Mar 27
+*cmdline.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2013 Mar 16


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ CTRL-\ e {expr}						*c_CTRL-\_e*
 			   :return cmd
 			:endfunc
 <		This doesn't work recursively, thus not when already editing
-		an expression.
+		an expression.  But it is possible to use in a mapping.

 							*c_CTRL-Y*
 CTRL-Y		When there is a modeless selection, copy the selection into
@@ -330,12 +330,12 @@ terminals)

 :his[tory] [{name}] [{first}][, [{last}]]
 		List the contents of history {name} which can be:
-		c[md]	 or :	command-line history
-		s[earch] or /	search string history
-		e[xpr]	 or =	expression register history
-		i[nput]	 or @	input line history
-		d[ebug]	 or >	debug command history
-		a[ll]		all of the above
+		c[md]	 or :		command-line history
+		s[earch] or / or ?	search string history
+		e[xpr]	 or =		expression register history
+		i[nput]	 or @		input line history
+		d[ebug]	 or >		debug command history
+		a[ll]			all of the above
 		{not in Vi}

 		If the numbers {first} and/or {last} are given, the respective
@@ -426,6 +426,8 @@ a previous version <Esc> was used).  In the pattern standard wildcards '*' and
 '?' are accepted when matching file names.  '*' matches any string, '?'
 matches exactly one character.

+The 'wildignorecase' option can be set to ignore case in filenames.
+
 If you like tcsh's autolist completion, you can use this mapping:
 	:cnoremap X <C-L><C-D>
 (Where X is the command key to use, <C-L> is CTRL-L and <C-D> is CTRL-D)
@@ -712,10 +714,15 @@ three lines: >
 Visual Mode and Range					*v_:*

 {Visual}:	Starts a command-line with the Visual selected lines as a
-		range.  The code ":'<,'>" is used for this range, which makes
+		range.  The code `:'<,'>` is used for this range, which makes
 		it possible to select a similar line from the command-line
 		history for repeating a command on different Visually selected
 		lines.
+		When Visual mode was already ended, a short way to use the
+		Visual area for a range is `:*`.  This requires that "*" does
+		not appear in 'cpo', see |cpo-star|.  Otherwise you will have
+		to type `:'<,'>`
+

 ==============================================================================
 5. Ex command-line flags				*ex-flags*
@@ -824,10 +831,11 @@ These modifiers can be given, in this order:
 		the home directory.  If the name is a directory a path
 		separator is added at the end.  For a file name that does not
 		exist and does not have an absolute path the result is
-		unpredictable.
+		unpredictable.  On MS-Windows an 8.3 filename is expanded to
+		the long name.
 	:8	Converts the path to 8.3 short format (currently only on
-		win32).  Will act on as much of a path that is an existing
-		path.
+		MS-Windows).  Will act on as much of a path that is an
+		existing path.
 	:~	Reduce file name to be relative to the home directory, if
 		possible.  File name is unmodified if it is not below the home
 		directory.
@@ -956,7 +964,7 @@ for the file "$home" in the root directory.  A few examples:
 	\\$home		file "\\", followed by expanded $home

 ==============================================================================
-6. Command-line window				*cmdline-window* *cmdwin*
+7. Command-line window				*cmdline-window* *cmdwin*
 							*command-line-window*
 In the command-line window the command line can be edited just like editing
 text in any window.  It is a special kind of window, because you cannot leave
--- a/runtime/doc/debug.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/debug.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*debug.txt*     For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Dec 22
+*debug.txt*     For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Feb 11


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ For debugging Vim scripts, functions, etc. see |debug-scripts|

 ==============================================================================

-1. Location of a crash, using gcc and gdb		*debug-gcc*
+1. Location of a crash, using gcc and gdb		*debug-gcc* *gdb*

 When Vim crashes in one of the test files, and you are using gcc for
 compilation, here is what you can do to find out exactly where Vim crashes.
--- a/runtime/doc/develop.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/develop.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*develop.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2008 Dec 17
+*develop.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2013 Apr 27


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -20,6 +20,7 @@ code.
 Vim is open source software.  Everybody is encouraged to contribute to help
 improving Vim.  For sending patches a context diff "diff -c" is preferred.
 Also see http://www.vim.org/tips/tip.php?tip_id=618.
+Also see http://vim.wikia.com/wiki/How_to_make_and_submit_a_patch.

 ==============================================================================
 1. Design goals						*design-goals*
@@ -232,6 +233,17 @@ time		shadows global declaration
 new		C++ reserved keyword
 try		Borland C++ doesn't like it to be used as a variable.

+clear		Mac curses.h
+echo		Mac curses.h
+instr		Mac curses.h
+meta		Mac curses.h
+newwin		Mac curses.h
+nl		Mac curses.h
+overwrite	Mac curses.h
+refresh		Mac curses.h
+scroll		Mac curses.h
+typeahead	Mac curses.h
+
 basename()	GNU string function
 dirname()	GNU string function
 get_env_value()	Linux system function
--- a/runtime/doc/diff.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/diff.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*diff.txt*      For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Apr 14
+*diff.txt*      For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Sep 05


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -86,16 +86,16 @@ diff mode.  You could use a construct like this: >
 While already in Vim you can start diff mode in three ways.

 							*E98*
-:diffsplit {filename}					*:diffs* *:diffsplit*
+:diffs[plit] {filename}					*:diffs* *:diffsplit*
 		Open a new window on the file {filename}.  The options are set
 		as for "vimdiff" for the current and the newly opened window.
 		Also see 'diffexpr'.

 							*:difft* *:diffthis*
-:diffthis	Make the current window part of the diff windows.  This sets
+:difft[his]	Make the current window part of the diff windows.  This sets
 		the options like for "vimdiff".

-:diffpatch {patchfile}				 *E816* *:diffp* *:diffpatch*
+:diffp[atch] {patchfile}				 *E816* *:diffp* *:diffpatch*
 		Use the current buffer, patch it with the diff found in
 		{patchfile} and open a buffer on the result.  The options are
 		set as for "vimdiff".
@@ -123,9 +123,9 @@ Since the option values are remembered with the buffer, you can edit another
 file for a moment and come back to the same file and be in diff mode again.

 							*:diffo* *:diffoff*
-:diffoff	Switch off diff mode for the current window.
+:diffo[ff]	Switch off diff mode for the current window.

-:diffoff!	Switch off diff mode for the current window and in all windows
+:diffo[ff]!	Switch off diff mode for the current window and in all windows
 		in the current tab page where 'diff' is set.

 The ":diffoff" command resets the relevant options to their default value.
@@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ buffer.  If you don't want a buffer to remain used for the diff do ":set
 nodiff" before hiding it.

 							*:diffu* *:diffupdate*
-:diffu[pdate]			Update the diff highlighting and folds.
+:diffu[pdate][!]		Update the diff highlighting and folds.

 Vim attempts to keep the differences updated when you make changes to the
 text.  This mostly takes care of inserted and deleted lines.  Changes within a
@@ -187,6 +187,9 @@ To force the differences to be updated use: >

 	:diffupdate

+If the ! is included Vim will check if the file was changed externally and
+needs to be reloaded.  It will prompt for each changed file, like `:checktime`
+was used.

 Vim will show filler lines for lines that are missing in one window but are
 present in another.  These lines were inserted in another file or deleted in
@@ -217,7 +220,7 @@ The diffs are highlighted with these groups:
 				that parts in the middle that are still the
 				same are highlighted anyway.  Only "iwhite" of
 				'diffopt' is used here.
-|hl-DiffDelete| DiffDelete	Deleted lines.  Also called filler lines,
+|hl-DiffDelete|	DiffDelete	Deleted lines.  Also called filler lines,
 				because they don't really exist in this
 				buffer.

@@ -330,7 +333,7 @@ diff.  This example explains the format that Vim expects: >

 The "1a2" item appends the line "bbb".
 The "4d4" item deletes the line "111".
-The '7c7" item replaces the line "GGG" with "ggg".
+The "7c7" item replaces the line "GGG" with "ggg".

 When 'diffexpr' is not empty, Vim evaluates it to obtain a diff file in the
 format mentioned.  These variables are set to the file names used:
--- a/runtime/doc/editing.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/editing.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*editing.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Feb 26
+*editing.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2013 Feb 07


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -377,8 +377,9 @@ command that accepts more than one file name (like ":next file1 file2")
 embedded spaces must be escaped with a backslash.

 						*wildcard* *wildcards*
-Wildcards in {file} are expanded.  Which wildcards are supported depends on
-the system.  These are the common ones:
+Wildcards in {file} are expanded, but as with file completion, 'wildignore'
+and 'suffixes' apply.  Which wildcards are supported depends on the system.
+These are the common ones:
 	?	matches one character
 	*	matches anything, including nothing
 	**	matches anything, including nothing, recurses into directories
@@ -392,7 +393,7 @@ is to use "path\[[]abc]".  Then the file "path[abc]" literally.
 					*starstar-wildcard*
 Expanding "**" is possible on Unix, Win32, Mac OS/X and a few other systems.
 This allows searching a directory tree.  This goes up to 100 directories deep.
-Note there are some commands where this works slightly different, see
+Note there are some commands where this works slightly differently, see
 |file-searching|.
 Example: >
 	:n **/*.txt
@@ -422,9 +423,11 @@ You can have the backticks expanded as a Vim expression, instead of an
 external command, by using the syntax `={expr}` e.g.: >
 	:e `=tempname()`
 The expression can contain just about anything, thus this can also be used to
-avoid the special meaning of '"', '|', '%' and '#'.  Names are to be separated
-with line breaks.  When the result is a |List| then each item is used as a
-name.  Line breaks also separate names.
+avoid the special meaning of '"', '|', '%' and '#'.  However, 'wildignore'
+does apply like to other wildcards.
+If the expression returns a string then names are to be separated with line
+breaks.  When the result is a |List| then each item is used as a name.  Line
+breaks also separate names.

 							*++opt* *[++opt]*
 The [++opt] argument can be used to force the value of 'fileformat',
@@ -1066,6 +1069,7 @@ The names can be in upper- or lowercase.
 			If there are other tab pages and quitting the last
 			window in the current tab page the current tab page is
 			closed |tab-page|.
+			Triggers the |QuitPre| autocommand event.

 :conf[irm] q[uit]	Quit, but give prompt when changes have been made, or
 			the last file in the argument list has not been
@@ -1159,8 +1163,10 @@ MULTIPLE WINDOWS AND BUFFERS				*window-exit*
 							*:confirm* *:conf*
 :conf[irm] {command}	Execute {command}, and use a dialog when an
 			operation has to be confirmed.  Can be used on the
-			":q", ":qa" and ":w" commands (the latter to over-ride
-			a read-only setting).
+			|:q|, |:qa| and |:w| commands (the latter to override
+			a read-only setting), and any other command that can
+			fail in such a way, such as |:only|, |:buffer|,
+			|:bdelete|, etc.

 Examples: >
  :confirm w foo
@@ -1213,13 +1219,13 @@ For versions of Vim where browsing is not supported, the command is executed
 unmodified.

 							*browsefilter*
-For MS Windows, you can modify the filters that are used in the browse dialog.
-By setting the g:browsefilter or b:browsefilter variables, you can change the
-filters globally or locally to the buffer.  The variable is set to a string in
-the format "{filter label}\t{pattern};{pattern}\n" where {filter label} is the
-text that appears in the "Files of Type" comboBox, and {pattern} is the
-pattern which filters the filenames.  Several patterns can be given, separated
-by ';'.
+For MS Windows and GTK, you can modify the filters that are used in the browse
+dialog.  By setting the g:browsefilter or b:browsefilter variables, you can
+change the filters globally or locally to the buffer.  The variable is set to
+a string in the format "{filter label}\t{pattern};{pattern}\n" where {filter
+label} is the text that appears in the "Files of Type" comboBox, and {pattern}
+is the pattern which filters the filenames.  Several patterns can be given,
+separated by ';'.

 For Motif the same format is used, but only the very first pattern is actually
 used (Motif only offers one pattern, but you can edit it).
@@ -1227,7 +1233,7 @@ used (Motif only offers one pattern, but you can edit it).
 For example, to have only Vim files in the dialog, you could use the following
 command: >

-     let g:browsefilter="Vim Scripts\t*.vim\nVim Startup Files\t*vimrc\n"
+     let g:browsefilter = "Vim Scripts\t*.vim\nVim Startup Files\t*vimrc\n"

 You can override the filter setting on a per-buffer basis by setting the
 b:browsefilter variable.  You would most likely set b:browsefilter in a
@@ -1237,6 +1243,13 @@ difficult to start editing a file of a different type.  To overcome this, you
 may want to add "All Files\t*.*\n" as the final filter, so that the user can
 still access any desired file.

+To avoid setting browsefilter when Vim does not actually support it, you can
+use has("browsefilter"): >
+
+	if has("browsefilter")
+	   let g:browsefilter = "whatever"
+	endif
+
 ==============================================================================
 7. The current directory				*current-directory*

@@ -1639,6 +1652,6 @@ There are three different types of searching:

   Note that completion for ":find", ":sfind", and ":tabfind" commands do not
   currently work with 'path' items that contain a url or use the double star
-   (/usr/**2) or upward search (;) notations. >
+   with depth limiter (/usr/**2) or upward search (;) notations.

 vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:
--- a/runtime/doc/eval.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/eval.txt
--- a/runtime/doc/evim-fr.1
+++ b/runtime/doc/evim-fr.1
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.TH EVIM 1 "16 f<>vrier 2002 February 16"
+.TH EVIM 1 "16 f<>vrier 2002"
 .SH NAME
 evim \- <20> Easy Vim <20>, <20>dite un fichier avec Vim sans utiliser les modes
 .SH SYNOPSIS
@@ -54,3 +54,4 @@ Voir le menu Aide/Remerciements ou ":help credits" dans
 .SH TRADUCTION
 Cette page de manuel a <20>t<EFBFBD> traduite David Blanchet.
 <david.blanchet@free.fr> 2005-03-26.
+Mise <20> jour 2013-05-10, Dominique Pell<6C> <dominique.pelle@gmail.com>
--- a/runtime/doc/evim-fr.UTF-8.1
+++ b/runtime/doc/evim-fr.UTF-8.1
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.TH EVIM 1 "16 février 2002 February 16"
+.TH EVIM 1 "16 février 2002"
 .SH NAME
 evim \- « Easy Vim », édite un fichier avec Vim sans utiliser les modes
 .SH SYNOPSIS
@@ -54,3 +54,4 @@ Voir le menu Aide/Remerciements ou ":help credits" dans
 .SH TRADUCTION
 Cette page de manuel a été traduite David Blanchet.
 <david.blanchet@free.fr> 2005-03-26.
+Mise à jour 2013-05-10, Dominique Pellé <dominique.pelle@gmail.com>
--- a/runtime/doc/filetype.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/filetype.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*filetype.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Jun 19
+*filetype.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2013 May 25


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -603,7 +603,7 @@ Since the text for this plugin is rather long it has been put in a separate
 file: |ft_sql.txt|.


-TEX							*ft-tex-plugin*
+TEX						*ft-tex-plugin* *g:tex_flavor*

 If the first line of a *.tex file has the form >
 	%&<format>
--- a/runtime/doc/ft_sql.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/ft_sql.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*ft_sql.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Jul 20
+*ft_sql.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2013 May 15

 by David Fishburn

@@ -349,6 +349,7 @@ may not work properly on all platforms: >
 The static maps (which are based on the syntax highlight groups) follow this
 format: >
    imap <buffer> <C-C>k <C-\><C-O>:call sqlcomplete#Map('sqlKeyword')<CR><C-X><C-O>
+    imap <buffer> <C-C>k <C-\><C-O>:call sqlcomplete#Map('sqlKeyword\w*')<CR><C-X><C-O>

 This command breaks down as: >
    imap		   - Create an insert map
@@ -369,6 +370,9 @@ This command breaks down as: >
 			     command while editing a SQL file.
    'sqlKeyword'	   - Display the items for the sqlKeyword highlight
 			     group
+    'sqlKeyword\w*'	   - A second option available with Vim 7.4 which
+                             uses a regular expression to determine which
+			     syntax groups to use
    )<CR>		   - Execute the :let command
    <C-X><C-O>		   - Trigger the standard omni completion key stroke.
 			     Passing in 'sqlKeyword' instructs the SQL
@@ -435,7 +439,7 @@ the space bar):
 			     of columns, you can press <Left>, this will
 			     replace the column list with the list of tables.
 			   - This allows you to quickly drill down into a
-			     table to view it's columns and back again.
+			     table to view its columns and back again.
 			   - <Right> and <Left> can be also be chosen via
 			     your |.vimrc| >
                                let g:ftplugin_sql_omni_key_right = '<Right>'
@@ -645,7 +649,7 @@ your |vimrc|: >
 	- When completing tables, procedure or views and using dbext.vim 3.00
 	  or higher the list of objects will also include the owner name.
 	  When completing these objects and omni_sql_include_owner is enabled
-	  the owner name will be be replaced. >
+	  the owner name will be replaced. >

    omni_sql_precache_syntax_groups
 <	- Default:
--- a/runtime/doc/gui.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/gui.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*gui.txt*       For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Nov 03
+*gui.txt*       For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2013 Jun 12


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -93,10 +93,16 @@ and initialize other things that you may want to set up differently from the
 terminal version.

 Recommended place for your personal GUI initializations:
-	Unix		    $HOME/.gvimrc
-	OS/2		    $HOME/.gvimrc or $VIM/.gvimrc
-	MS-DOS and Win32    $HOME/_gvimrc or $VIM/_gvimrc
-	Amiga		    s:.gvimrc or $VIM/.gvimrc
+	Unix		    $HOME/.gvimrc or $HOME/.vim/gvimrc
+	OS/2		    $HOME/.gvimrc, $HOME/vimfiles/gvimrc
+			    or $VIM/.gvimrc
+	MS-DOS and Win32    $HOME/_gvimrc, $HOME/vimfiles/gvimrc
+			    or $VIM/_gvimrc
+	Amiga		    s:.gvimrc, home:.gvimrc, home:vimfiles:gvimrc
+			    or $VIM/.gvimrc
+
+The personal initialization files are searched in the order specified above
+and only the first one that is found is read.

 There are a number of options which only have meaning in the GUI version of
 Vim.  These are 'guicursor', 'guifont', 'guipty' and 'guioptions'.  They are
@@ -147,6 +153,15 @@ task bar with the 'guiheadroom' option.
 If you are running the X Window System, you can get information about the
 window Vim is running in with this command: >
 	:!xwininfo -id $WINDOWID
+<
+							*gui-IME* *iBus*
+Input methods for international characters in X that rely on the XIM
+framework, most notably iBus, have been known to produce undesirable results
+in gVim. These may include an inability to enter spaces, or long delays
+between typing a character and it being recognized by the application.
+
+One workaround that has been successful, for unknown reasons, is to prevent
+gvim from forking into the background by starting it with the |-f| argument.

 ==============================================================================
 2. Scrollbars						*gui-scrollbars*
--- a/runtime/doc/gui_w16.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/gui_w16.txt
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ Vim's Graphical User Interface				*gui-w16* *win16-gui*

 Other relevant documentation:
 |gui.txt|	For generic items of the GUI.
-|os_msdos.txt|  For items common to DOS and Windows.
+|os_msdos.txt|	For items common to DOS and Windows.
 |gui_w32.txt|	Some items here are also applicable to the Win16 version.

 {Vi does not have a Windows GUI}
--- a/runtime/doc/gui_w32.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/gui_w32.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*gui_w32.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Dec 19
+*gui_w32.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Aug 04


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ Vim's Win32 Graphical User Interface			*gui-w32* *win32-gui*

 Other relevant documentation:
 |gui.txt|	For generic items of the GUI.
-|os_win32.txt|  For Win32 specific items.
+|os_win32.txt| 	For Win32 specific items.

 {Vi does not have a Windows GUI}

@@ -137,6 +137,9 @@ options:
 And if there already is a gvim running:
 "Edit with existing gvim"   -- edit the file with the running gvim

+The "edit with existing Vim" entries can be disabled by adding an entry in the
+registry under HKLM\Software\Vim\Gvim, named DisableEditWithExisting, and with
+any value.
 						*install-registry*
 You can add the "Edit with Vim" menu entry in an easy way by using the
 "install.exe" program.  It will add several registry entries for you.
@@ -486,4 +489,16 @@ to:
 And add gvim to the list of applications.  This problem only appears to happen
 with the Intellimouse driver 2.2 and when "Universal Scrolling" is turned on.

+
+XPM support						*w32-xpm-support*
+
+Gvim can be build on MS-Windows with support for XPM files.  |+xpm_w32|
+See the Make_mvc.mak file for instructions, search for XPM.
+
+To try out if XPM support works do this: >
+	:help
+	:exe 'sign define vimxpm icon=' . $VIMRUNTIME . '\\vim16x16.xpm'
+	:exe 'sign place 1 line=1 name=vimxpm file=' . expand('%:p')
+<
+
 vim:tw=78:sw=4:ts=8:ft=help:norl:
--- a/runtime/doc/gui_x11.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/gui_x11.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*gui_x11.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Jul 20
+*gui_x11.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Sep 14


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -53,6 +53,8 @@ When using "gvim -f" and then ":gui", Vim will run in the foreground.  The
 ":gui -b".

 "gvim --nofork" does the same as "gvim -f".
+								*E851* *E852*
+When starting the GUI fails Vim will try to continue running in the terminal.

 If you want the GUI to run in the foreground always, include the 'f'
 flag in 'guioptions'.  |-f|.
--- a/runtime/doc/hebrew.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/hebrew.txt
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Details
      This is also the keymap when 'keymap=hebrew' is set.  The advantage of
      'keymap' is that it works properly when using UTF8, e.g. it inserts the
      correct characters; 'hkmap' does not.  The 'keymap' keyboard can also
-      insert niqud and te`amim.  To see what those mappings are,look at the
+      insert niqud and te`amim.  To see what those mappings are, look at the
      keymap file 'hebrew.vim' etc.


--- a/runtime/doc/help.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/help.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*help.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Jul 20
+*help.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Dec 06

 			VIM - main help file
 									 k
@@ -195,12 +195,12 @@ Remarks about specific systems ~
 						*standard-plugin-list*
 Standard plugins ~
 |pi_getscript.txt| Downloading latest version of Vim scripts
-|pi_gzip.txt|	   Reading and writing compressed files
-|pi_netrw.txt|	   Reading and writing files over a network
-|pi_paren.txt|	   Highlight matching parens
-|pi_tar.txt|	   Tar file explorer
+|pi_gzip.txt|      Reading and writing compressed files
+|pi_netrw.txt|     Reading and writing files over a network
+|pi_paren.txt|     Highlight matching parens
+|pi_tar.txt|       Tar file explorer
 |pi_vimball.txt|   Create a self-installing Vim script
-|pi_zip.txt|	   Zip archive explorer
+|pi_zip.txt|       Zip archive explorer

 LOCAL ADDITIONS:				*local-additions*

--- a/runtime/doc/helphelp.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/helphelp.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*helphelp.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Sep 14
+*helphelp.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Nov 28


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -194,11 +194,12 @@ command: >
 				*E154* *E150* *E151* *E152* *E153* *E670*
 :helpt[ags] [++t] {dir}
 			Generate the help tags file(s) for directory {dir}.
-			All "*.txt" and "*.??x" files in the directory are
-			scanned for a help tag definition in between stars.
-			The "*.??x" files are for translated docs, they
-			generate the "tags-??" file, see |help-translated|.
-			The generated tags files are sorted.
+			All "*.txt" and "*.??x" files in the directory and
+			sub-directories are scanned for a help tag definition
+			in between stars.  The "*.??x" files are for
+			translated docs, they generate the "tags-??" file, see
+			|help-translated|.  The generated tags files are
+			sorted.
 			When there are duplicates an error message is given.
 			An existing tags file is silently overwritten.
 			The optional "++t" argument forces adding the
@@ -218,11 +219,12 @@ files.  Vim will search for all help in "doc" directories in 'runtimepath'.
 This is only available when compiled with the |+multi_lang| feature.

 At this moment translations are available for:
-	Chinese - multiple authors
-	French  - translated by David Blanchet
-	Italian - translated by Antonio Colombo
-	Polish  - translated by Mikolaj Machowski
-	Russian - translated by Vassily Ragosin
+	Chinese  - multiple authors
+	French   - translated by David Blanchet
+	Italian  - translated by Antonio Colombo
+	Japanese - multiple authors
+	Polish   - translated by Mikolaj Machowski
+	Russian  - translated by Vassily Ragosin
 See the Vim website to find them: http://www.vim.org/translations.php

 A set of translated help files consists of these files:
--- a/runtime/doc/if_lua.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/if_lua.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_lua.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Jul 22
+*if_lua.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Jun 29


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Luis Carvalho
@@ -8,8 +8,12 @@ The Lua Interface to Vim				*lua* *Lua*

 1. Commands			|lua-commands|
 2. The vim module		|lua-vim|
-3. Buffer userdata		|lua-buffer|
-4. Window userdata		|lua-window|
+3. List userdata		|lua-list|
+4. Dict userdata		|lua-dict|
+5. Funcref userdata		|lua-funcref|
+6. Buffer userdata		|lua-buffer|
+7. Window userdata		|lua-window|
+8. The luaeval function		|lua-luaeval|

 {Vi does not have any of these commands}

@@ -56,13 +60,14 @@ Example:
 <

 							*:luado*
-:[range]luado {body}	Execute Lua function "function (line) {body} end" for
-			each line in the [range], with the function argument
-			being set to the text of each line in turn, without a
-			trailing <EOL>. If the value returned by the function
-			is a string it becomes the text of the line in the
-			current turn. The default for [range] is the whole
-			file: "1,$".		      {not in Vi}
+:[range]luado {body}	Execute Lua function "function (line, linenr) {body}
+			end" for each line in the [range], with the function
+			argument being set to the text of each line in turn,
+			without a trailing <EOL>, and the current line number.
+			If the value returned by the function is a string it
+			becomes the text of the line in the current turn. The
+			default for [range] is the whole file: "1,$".
+							{not in Vi}

 Examples:
 >
@@ -88,11 +93,9 @@ Examples:
 All these commands execute a Lua chunk from either the command line (:lua and
 :luado) or a file (:luafile) with the given line [range]. Similarly to the Lua
 interpreter, each chunk has its own scope and so only global variables are
-shared between command calls. Lua default libraries "table", "string", "math",
-and "package" are available, "io" and "debug" are not, and "os" is restricted
-to functions "date", "clock", "time", "difftime", and "getenv". In addition,
-Lua "print" function has its output redirected to the Vim message area, with
-arguments separated by a white space instead of a tab.
+shared between command calls. All Lua default libraries are available. In
+addition, Lua "print" function has its output redirected to the Vim message
+area, with arguments separated by a white space instead of a tab.

 Lua uses the "vim" module (see |lua-vim|) to issue commands to Vim
 and manage buffers (|lua-buffer|) and windows (|lua-window|). However,
@@ -108,9 +111,31 @@ input range are stored in "vim.firstline" and "vim.lastline" respectively. The
 module also includes routines for buffer, window, and current line queries,
 Vim evaluation and command execution, and others.

-	vim.isbuffer(value)	Returns 'true' (boolean, not string) if
-				"value" is a buffer userdata and 'false'
-				otherwise (see |lua-buffer|).
+	vim.list([arg])		Returns an empty list or, if "arg" is a Lua
+				table with numeric keys 1, ..., n (a
+				"sequence"), returns a list l such that l[i] =
+				arg[i] for i = 1, ..., n (see |List|).
+				Non-numeric keys are not used to initialize
+				the list. See also |lua-eval| for conversion
+				rules. Example: >
+					:lua t = {math.pi, false, say = 'hi'}
+					:echo luaeval('vim.list(t)')
+					:" [3.141593, 0], 'say' is ignored
+<
+	vim.dict([arg])		Returns an empty dictionary or, if "arg" is a
+				Lua table, returns a dict d such that d[k] =
+				arg[k] for all string keys k in "arg" (see
+				|Dictionary|). Number keys are converted to
+				strings. Keys that are not strings are not
+				used to initialize the dictionary. See also
+				|lua-eval| for conversion rules. Example: >
+					:lua t = {math.pi, false, say = 'hi'}
+					:echo luaeval('vim.dict(t)')
+					:" {'say': 'hi'}, numeric keys ignored
+<
+	vim.funcref({name})	Returns a Funcref to function {name} (see
+				|Funcref|). It is equivalent to Vim's
+				"function".

 	vim.buffer([arg])	If "arg" is a number, returns buffer with
 				number "arg" in the buffer list or, if "arg"
@@ -121,16 +146,21 @@ Vim evaluation and command execution, and others.
 				'true' returns the first buffer in the buffer
 				list or else the current buffer.

-	vim.iswindow(value)	Returns 'true' (boolean, not string) if
-				"value" is a window userdata and
-				'false' otherwise (see |lua-window|).
-
 	vim.window([arg])	If "arg" is a number, returns window with
 				number "arg" or 'nil' (nil value, not string)
 				if not found. Otherwise, if "toboolean(arg)"
 				is 'true' returns the first window or else the
 				current window.

+	vim.type({arg})		Returns the type of {arg}. It is equivalent to
+				Lua's "type" function, but returns "list",
+				"dict", "funcref", "buffer", or "window" if
+				{arg} is a list, dictionary, funcref, buffer,
+				or window, respectively. Examples: >
+					:lua l = vim.list()
+					:lua print(type(l), vim.type(l))
+					:" userdata list
+<
 	vim.command({cmd})	Executes the vim (ex-mode) command {cmd}.
 				Examples: >
 					:lua vim.command"set tw=60"
@@ -141,7 +171,7 @@ Vim evaluation and command execution, and others.
 				Vim strings and numbers are directly converted
 				to Lua strings and numbers respectively. Vim
 				lists and dictionaries are converted to Lua
-				tables (lists become integer-keyed tables).
+				userdata (see |lua-list| and |lua-dict|).
 				Examples: >
 					:lua tw = vim.eval"&tw"
 					:lua print(vim.eval"{'a': 'one'}".a)
@@ -157,7 +187,105 @@ Vim evaluation and command execution, and others.


 ==============================================================================
-3. Buffer userdata					*lua-buffer*
+3. List userdata					*lua-list*
+
+List userdata represent vim lists, and the interface tries to follow closely
+Vim's syntax for lists. Since lists are objects, changes in list references in
+Lua are reflected in Vim and vice-versa. A list "l" has the following
+properties and methods:
+
+Properties
+----------
+	o "#l" is the number of items in list "l", equivalent to "len(l)"
+	    in Vim.
+	o "l[k]" returns the k-th item in "l"; "l" is zero-indexed, as in Vim.
+	    To modify the k-th item, simply do "l[k] = newitem"; in
+	    particular, "l[k] = nil" removes the k-th item from "l".
+	o "l()" returns an iterator for "l".
+
+Methods
+-------
+	o "l:add(item)" appends "item" to the end of "l".
+	o "l:insert(item[, pos])" inserts "item" at (optional)
+	    position "pos" in the list. The default value for "pos" is 0.
+
+Examples:
+>
+	:let l = [1, 'item']
+	:lua l = vim.eval('l') -- same 'l'
+	:lua l:add(vim.list())
+	:lua l[0] = math.pi
+	:echo l[0] " 3.141593
+	:lua l[0] = nil -- remove first item
+	:lua l:insert(true, 1)
+	:lua print(l, #l, l[0], l[1], l[-1])
+	:lua for item in l() do print(item) end
+<
+
+==============================================================================
+4. Dict userdata					*lua-dict*
+
+Similarly to list userdata, dict userdata represent vim dictionaries; since
+dictionaries are also objects, references are kept between Lua and Vim. A dict
+"d" has the following properties:
+
+Properties
+----------
+	o "#d" is the number of items in dict "d", equivalent to "len(d)"
+	    in Vim.
+	o "d.key" or "d['key']" returns the value at entry "key" in "d".
+	    To modify the entry at this key, simply do "d.key = newvalue"; in
+	    particular, "d.key = nil" removes the entry from "d".
+	o "d()" returns an iterator for "d" and is equivalent to "items(d)" in
+	    Vim.
+
+Examples:
+>
+	:let d = {'n':10}
+	:lua d = vim.eval('d') -- same 'd'
+	:lua print(d, d.n, #d)
+	:let d.self = d
+	:lua for k, v in d() do print(d, k, v) end
+	:lua d.x = math.pi
+	:lua d.self = nil -- remove entry
+	:echo d
+<
+
+==============================================================================
+5. Funcref userdata					*lua-funcref*
+
+Funcref userdata represent funcref variables in Vim. Funcrefs that were
+defined with a "dict" attribute need to be obtained as a dictionary key
+in order to have "self" properly assigned to the dictionary (see examples
+below.) A funcref "f" has the following properties:
+
+Properties
+----------
+	o "#f" is the name of the function referenced by "f"
+	o "f(...)" calls the function referenced by "f" (with arguments)
+
+Examples:
+>
+	:function I(x)
+	:  return a:x
+	:  endfunction
+	:let R = function('I')
+	:lua i1 = vim.funcref('I')
+	:lua i2 = vim.eval('R')
+	:lua print(#i1, #i2) -- both 'I'
+	:lua print(i1, i2, #i2(i1) == #i1(i2))
+	:function Mylen() dict
+	:  return len(self.data)
+	:  endfunction
+	:let mydict = {'data': [0, 1, 2, 3]}
+	:lua d = vim.eval('mydict'); d.len = vim.funcref('Mylen')
+	:echo mydict.len()
+	:lua l = d.len -- assign d as 'self'
+	:lua print(l())
+<
+
+==============================================================================
+6. Buffer userdata					*lua-buffer*

 Buffer userdata represent vim buffers. A buffer userdata "b" has the following
 properties and methods:
@@ -209,7 +337,7 @@ Examples:
 <

 ==============================================================================
-4. Window userdata					*lua-window*
+7. Window userdata					*lua-window*

 Window objects represent vim windows. A window userdata "w" has the following
 properties and methods:
@@ -241,4 +369,35 @@ Examples:
 <

 ==============================================================================
- vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:
+8. The luaeval function					*lua-luaeval* *lua-eval*
+
+The (dual) equivalent of "vim.eval" for passing Lua values to Vim is
+"luaeval". "luaeval" takes an expression string and an optional argument and
+returns the result of the expression. It is semantically equivalent in Lua to:
+>
+	local chunkheader = "local _A = select(1, ...) return "
+	function luaeval (expstr, arg)
+	    local chunk = assert(loadstring(chunkheader .. expstr, "luaeval"))
+	    return chunk(arg) -- return typval
+	end
+<
+Note that "_A" receives the argument to "luaeval". Lua numbers, strings, and
+list, dict, and funcref userdata are converted to their Vim respective types,
+while Lua booleans are converted to numbers. An error is thrown if conversion
+of any of the remaining Lua types, including userdata other than lists, dicts,
+and funcrefs, is attempted.
+
+Examples: >
+
+	:echo luaeval('math.pi')
+	:lua a = vim.list():add('newlist')
+	:let a = luaeval('a')
+	:echo a[0] " 'newlist'
+	:function Rand(x,y) " random uniform between x and y
+	:  return luaeval('(_A.y-_A.x)*math.random()+_A.x', {'x':a:x,'y':a:y})
+	:  endfunction
+	:echo Rand(1,10)
+
+
+==============================================================================
+ vim:tw=78:ts=8:noet:ft=help:norl:
--- a/runtime/doc/if_mzsch.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/if_mzsch.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_mzsch.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Feb 11
+*if_mzsch.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Dec 17


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Sergey Khorev
@@ -11,7 +11,8 @@ The MzScheme Interface to Vim				*mzscheme* *MzScheme*
 3. Threads				|mzscheme-threads|
 4. Vim access from MzScheme		|mzscheme-vim|
 5. mzeval() Vim function		|mzscheme-mzeval|
-6. Dynamic loading			|mzscheme-dynamic|
+6. Using Function references		|mzscheme-funcref|
+7. Dynamic loading			|mzscheme-dynamic|

 {Vi does not have any of these commands}

@@ -21,10 +22,17 @@ The MzScheme interface is available only if Vim was compiled with the
 Based on the work of Brent Fulgham.
 Dynamic loading added by Sergey Khorev

-For downloading MzScheme and other info:
-	http://www.plt-scheme.org/software/mzscheme/
+MzScheme and PLT Scheme names have been rebranded as Racket. For more
+information please check http://racket-lang.org

-Note: On FreeBSD you should use the "drscheme" port.
+Futures and places of Racket version 5.x up to and including 5.3.1 do not
+work correctly with processes created by Vim.
+The simplest solution is to build Racket on your own with these features
+disabled: >
+  ./configure --disable-futures --disable-places --prefix=your-install-prefix
+
+To speed up the process, you might also want to use --disable-gracket and
+--disable-docs

 ==============================================================================
 1. Commands						*mzscheme-commands*
@@ -155,8 +163,11 @@ Common
    (eval {expr-string})	    Evaluate the vim expression into
 				    respective MzScheme object: |Lists| are
 				    represented as Scheme lists,
-				    |Dictionaries| as hash tables.
-				    NOTE the name clashes with MzScheme eval
+				    |Dictionaries| as hash tables,
+				    |Funcref|s as functions (see also
+				    |mzscheme-funcref|)
+				    NOTE the name clashes with MzScheme eval,
+				    use module qualifiers to overcome this.
    (range-start)		    Start/End of the range passed with
    (range-end)			    the Scheme command.
    (beep)			    beep
@@ -237,7 +248,23 @@ To facilitate bi-directional interface, you can use |mzeval()| function to
 evaluate MzScheme expressions and pass their values to VimL.

 ==============================================================================
-6. Dynamic loading				    *mzscheme-dynamic* *E815*
+6. Using Function references				    *mzscheme-funcref*
+
+MzScheme interface allows use of |Funcref|s so you can call Vim functions
+directly from Scheme. For instance: >
+    function! MyAdd2(arg)
+	return a:arg + 2
+    endfunction
+    mz (define f2 (vim-eval "function(\"MyAdd2\")"))
+    mz (f2 7)
+< or : >
+    :mz (define indent (vim-eval "function('indent')"))
+    " return Vim indent for line 12
+    :mz (indent 12)
+<
+
+==============================================================================
+7. Dynamic loading				    *mzscheme-dynamic* *E815*

 On MS-Windows the MzScheme libraries can be loaded dynamically. The |:version|
 output then includes |+mzscheme/dyn|.
--- a/runtime/doc/if_perl.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/if_perl.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_perl.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Jul 21
+*if_perl.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Oct 25


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Sven Verdoolaege
@@ -44,15 +44,17 @@ The Perl patches for Vim were made by:
 	Sven Verdoolaege <skimo@breughel.ufsia.ac.be>
 	Matt Gerassimof

-Perl for MS-Windows can be found at:
-http://www.perl.com/CPAN/ports/nt/Standard/x86/
+Perl for MS-Windows can be found at: http://www.perl.com/
+The ActiveState one should work.

 ==============================================================================
 3. Using the Perl interface				*perl-using*

 							*:perl* *:pe*
 :pe[rl] {cmd}		Execute Perl command {cmd}.  The current package
-			is "main".
+			is "main".  Simple example to test if `:perl` is
+			working: >
+				:perl VIM::Msg("Hello")

 :pe[rl] << {endpattern}
 {script}
@@ -173,7 +175,8 @@ VIM::Windows([{wn}...])	With no arguments, returns a list of all the windows
 VIM::DoCommand({cmd})	Executes Ex command {cmd}.

 							*perl-Eval*
-VIM::Eval({expr})	Evaluates {expr} and returns (success, val).
+VIM::Eval({expr})	Evaluates {expr} and returns (success, value) in list 
+			context or just value in scalar context.
 			success=1 indicates that val contains the value of
 			{expr}; success=0 indicates a failure to evaluate
 			the expression.  '@x' returns the contents of register
--- a/runtime/doc/if_pyth.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/if_pyth.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_pyth.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 May 07
+*if_pyth.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2013 Jun 28


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Paul Moore
@@ -6,13 +6,16 @@

 The Python Interface to Vim				*python* *Python*

-1. Commands			|python-commands|
-2. The vim module		|python-vim|
-3. Buffer objects		|python-buffer|
-4. Range objects		|python-range|
-5. Window objects		|python-window|
-6. Dynamic loading		|python-dynamic|
-7. Python 3			|python3|
+1. Commands					|python-commands|
+2. The vim module				|python-vim|
+3. Buffer objects				|python-buffer|
+4. Range objects				|python-range|
+5. Window objects				|python-window|
+6. Tab page objects				|python-tabpage|
+7. vim.bindeval objects				|python-bindeval-objects|
+8. pyeval(), py3eval() Vim functions		|python-pyeval|
+9. Dynamic loading				|python-dynamic|
+10. Python 3					|python3|

 {Vi does not have any of these commands}

@@ -26,7 +29,9 @@ The Python 3 interface is available only when Vim was compiled with the

 					*:python* *:py* *E205* *E263* *E264*
 :[range]py[thon] {stmt}
-			Execute Python statement {stmt}.
+			Execute Python statement {stmt}.  A simple check if
+			the `:python` command is working: >
+				:python print "Hello"

 :[range]py[thon] << {endmarker}
 {script}
@@ -51,9 +56,25 @@ Example: >
 	EOF
 	endfunction
 <
-Note: Python is very sensitive to the indenting.  Also make sure the "class"
-line and "EOF" do not have any indent.
+Note: Python is very sensitive to the indenting.  Make sure the "class" line
+and "EOF" do not have any indent.

+							*:pydo*
+:[range]pydo {body}	Execute Python function "def _vim_pydo(line, linenr):
+			{body}" for each line in the [range], with the
+			function arguments being set to the text of each line
+			in turn, without a trailing <EOL>, and the current
+			line number. The function should return a string or
+			None. If a string is returned, it becomes the text of
+			the line in the current turn. The default for [range]
+			is the whole file: "1,$".
+			{not in Vi}
+
+Examples:
+>
+	:pydo return "%s\t%d" % (line[::-1], len(line))
+	:pydo if line: return "%4d: %s" % (linenr, line)
+<
 							*:pyfile* *:pyf*
 :[range]pyf[ile] {file}
 			Execute the Python script in {file}.  The whole
@@ -150,7 +171,27 @@ vim.eval(str)						*python-eval*
 	[{'cmd': '/^eval_expr(arg, nextcmd)$/', 'static': 0, 'name':
 	'eval_expr', 'kind': 'f', 'filename': './src/eval.c'}]

+vim.bindeval(str)					*python-bindeval*
+	Like |python-eval|, but returns special objects described in 
+	|python-bindeval-objects|. These python objects let you modify (|List| 
+	or |Dictionary|) or call (|Funcref|) vim objects.

+vim.strwidth(str)					*python-strwidth*
+	Like |strwidth()|: returns number of display cells str occupies, tab 
+	is counted as one cell.
+
+vim.foreach_rtp(callable)				*python-foreach_rtp*
+	Call the given callable for each path in 'runtimepath' until either 
+	callable returns something but None, the exception is raised or there 
+	are no longer paths. If stopped in case callable returned non-None, 
+	vim.foreach_rtp function returns the value returned by callable.
+
+vim.chdir(*args, **kwargs)				*python-chdir*
+vim.fchdir(*args, **kwargs)				*python-fchdir*
+	Run os.chdir or os.fchdir, then all appropriate vim stuff.
+	Note: you should not use these functions directly, use os.chdir and 
+	      os.fchdir instead. Behavior of vim.fchdir is undefined in case 
+	      os.fchdir does not exist.

 Error object of the "vim" module

@@ -170,12 +211,12 @@ Constants of the "vim" module
 	to which the variables referred.

 vim.buffers						*python-buffers*
-	A sequence object providing access to the list of vim buffers.  The
+	A mapping object providing access to the list of vim buffers.  The
 	object supports the following operations: >
 	    :py b = vim.buffers[i]	# Indexing (read-only)
 	    :py b in vim.buffers	# Membership test
 	    :py n = len(vim.buffers)	# Number of elements
-	    :py for b in vim.buffers:	# Sequential access
+	    :py for b in vim.buffers:	# Iterating over buffer list
 <
 vim.windows						*python-windows*
 	A sequence object providing access to the list of vim windows.  The
@@ -184,13 +225,28 @@ vim.windows						*python-windows*
 	    :py w in vim.windows	# Membership test
 	    :py n = len(vim.windows)	# Number of elements
 	    :py for w in vim.windows:	# Sequential access
+<	Note: vim.windows object always accesses current tab page. 
+	|python-tabpage|.windows objects are bound to parent |python-tabpage| 
+	object and always use windows from that tab page (or throw vim.error 
+	in case tab page was deleted). You can keep a reference to both 
+	without keeping a reference to vim module object or |python-tabpage|, 
+	they will not lose their properties in this case.
+
+vim.tabpages						*python-tabpages*
+	A sequence object providing access to the list of vim tab pages. The 
+	object supports the following operations: >
+	    :py t = vim.tabpages[i]	# Indexing (read-only)
+	    :py t in vim.tabpages	# Membership test
+	    :py n = len(vim.tabpages)	# Number of elements
+	    :py for t in vim.tabpages:	# Sequential access
 <
 vim.current						*python-current*
 	An object providing access (via specific attributes) to various
 	"current" objects available in vim:
 		vim.current.line	The current line (RW)		String
-		vim.current.buffer	The current buffer (RO)		Buffer
-		vim.current.window	The current window (RO)		Window
+		vim.current.buffer	The current buffer (RW)		Buffer
+		vim.current.window	The current window (RW)		Window
+		vim.current.tabpage	The current tab page (RW)	TabPage
 		vim.current.range	The current line range (RO)	Range

 	The last case deserves a little explanation.  When the :python or
@@ -198,6 +254,42 @@ vim.current						*python-current*
 	"current range".  A range is a bit like a buffer, but with all access
 	restricted to a subset of lines.  See |python-range| for more details.

+	Note: When assigning to vim.current.{buffer,window,tabpage} it expects 
+	valid |python-buffer|, |python-window| or |python-tabpage| objects 
+	respectively. Assigning triggers normal (with |autocommand|s) 
+	switching to given buffer, window or tab page. It is the only way to 
+	switch UI objects in python: you can't assign to 
+	|python-tabpage|.window attribute. To switch without triggering 
+	autocommands use >
+	    py << EOF
+	    saved_eventignore = vim.options['eventignore']
+	    vim.options['eventignore'] = 'all'
+	    try:
+	        vim.current.buffer = vim.buffers[2] # Switch to buffer 2
+	    finally:
+	        vim.options['eventignore'] = saved_eventignore
+	    EOF
+<
+vim.vars						*python-vars*
+vim.vvars						*python-vvars*
+	Dictionary-like objects holding dictionaries with global (|g:|) and 
+	vim (|v:|) variables respectively. Identical to `vim.bindeval("g:")`, 
+	but faster.
+
+vim.options						*python-options*
+	Object partly supporting mapping protocol (supports setting and 
+	getting items) providing a read-write access to global options.
+	Note: unlike |:set| this provides access only to global options. You
+	cannot use this object to obtain or set local options' values or
+	access local-only options in any fashion. Raises KeyError if no global
+	option with such name exists (i.e. does not raise KeyError for
+	|global-local| options and global only options, but does for window-
+	and buffer-local ones).  Use |python-buffer| objects to access to
+	buffer-local options and |python-window| objects to access to
+	window-local options.
+
+	Type of this object is available via "Options" attribute of vim 
+	module.

 Output from Python					*python-output*
 	Vim displays all Python code output in the Vim message area.  Normal
@@ -214,6 +306,88 @@ Output from Python					*python-output*
 	supported, and may cause the program to crash.  This should probably be
 	fixed.

+		    *python2-directory* *python3-directory* *pythonx-directory*
+Python 'runtimepath' handling				*python-special-path*
+
+In python vim.VIM_SPECIAL_PATH special directory is used as a replacement for 
+the list of paths found in 'runtimepath': with this directory in sys.path and 
+vim.path_hooks in sys.path_hooks python will try to load module from 
+{rtp}/python2 (or python3) and {rtp}/pythonx (for both python versions) for 
+each {rtp} found in 'runtimepath'.
+
+Implementation is similar to the following, but written in C: >
+
+    from imp import find_module, load_module
+    import vim
+    import sys
+
+    class VimModuleLoader(object):
+        def __init__(self, module):
+            self.module = module
+
+        def load_module(self, fullname, path=None):
+            return self.module
+
+    def _find_module(fullname, oldtail, path):
+        idx = oldtail.find('.')
+        if idx > 0:
+            name = oldtail[:idx]
+            tail = oldtail[idx+1:]
+            fmr = find_module(name, path)
+            module = load_module(fullname[:-len(oldtail)] + name, *fmr)
+            return _find_module(fullname, tail, module.__path__)
+        else:
+            fmr = find_module(fullname, path)
+            return load_module(fullname, *fmr)
+
+    # It uses vim module itself in place of VimPathFinder class: it does not 
+    # matter for python which object has find_module function attached to as 
+    # an attribute.
+    class VimPathFinder(object):
+        @classmethod
+        def find_module(cls, fullname, path=None):
+            try:
+                return VimModuleLoader(_find_module(fullname, fullname, path or vim._get_paths()))
+            except ImportError:
+                return None
+
+        @classmethod
+        def load_module(cls, fullname, path=None):
+            return _find_module(fullname, fullname, path or vim._get_paths())
+
+    def hook(path):
+        if path == vim.VIM_SPECIAL_PATH:
+            return VimPathFinder
+        else:
+            raise ImportError
+
+    sys.path_hooks.append(hook)
+
+vim.VIM_SPECIAL_PATH					*python-VIM_SPECIAL_PATH*
+	String constant used in conjunction with vim path hook. If path hook 
+	installed by vim is requested to handle anything but path equal to 
+	vim.VIM_SPECIAL_PATH constant it raises ImportError. In the only other 
+	case it uses special loader.
+
+	Note: you must not use value of this constant directly, always use 
+	      vim.VIM_SPECIAL_PATH object.
+
+vim.find_module(...)					*python-find_module*
+vim.path_hook(path)					*python-path_hook*
+	Methods or objects used to implement path loading as described above. 
+	You should not be using any of these directly except for vim.path_hook 
+	in case you need to do something with sys.meta_path. It is not 
+	guaranteed that any of the objects will exist in the future vim 
+	versions.
+
+vim._get_paths						*python-_get_paths*
+	Methods returning a list of paths which will be searched for by path 
+	hook. You should not rely on this method being present in future 
+	versions, but can use it for debugging.
+
+	It returns a list of {rtp}/python2 (or {rtp}/python3) and 
+	{rtp}/pythonx directories for each {rtp} in 'runtimepath'.
+
 ==============================================================================
 3. Buffer objects					*python-buffer*

@@ -222,8 +396,9 @@ Buffer objects represent vim buffers.  You can obtain them in a number of ways:
 	- from indexing vim.buffers (|python-buffers|)
 	- from the "buffer" attribute of a window (|python-window|)

-Buffer objects have one read-only attribute - name - the full file name for
-the buffer.  They also have three methods (append, mark, and range; see below).
+Buffer objects have two read-only attributes - name - the full file name for
+the buffer, and number - the buffer number.  They also have three methods
+(append, mark, and range; see below).

 You can also treat buffer objects as sequence objects.  In this context, they
 act as if they were lists (yes, they are mutable) of strings, with each
@@ -238,6 +413,24 @@ Buffer indexes start at zero, as is normal in Python.  This differs from vim
 line numbers, which start from 1.  This is particularly relevant when dealing
 with marks (see below) which use vim line numbers.

+The buffer object attributes are:
+	b.vars		Dictionary-like object used to access 
+			|buffer-variable|s.
+	b.options	Mapping object (supports item getting, setting and 
+			deleting) that provides access to buffer-local options 
+			and buffer-local values of |global-local| options. Use 
+			|python-window|.options if option is window-local, 
+			this object will raise KeyError. If option is 
+			|global-local| and local value is missing getting it 
+			will return None.
+	b.name		String, RW. Contains buffer name (full path).
+			Note: when assigning to b.name |BufFilePre| and 
+			|BufFilePost| autocommands are launched.
+	b.number	Buffer number. Can be used as |python-buffers| key.
+			Read-only.
+	b.valid		True or False. Buffer object becomes invalid when 
+			corresponding buffer is wiped out.
+
 The buffer object methods are:
 	b.append(str)	Append a line to the buffer
 	b.append(str, nr)  Idem, below line "nr"
@@ -256,6 +449,8 @@ Note that when adding a line it must not contain a line break character '\n'.
 A trailing '\n' is allowed and ignored, so that you can do: >
 	:py b.append(f.readlines())

+Buffer object type is available using "Buffer" attribute of vim module.
+
 Examples (assume b is the current buffer) >
 	:py print b.name		# write the buffer file name
 	:py b[0] = "hello!!!"		# replace the top line
@@ -267,6 +462,9 @@ Examples (assume b is the current buffer) >
 	:py n = len(b)			# number of lines
 	:py (row,col) = b.mark('a')	# named mark
 	:py r = b.range(1,5)		# a sub-range of the buffer
+	:py b.vars["foo"] = "bar"	# assign b:foo variable
+	:py b.options["ff"] = "dos"	# set fileformat
+	:py del b.options["ar"]		# same as :set autoread<

 ==============================================================================
 4. Range objects					*python-range*
@@ -294,6 +492,8 @@ The range object methods are:
 			for Python's built-in list objects.
 	r.append(list, nr)  Idem, after line "nr"

+Range object type is available using "Range" attribute of vim module.
+
 Example (assume r is the current range):
 	# Send all lines in a range to the default printer
 	vim.command("%d,%dhardcopy!" % (r.start+1,r.end+1))
@@ -304,6 +504,8 @@ Example (assume r is the current range):
 Window objects represent vim windows.  You can obtain them in a number of ways:
 	- via vim.current.window (|python-current|)
 	- from indexing vim.windows (|python-windows|)
+	- from indexing "windows" attribute of a tab page (|python-tabpage|)
+	- from the "window" attribute of a tab page (|python-tabpage|)

 You can manipulate window objects only through their attributes.  They have no
 methods, and no sequence or other interface.
@@ -314,11 +516,167 @@ Window attributes are:
 				This is a tuple, (row,col).
 	height (read-write)	The window height, in rows
 	width (read-write)	The window width, in columns
+	vars (read-only)	The window |w:| variables. Attribute is 
+				unassignable, but you can change window 
+				variables this way
+	options (read-only)	The window-local options. Attribute is 
+				unassignable, but you can change window 
+				options this way. Provides access only to 
+				window-local options, for buffer-local use 
+				|python-buffer| and for global ones use 
+				|python-options|. If option is |global-local| 
+				and local value is missing getting it will 
+				return None.
+	number (read-only)	Window number.  The first window has number 1.
+				This is zero in case it cannot be determined
+				(e.g. when the window object belongs to other
+				tab page).
+	row, col (read-only)	On-screen window position in display cells.
+				First position is zero.
+	tabpage (read-only)	Window tab page.
+	valid (read-write)	True or False. Window object becomes invalid 
+				when corresponding window is closed.
+
 The height attribute is writable only if the screen is split horizontally.
 The width attribute is writable only if the screen is split vertically.

+Window object type is available using "Window" attribute of vim module.
+
 ==============================================================================
-6. Dynamic loading					*python-dynamic*
+6. Tab page objects					*python-tabpage*
+
+Tab page objects represent vim tab pages. You can obtain them in a number of 
+ways:
+	- via vim.current.tabpage (|python-current|)
+	- from indexing vim.tabpages (|python-tabpages|)
+
+You can use this object to access tab page windows. They have no methods and 
+no sequence or other interfaces.
+
+Tab page attributes are:
+	number		The tab page number like the one returned by 
+			|tabpagenr()|.
+	windows		Like |python-windows|, but for current tab page.
+	vars		The tab page |t:| variables.
+	window		Current tabpage window.
+	valid		True or False. Tab page object becomes invalid when 
+			corresponding tab page is closed.
+
+TabPage object type is available using "TabPage" attribute of vim module.
+
+==============================================================================
+7. vim.bindeval objects				*python-bindeval-objects*
+
+vim.Dictionary object				*python-Dictionary*
+    Dictionary-like object providing access to vim |Dictionary| type.
+    Attributes:
+        Attribute  Description ~
+        locked     One of                       *python-.locked*
+                    Value           Description ~
+                    zero            Variable is not locked
+                    vim.VAR_LOCKED  Variable is locked, but can be unlocked
+                    vim.VAR_FIXED   Variable is locked and can't be unlocked
+                   Read-write. You can unlock locked variable by assigning 
+                   `True` or `False` to this attribute. No recursive locking 
+                   is supported.
+        scope      One of
+                    Value              Description ~
+                    zero               Dictionary is not a scope one
+                    vim.VAR_DEF_SCOPE  |g:| or |l:| dictionary
+                    vim.VAR_SCOPE      Other scope dictionary,
+                                       see |internal-variables|
+    Methods (note: methods do not support keyword arguments):
+        Method      Description ~
+        keys()      Returns a list with dictionary keys.
+        values()    Returns a list with dictionary values.
+        items()     Returns a list of 2-tuples with dictionary contents.
+        update(iterable), update(dictionary), update(**kwargs)
+                    Adds keys to dictionary.
+        get(key[, default=None])
+                    Obtain key from dictionary, returning the default if it is 
+                    not present.
+        pop(key[, default])
+                    Remove specified key from dictionary and return 
+                    corresponding value. If key is not found and default is 
+                    given returns the default, otherwise raises KeyError.
+        popitem()
+                    Remove random key from dictionary and return (key, value) 
+                    pair.
+        has_key(key)
+                    Check whether dictionary contains specified key, similar 
+                    to `key in dict`.
+
+        __new__(), __new__(iterable), __new__(dictionary), __new__(update)
+                    You can use `vim.Dictionary()` to create new vim 
+                    dictionaries. `d=vim.Dictionary(arg)` is the same as 
+                    `d=vim.bindeval('{}');d.update(arg)`. Without arguments 
+                    constructs empty dictionary.
+
+    Examples: >
+        d = vim.Dictionary(food="bar")		# Constructor
+        d['a'] = 'b'				# Item assignment
+        print d['a']				# getting item
+        d.update({'c': 'd'})			# .update(dictionary)
+        d.update(e='f')				# .update(**kwargs)
+        d.update((('g', 'h'), ('i', 'j')))	# .update(iterable)
+        for key in d.keys():			# .keys()
+        for val in d.values():			# .values()
+        for key, val in d.items():		# .items()
+        print isinstance(d, vim.Dictionary)	# True
+        for key in d:				# Iteration over keys
+        class Dict(vim.Dictionary):		# Subclassing
+<
+    Note: when iterating over keys you should not modify dictionary.
+
+vim.List object					*python-List*
+    Sequence-like object providing access to vim |List| type.
+    Supports `.locked` attribute, see |python-.locked|. Also supports the 
+    following methods:
+        Method          Description ~
+        extend(item)    Add items to the list.
+
+        __new__(), __new__(iterable)
+                        You can use `vim.List()` to create new vim lists. 
+                        `l=vim.List(iterable)` is the same as 
+                        `l=vim.bindeval('[]');l.extend(iterable)`. Without 
+                        arguments constructs empty list.
+    Examples: >
+        l = vim.List("abc")		# Constructor, result: ['a', 'b', 'c']
+        l.extend(['abc', 'def'])	# .extend() method
+        print l[1:]			# slicing
+        l[:0] = ['ghi', 'jkl']		# slice assignment
+        print l[0]			# getting item
+        l[0] = 'mno'			# assignment
+        for i in l:			# iteration
+        print isinstance(l, vim.List)	# True
+        class List(vim.List):		# Subclassing
+
+vim.Function object				*python-Function*
+    Function-like object, acting like vim |Funcref| object. Supports `.name` 
+    attribute and is callable. Accepts special keyword argument `self`, see 
+    |Dictionary-function|. You can also use `vim.Function(name)` constructor, 
+    it is the same as `vim.bindeval('function(%s)'%json.dumps(name))`.
+
+    Examples: >
+        f = vim.Function('tr')			# Constructor
+        print f('abc', 'a', 'b')		# Calls tr('abc', 'a', 'b')
+        vim.command('''
+            function DictFun() dict
+                return self
+            endfunction
+        ''')
+        f = vim.bindeval('function("DictFun")')
+        print f(self={})			# Like call('DictFun', [], {})
+        print isinstance(f, vim.Function)	# True
+
+==============================================================================
+8. pyeval() and py3eval() Vim functions			*python-pyeval*
+
+To facilitate bi-directional interface, you can use |pyeval()| and |py3eval()| 
+functions to evaluate Python expressions and pass their values to VimL.
+
+==============================================================================
+9. Dynamic loading					*python-dynamic*

 On MS-Windows the Python library can be loaded dynamically.  The |:version|
 output then includes |+python/dyn|.
@@ -335,12 +693,17 @@ Currently the name is "python24.dll".  That is for Python 2.4.  To know for
 sure edit "gvim.exe" and search for "python\d*.dll\c".

 ==============================================================================
-7. Python 3						*python3*
+10. Python 3						*python3*

 							*:py3* *:python3*
-The |:py3| and |:python3| commands work similar to |:python|.
-							*:py3file*
-The |:py3file| command works similar to |:pyfile|.
+The `:py3` and `:python3` commands work similar to `:python`.  A simple check
+if the `:py3` command is working: >
+	:py3 print("Hello")
+<							*:py3file*
+The `:py3file` command works similar to `:pyfile`.
+							*:py3do* *E863*
+The `:py3do` command works similar to `:pydo`.
+

 Vim can be built in four ways (:version output):
 1. No Python support	    (-python, -python3)
@@ -380,7 +743,7 @@ To work around such problems there are these options:
 							*has-python*
 You can test what Python version is available with: >
 	if has('python')
-	  echo 'there is Pyton 2.x'
+	  echo 'there is Python 2.x'
  	elseif has('python3')
 	  echo 'there is Python 3.x'
 	endif
--- a/runtime/doc/if_ruby.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/if_ruby.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_ruby.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Oct 27
+*if_ruby.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Aug 02


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Shugo Maeda
@@ -25,7 +25,8 @@ downloading Ruby there.
 1. Commands						*ruby-commands*

 							*:ruby* *:rub*
-:rub[y] {cmd}		Execute Ruby command {cmd}.
+:rub[y] {cmd}		Execute Ruby command {cmd}.  A command to try it out: >
+				:ruby print "Hello"

 :rub[y] << {endpattern}
 {script}
@@ -40,9 +41,6 @@ downloading Ruby there.
 			wasn't compiled in.  To avoid errors, see
 			|script-here|.

-Command to try it out: >
-	:ruby print "Hello"   # this is a comment
-
 Example Vim script: >

 	function! RedGem()
@@ -211,6 +209,8 @@ for sure edit "gvim.exe" and search for "ruby\d*.dll\c".

 If you want to build Vim with Ruby 1.9.1, you need to edit the config.h file
 and comment-out the check for _MSC_VER.
+You may also need to rename the include directory name to match the version,
+strangely for Ruby 1.9.3 the directory is called 1.9.1.

 ==============================================================================
 vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:
--- a/runtime/doc/if_tcl.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/if_tcl.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_tcl.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2008 Aug 16
+*if_tcl.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Aug 02


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Ingo Wilken
@@ -27,7 +27,9 @@ comments, ideas etc to <Ingo.Wilken@informatik.uni-oldenburg.de>
 1. Commands				*tcl-ex-commands* *E571* *E572*

 							*:tcl* *:tc*
-:tc[l] {cmd}		Execute Tcl command {cmd}.
+:tc[l] {cmd}		Execute Tcl command {cmd}.  A simple check if `:tcl`
+			is working: >
+				:tcl puts "Hello"

 :[range]tc[l] << {endmarker}
 {script}
--- a/runtime/doc/indent.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/indent.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*indent.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 May 31
+*indent.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2013 Jun 13


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -132,8 +132,8 @@ The 'cinoptions' option sets how Vim performs indentation.  The value after
 the option character can be one of these (N is any number):
 	N	indent N spaces
 	-N	indent N spaces to the left
-	Ns	N times 'shiftwidth spaces
-	-Ns	N times 'shiftwidth spaces to the left
+	Ns	N times 'shiftwidth' spaces
+	-Ns	N times 'shiftwidth' spaces to the left

 In the list below,
 "N" represents a number of your choice (the number can be negative).  When
@@ -432,7 +432,7 @@ The examples below assume a 'shiftwidth' of 4.
 		       c3			    c3
 		      ) && c4;			) && c4;
 <
-							*cino-2*
+							*cino-w*
 	wN    When in unclosed parentheses and N is non-zero and either
 	      using "(0" or "u0", respectively, or using "U0" and the unclosed
 	      parentheses is the first non-white character in its line, line
@@ -459,6 +459,22 @@ The examples below assume a 'shiftwidth' of 4.
 			      argument);	argument);
 		  a_short_line(argument,    a_short_line(argument,
 			       argument);		 argument);
+<
+							*cino-k*
+	kN    When in unclosed parentheses which follow "if", "for" or
+	      "while" and N is non-zero, overrides the behaviour defined by
+	      "(N": causes the indent to be N characters relative to the outer
+	      context (i.e. the line where "if", "for" or "while" is).  Has
+	      no effect on deeper levels of nesting.  Affects flags like "wN"
+	      only for the "if", "for" and "while" conditions.  If 0, defaults
+	      to behaviour defined by the "(N" flag.  (default: 0).
+
+		cino=(0			   cino=(0,ks >
+		  if (condition1	    if (condition1
+		      && condition2)		    && condition2)
+		      action();			action();
+		  function(argument1	    function(argument1
+			   && argument2);	     && argument2);
 <
 							*cino-m*
 	mN    When N is non-zero, line up a line starting with a closing
@@ -486,9 +502,10 @@ The examples below assume a 'shiftwidth' of 4.
 		     )				   )
 <
 				*java-cinoptions* *java-indenting* *cino-j*
-	jN    Indent java anonymous classes correctly.  The value 'N' is
-	      currently unused but must be non-zero (e.g. 'j1').  'j1' will
-	      indent for example the following code snippet correctly: >
+	jN    Indent Java anonymous classes correctly.  Also works well for
+	      Javascript.  The value 'N' is currently unused but must be
+	      non-zero (e.g. 'j1').  'j1' will indent for example the
+	      following code snippet correctly: >

 		object.add(new ChangeListener() {
 		    public void stateChanged(ChangeEvent e) {
@@ -499,7 +516,8 @@ The examples below assume a 'shiftwidth' of 4.
 			*javascript-cinoptions* *javascript-indenting* *cino-J*
 	JN    Indent JavaScript object declarations correctly by not confusing
 	      them with labels.  The value 'N' is currently unused but must be 
-	      non-zero (e.g. 'J1'). >
+	      non-zero (e.g. 'J1').  If you enable this you probably also want
+	      to set |cino-j|. >

 		var bar = {
 		    foo: {
@@ -522,20 +540,20 @@ The examples below assume a 'shiftwidth' of 4.
 								*cino-star*
 	*N    Vim searches for unclosed comments at most N lines away.  This
 	      limits the time needed to search for the start of a comment.
-	      If your /* */ comments stop indenting afer N lines this is the
+	      If your /* */ comments stop indenting after N lines this is the
 	      value you will want to change.
 	      (default 70 lines).

 								*cino-#*
 	#N    When N is non-zero recognize shell/Perl comments, starting with
-	      '#'.  Default N is zero: don't recognizes '#' comments.  Note
+	      '#'.  Default N is zero: don't recognize '#' comments.  Note
 	      that lines starting with # will still be seen as preprocessor
 	      lines.


 The defaults, spelled out in full, are:
 	cinoptions=>s,e0,n0,f0,{0,}0,^0,L-1,:s,=s,l0,b0,gs,hs,N0,ps,ts,is,+s,
-			c3,C0,/0,(2s,us,U0,w0,W0,m0,j0,J0,)20,*70,#0
+			c3,C0,/0,(2s,us,U0,w0,W0,k0,m0,j0,J0,)20,*70,#0

 Vim puts a line in column 1 if:
 - It starts with '#' (preprocessor directives), if 'cinkeys' contains '#'.
@@ -559,6 +577,106 @@ $VIMRUNTIME/indent directory for examples.
 REMARKS ABOUT SPECIFIC INDENT FILES ~


+CLOJURE					*ft-clojure-indent* *clojure-indent*
+
+Clojure indentation differs somewhat from traditional Lisps, due in part to
+the use of square and curly brackets, and otherwise by community convention.
+These conventions are not always universally followed, so the Clojure indent
+script offers a few configurable options, listed below.
+
+If the current vim does not include searchpairpos(), the indent script falls
+back to normal 'lisp' indenting, and the following options are ignored.
+
+							*g:clojure_maxlines*
+
+Set maximum scan distance of searchpairpos(). Larger values trade performance
+for correctness when dealing with very long forms. A value of 0 will scan
+without limits.
+>
+	" Default
+	let g:clojure_maxlines = 100
+<
+
+						*g:clojure_fuzzy_indent*
+					*g:clojure_fuzzy_indent_patterns*
+					*g:clojure_fuzzy_indent_blacklist*
+
+The 'lispwords' option is a list of comma-separated words that mark special
+forms whose subforms must be indented with two spaces.
+
+For example:
+>
+	(defn bad []
+	      "Incorrect indentation")
+
+	(defn good []
+	  "Correct indentation")
+<
+If you would like to specify 'lispwords' with a |pattern| instead, you can use
+the fuzzy indent feature:
+>
+	" Default
+	let g:clojure_fuzzy_indent = 1
+	let g:clojure_fuzzy_indent_patterns = ['^with', '^def', '^let']
+	let g:clojure_fuzzy_indent_blacklist =
+		\ ['-fn$', '\v^with-%(meta|out-str|loading-context)$']
+
+	" Legacy comma-delimited string version; the list format above is
+	" recommended. Note that patterns are implicitly anchored with ^ and $
+	let g:clojure_fuzzy_indent_patterns = 'with.*,def.*,let.*'
+<
+|g:clojure_fuzzy_indent_patterns| and |g:clojure_fuzzy_indent_blacklist| are
+|Lists| of patterns that will be matched against the unquoted, unqualified
+symbol at the head of a list. This means that a pattern like "^foo" will match
+all these candidates: "foobar", "my.ns/foobar", and "#'foobar".
+
+Each candidate word is tested for special treatment in this order:
+
+	1. Return true if word is literally in 'lispwords'
+	2. Return false if word matches a pattern in
+	   |g:clojure_fuzzy_indent_blacklist|
+	3. Return true if word matches a pattern in
+	   |g:clojure_fuzzy_indent_patterns|
+	4. Return false and indent normally otherwise
+
+					*g:clojure_special_indent_words*
+
+Some forms in Clojure are indented so that every subform is indented only two
+spaces, regardless of 'lispwords'. If you have a custom construct that should
+be indented in this idiosyncratic fashion, you can add your symbols to the
+default list below.
+>
+	" Default
+	let g:clojure_special_indent_words =
+	   \ 'deftype,defrecord,reify,proxy,extend-type,extend-protocol,letfn'
+<
+
+					*g:clojure_align_multiline_strings*
+
+Align subsequent lines in multiline strings to the column after the opening
+quote, instead of the same column.
+
+For example:
+>
+	(def default
+	  "Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipisicing elit, sed do
+	  eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua. Ut
+	  enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exercitation ullamco laboris
+	  nisi ut aliquip ex ea commodo consequat.")
+
+	(def aligned
+	  "Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipisicing elit, sed do
+	   eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua. Ut
+	   enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exercitation ullamco laboris
+	   nisi ut aliquip ex ea commodo consequat.")
+<
+This option is off by default.
+>
+	" Default
+	let g:clojure_align_multiline_strings = 0
+<
+
+
 FORTRAN							*ft-fortran-indent*

 Block if, select case, where, and forall constructs are indented.  So are
@@ -611,6 +729,50 @@ buffer-local variable as follows >
  let b:fortran_indent_less=1


+HTML				*ft-html-indent* *html-indent* *html-indenting*
+
+This is about variables you can set in your vimrc to customize HTML indenting.
+
+You can set the indent for the first line after <script> and <style>
+"blocktags" (default "zero"): >
+
+      :let g:html_indent_script1 = "inc"
+      :let g:html_indent_style1 = "inc"
+<
+      VALUE	MEANING ~
+      "zero"	zero indent
+      "auto"	auto indent (same indent as the blocktag)
+      "inc"	auto indent + one indent step
+
+Many tags increase the indent for what follows per default (see "Add Indent
+Tags" in the script).  You can add further tags with: >
+
+      :let g:html_indent_inctags = "html,body,head,tbody"
+
+You can also remove such tags with: >
+
+      :let g:html_indent_autotags = "th,td,tr,tfoot,thead"
+
+Default value is empty for both variables.  Note: the initial "inctags" are
+only defined once per Vim session.
+
+User variables are only read when the script is sourced.  To enable your
+changes during a session, without reloading the HTML file, you can manually
+do: >
+
+      :call HtmlIndent_CheckUserSettings()
+
+Detail:
+  Calculation of indent inside "blocktags" with "alien" content:
+      BLOCKTAG   INDENT EXPR	    WHEN APPLICABLE ~
+      <script> : {customizable}	    if first line of block
+	       : cindent(v:lnum)    if attributes empty or contain "java"
+	       : -1		    else (vbscript, tcl, ...)
+      <style>  : {customizable}	    if first line of block
+	       : GetCSSIndent()	    else
+      <!-- --> : -1
+
+
 PHP				*ft-php-indent* *php-indent* *php-indenting*

 NOTE:	PHP files will be indented correctly only if PHP |syntax| is active.
@@ -622,12 +784,12 @@ those useless characters first with a command like: >
    :%s /\r$//g

 Or, you can simply |:let| the variable PHP_removeCRwhenUnix to 1 and the
-script will silently remove them when Vim loads a PHP file (at each|BufRead|).
+script will silently remove them when Vim loads a PHP file (at each |BufRead|).

 OPTIONS: ~

 PHP indenting can be altered in several ways by modifying the values of some
-variables:
+global variables:

 								*php-comment*
 To not enable auto-formating of comments by default (if you want to use your
@@ -635,10 +797,21 @@ own 'formatoptions'): >
    :let g:PHP_autoformatcomment = 0

 Else, 't' will be removed from the 'formatoptions' string and "qrowcb" will be
-added, see|fo-table|for more information.
+added, see |fo-table| for more information.
 -------------

-To add an extra indent to every PHP lines with N being the number of
+To add extra indentation to single-line comments: >
+    :let g:PHP_outdentSLComments = N
+
+With N being the number of 'shiftwidth' to add.
+
+Only single-line comments will be affected such as: >
+    # Comment
+    // Comment
+    /* Comment */
+-------------
+
+To add extra indentation to every PHP lines with N being the number of
 'shiftwidth' to add: >
    :let g:PHP_default_indenting = N

@@ -654,7 +827,7 @@ For example, with N = 1, this will give:

 	$command_hist = TRUE;
    ?>
-(Notice the extra indent between the PHP container markers and the code)
+(Notice the extra indentation between the PHP container markers and the code)
 -------------

 To indent PHP tags as the surrounding code: >
@@ -686,8 +859,10 @@ NOTE:	Indenting will be a bit slower if this option is used because some
 To indent 'case:' and 'default:' statements in switch() blocks: >
    :let g:PHP_vintage_case_default_indent = 1

-(Since in PHP braces are not required inside 'case/default' blocks, by default they are indented at the same level than the 'switch()' to avoid
-unnecessary indentation)
+In PHP braces are not required inside 'case/default' blocks therefore 'case:'
+and 'default:' are indented at the same level than the 'switch()' to avoid
+meaningless indentation. You can use the above option to return to the
+traditional way.


 PYTHON							*ft-python-indent*
@@ -704,6 +879,43 @@ Indent for a continuation line: >
 	let g:pyindent_continue = '&sw * 2'


+R								*ft-r-indent*
+
+Function arguments are aligned if they span for multiple lines. If you prefer
+do not have the arguments of functions aligned, put in your |vimrc|:
+>
+   let r_indent_align_args = 0
+<
+All lines beginning with a comment character, #, get the same indentation
+level of the normal R code. Users of Emacs/ESS may be used to have lines
+beginning with a single # indented in the 40th column, ## indented as R code,
+and ### not indented. If you prefer that lines beginning with comment
+characters are aligned as they are by Emacs/ESS, put in your |vimrc|:
+>
+   let r_indent_ess_comments = 1
+<
+If you prefer that lines beginning with a single # are aligned at a column
+different from the 40th one, you should set a new value to the variable
+r_indent_comment_column, as in the example below:
+>
+   let r_indent_comment_column = 30
+<
+Any code after a line that ends with "<-" is indented. Emacs/ESS does not
+indent the code if it is a top level function. If you prefer that the
+Vim-R-plugin behaves like Emacs/ESS in this regard, put in your |vimrc|:
+>
+   let r_indent_ess_compatible = 1
+<
+Below is an example of indentation with and without this option enabled:
+>
+   ### r_indent_ess_compatible = 1           ### r_indent_ess_compatible = 0
+   foo <-                                    foo <-
+       function(x)                               function(x)
+   {                                             {
+       paste(x)                                      paste(x)
+   }                                             }
+<
+
 SHELL							*ft-sh-indent*

 The amount of indent applied under various circumstances in a shell file can
--- a/runtime/doc/index.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/index.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*index.txt*     For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Jan 04
+*index.txt*     For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2013 Jun 21


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -94,8 +94,8 @@ tag		char		action in Insert mode	~
 |i_CTRL-Z|	CTRL-Z		when 'insertmode' set: suspend Vim
 |i_<Esc>|	<Esc>		end insert mode (unless 'insertmode' set)
 |i_CTRL-[|	CTRL-[		same as <Esc>
-|i_CTRL-\_CTRL-N| CTRL-\ CTRL-N	 go to Normal mode
-|i_CTRL-\_CTRL-G| CTRL-\ CTRL-G	 go to mode specified with 'insertmode'
+|i_CTRL-\_CTRL-N| CTRL-\ CTRL-N	go to Normal mode
+|i_CTRL-\_CTRL-G| CTRL-\ CTRL-G	go to mode specified with 'insertmode'
 		CTRL-\ a - z	reserved for extensions
 		CTRL-\ others	not used
 |i_CTRL-]|	CTRL-]		trigger abbreviation
@@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ tag		char		action in Insert mode	~
 |i_<ScrollWheelUp>|	<ScrollWheelUp>		move window three lines up
 |i_<S-ScrollWheelUp>|	<S-ScrollWheelUp>	move window one page up
 |i_<ScrollWheelLeft>|	<ScrollWheelLeft>	move window six columns left
-|i_<S-ScrollWheelLeft>| <S-ScrollWheelLeft>	move window one page left
+|i_<S-ScrollWheelLeft>|	<S-ScrollWheelLeft>	move window one page left
 |i_<ScrollWheelRight>|	<ScrollWheelRight>	move window six columns right
 |i_<S-ScrollWheelRight>| <S-ScrollWheelRight>	move window one page right

@@ -212,8 +212,8 @@ tag		char	      note action in Normal mode	~
 |CTRL-Y|	CTRL-Y		   scroll N lines downwards
 |CTRL-Z|	CTRL-Z		   suspend program (or start new shell)
 		CTRL-[ <Esc>	   not used
-|CTRL-\_CTRL-N| CTRL-\ CTRL-N	   go to Normal mode (no-op)
-|CTRL-\_CTRL-G| CTRL-\ CTRL-G	   go to mode specified with 'insertmode'
+|CTRL-\_CTRL-N|	CTRL-\ CTRL-N	   go to Normal mode (no-op)
+|CTRL-\_CTRL-G|	CTRL-\ CTRL-G	   go to mode specified with 'insertmode'
 		CTRL-\ a - z	   reserved for extensions
 		CTRL-\ others      not used
 |CTRL-]|	CTRL-]		   :ta to ident under cursor
@@ -431,7 +431,7 @@ tag		char	      note action in Normal mode	~
 |<Insert>|	<Insert>	2  same as "i"
 |<Left>|	<Left>		1  same as "h"
 |<LeftMouse>|	<LeftMouse>	1  move cursor to the mouse click position
-|<MiddleMouse>| <MiddleMouse>	2  same as "gP" at the mouse click position
+|<MiddleMouse>|	<MiddleMouse>	2  same as "gP" at the mouse click position
 |<PageDown>|	<PageDown>	   same as CTRL-F
 |<PageUp>|	<PageUp>	   same as CTRL-B
 |<Right>|	<Right>		1  same as "l"
@@ -640,7 +640,7 @@ tag		char	      note action in Normal mode	~
 |[s|		[s		1  move to the previous misspelled word
 |[z|		[z		1  move to start of open fold
 |[{|		[{		1  cursor N times back to unmatched '{'
-|[<MiddleMouse> [<MiddleMouse>	2  same as "[p"
+|[<MiddleMouse>| [<MiddleMouse>	2  same as "[p"

 |]_CTRL-D|	] CTRL-D	   jump to first #define found in current and
 				   included files matching the word under the
@@ -680,7 +680,7 @@ tag		char	      note action in Normal mode	~
 |]s|		]s		1  move to next misspelled word
 |]z|		]z		1  move to end of open fold
 |]}|		]}		1  cursor N times forward to unmatched '}'
-|]<MiddleMouse> ]<MiddleMouse>	2  same as "]p"
+|]<MiddleMouse>| ]<MiddleMouse>	2  same as "]p"

 ==============================================================================
 2.4 Commands starting with 'g'						*g*
@@ -719,10 +719,13 @@ tag		char	      note action in Normal mode	~
 |gH|		gH		   start Select line mode
 |gI|		gI		2  like "I", but always start in column 1
 |gJ|		gJ		2  join lines without inserting space
+|gN|		gN	      1,2  find the previous match with the last used
+				   search pattern and Visually select it
 |gP|		["x]gP		2  put the text [from register x] before the
 				   cursor N times, leave the cursor after it
 |gQ|		gQ		    switch to "Ex" mode with Vim editing
 |gR|		gR		2  enter Virtual Replace mode
+|gT|		gT		   go to the previous tab page
 |gU|		gU{motion}	2  make Nmove text uppercase
 |gV|		gV		   don't reselect the previous Visual area
 				   when executing a mapping or menu in Select
@@ -751,6 +754,8 @@ tag		char	      note action in Normal mode	~
 				   lines down
 |gk|		gk		1  like "k", but when 'wrap' on go N screen
 				   lines up
+|gn|		gn	      1,2  find the next match with the last used
+				   search pattern and Visually select it
 |gm|		gm		1  go to character at middle of the screenline
 |go|		go		1  cursor to byte N in the buffer
 |gp|		["x]gp		2  put the text [from register x] after the
@@ -758,6 +763,7 @@ tag		char	      note action in Normal mode	~
 |gq|		gq{motion}	2  format Nmove text
 |gr|		gr{char}	2  virtual replace N chars with {char}
 |gs|		gs		   go to sleep for N seconds (default 1)
+|gt|		gt		   go to the next tab page
 |gu|		gu{motion}	2  make Nmove text lowercase
 |gv|		gv		   reselect the previous Visual area
 |gw|		gw{motion}	2  format Nmove text and keep cursor
@@ -795,6 +801,10 @@ tag		char	      note action in Normal mode	~
 |zE|		zE		   eliminate all folds
 |zF|		zF		   create a fold for N lines
 |zG|		zG		   mark word as good spelled word
+|zH|		zH		   when 'wrap' off scroll half a screenwidth
+				   to the right
+|zL|		zL		   when 'wrap' off scroll half a screenwidth
+				   to the left
 |zM|		zM		   set 'foldlevel' to zero
 |zN|		zN		   set 'foldenable'
 |zO|		zO		   open folds recursively
@@ -1007,8 +1017,8 @@ tag		command	      action in Command-line editing mode	~
 		CTRL-Z		not used (reserved for suspend)
 |c_<Esc>|	<Esc>		abandon command-line without executing it
 |c_<Esc>|	CTRL-[		same as <Esc>
-|c_CTRL-\_CTRL-N| CTRL-\ CTRL-N	 go to Normal mode, abandon command-line
-|c_CTRL-\_CTRL-G| CTRL-\ CTRL-G	 go to mode specified with 'insertmode',
+|c_CTRL-\_CTRL-N| CTRL-\ CTRL-N	go to Normal mode, abandon command-line
+|c_CTRL-\_CTRL-G| CTRL-\ CTRL-G	go to mode specified with 'insertmode',
 				abandon command-line
 		CTRL-\ a - d	reserved for extensions
 |c_CTRL-\_e|	CTRL-\ e {expr} replace the command line with the result of
@@ -1130,7 +1140,7 @@ tag	      command	      action ~
 |:cgetbuffer|	:cgetb[uffer]	get errors from buffer
 |:cgetexpr|	:cgete[xpr]	get errors from expr
 |:cgetfile|	:cg[etfile]	read file with error messages
-|:changes|	:cha[nges]	print the change list
+|:changes|	:changes	print the change list
 |:chdir|	:chd[ir]	change directory
 |:checkpath|	:che[ckpath]	list included files
 |:checktime|	:checkt[ime]	check timestamp of loaded buffers
@@ -1261,7 +1271,7 @@ tag	      command	      action ~
 |:k|		:k		set a mark
 |:keepalt|	:keepa[lt]	following command keeps the alternate file
 |:keepmarks|	:kee[pmarks]	following command keeps marks where they are
-|:keepjumps|	:keepj[jumps]	following command keeps jumplist and marks
+|:keepjumps|	:keepj[umps]	following command keeps jumplist and marks
 |:lNext|	:lN[ext]	go to previous entry in location list
 |:lNfile|	:lNf[ile]	go to last entry in previous file
 |:list|		:l[ist]		print lines
@@ -1379,7 +1389,7 @@ tag	      command	      action ~
 |:promptrepl|	:promptr[epl]	open GUI dialog for search/replace
 |:perldo|	:perld[o]	execute Perl command for each line
 |:pop|		:po[p]		jump to older entry in tag stack
-|:popup|	:pop[up]	popup a menu by name
+|:popup|	:popu[p]	popup a menu by name
 |:ppop|		:pp[op]		":pop" in preview window
 |:preserve|	:pre[serve]	write all text to swap file
 |:previous|	:prev[ious]	go to previous file in argument list
@@ -1397,8 +1407,10 @@ tag	      command	      action ~
 |:pwd|		:pw[d]		print current directory
 |:py3|		:py3		execute Python 3 command
 |:python3|	:python3	same as :py3
+|:py3do|	:py3d[o]	execute Python 3 command for each line
 |:py3file|	:py3f[ile]	execute Python 3 script file
 |:python|	:py[thon]	execute Python command
+|:pydo|		:pyd[o]		execute Python command for each line
 |:pyfile|	:pyf[ile]	execute Python script file
 |:quit|		:q[uit]		quit current window (when one window quit Vim)
 |:quitall|	:quita[ll]	quit Vim
@@ -1465,7 +1477,7 @@ tag	      command	      action ~
 |:slast|	:sla[st]	split window and go to last file in the
 				argument list
 |:smagic|	:sm[agic]	:substitute with 'magic'
-|:smap|		:sma[p]		like ":map" but for Select mode
+|:smap|		:smap		like ":map" but for Select mode
 |:smapclear|	:smapc[lear]	remove all mappings for Select mode
 |:smenu|	:sme[nu]	add menu for Select mode
 |:snext|	:sn[ext]	split window and go to next file in the
@@ -1502,6 +1514,7 @@ tag	      command	      action ~
 |:sview|	:sv[iew]	split window and edit file read-only
 |:swapname|	:sw[apname]	show the name of the current swap file
 |:syntax|	:sy[ntax]	syntax highlighting
+|:syntime|	:synti[me]	measure syntax highlighting speed
 |:syncbind|	:sync[bind]	sync scroll binding
 |:t|		:t		same as ":copy"
 |:tNext|	:tN[ext]	jump to previous matching tag
--- a/runtime/doc/insert.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/insert.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*insert.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Nov 10
+*insert.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2013 Apr 12


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -380,11 +380,16 @@ The CTRL-O command sometimes has a side effect: If the cursor was beyond the
 end of the line, it will be put on the last character in the line.  In
 mappings it's often better to use <Esc> (first put an "x" in the text, <Esc>
 will then always put the cursor on it).  Or use CTRL-\ CTRL-O, but then
-beware of the cursor possibly being beyond the end of the line.
+beware of the cursor possibly being beyond the end of the line.  Note that the
+command following CTRL-\ CTRL-O can still move the cursor, it is not restored
+to its original position.

 The CTRL-O command takes you to Normal mode.  If you then use a command enter
-Insert mode again it doesn't nest.  Thus when typing "a<C-O>a" and then <Esc>
-takes you back to Normal mode, you do not need to type <Esc> twice.
+Insert mode again it normally doesn't nest.  Thus when typing "a<C-O>a" and
+then <Esc> takes you back to Normal mode, you do not need to type <Esc> twice.
+An exception is when not typing the command, e.g. when executing a mapping or
+sourcing a script.  This makes mappings work that briefly switch to Insert
+mode.

 The shifted cursor keys are not available on all terminals.

@@ -398,7 +403,12 @@ An example for using CTRL-G u: >

 This redefines the backspace key to start a new undo sequence.  You can now
 undo the effect of the backspace key, without changing what you typed before
-that, with CTRL-O u.
+that, with CTRL-O u.  Another example: >
+
+	:inoremap <CR> <C-]><C-G>u<CR>
+
+This breaks undo at each line break.  It also expands abbreviations before
+this.

 Using CTRL-O splits undo: the text typed before and after it is undone
 separately.  If you want to avoid this (e.g., in a mapping) you might be able
@@ -483,7 +493,7 @@ option}
 							*ins-smarttab*
 When the 'smarttab' option is on, a <Tab> inserts 'shiftwidth' positions at
 the beginning of a line and 'tabstop' positions in other places.  This means
-that often spaces instead of a <Tab> character are inserted.  When 'smarttab
+that often spaces instead of a <Tab> character are inserted.  When 'smarttab'
 is off, a <Tab> always inserts 'tabstop' positions, and 'shiftwidth' is only
 used for ">>" and the like.  {not in Vi}

@@ -1009,8 +1019,13 @@ The function must return the column where the completion starts.  It must be a
 number between zero and the cursor column "col('.')".  This involves looking
 at the characters just before the cursor and including those characters that
 could be part of the completed item.  The text between this column and the
-cursor column will be replaced with the matches.  Return -1 if no completion
-can be done.
+cursor column will be replaced with the matches.
+
+Special return values:
+   -1 If no completion can be done, the completion will be cancelled with an
+      error message.
+   -2 To cancel silently and stay in completion mode.
+   -3 To cancel silently and leave completion mode.

 On the second invocation the arguments are:
   a:findstart  0
@@ -1020,6 +1035,23 @@ On the second invocation the arguments are:
 The function must return a List with the matching words.  These matches
 usually include the "a:base" text.  When there are no matches return an empty
 List.
+
+In order to return more information than the matching words, return a Dict
+that contains the List.  The Dict can have these items:
+	words		The List of matching words (mandatory).
+	refresh		A string to control re-invocation of the function
+			(optional).
+			The only value currently recognized is "always", the
+			effect is that the function is called whenever the
+			leading text is changed.
+Other items are ignored.
+
+For acting upon end of completion, see the |CompleteDone| autocommand event.
+
+For example, the function can contain this: >
+	let matches = ... list of words ...
+	return {'words': matches, 'refresh': 'always'}
+<
 						*complete-items*
 Each list item can either be a string or a Dictionary.  When it is a string it
 is used as the completion.  When it is a Dictionary it can contain these
@@ -1040,9 +1072,10 @@ items:
 	empty		when non-zero this match will be added even when it is
 			an empty string

-All of these except 'icase' must be a string.  If an item does not meet these
-requirements then an error message is given and further items in the list are
-not used.  You can mix string and Dictionary items in the returned list.
+All of these except 'icase', 'dup' and 'empty' must be a string.  If an item
+does not meet these requirements then an error message is given and further
+items in the list are not used.  You can mix string and Dictionary items in
+the returned list.

 The "menu" item is used in the popup menu and may be truncated, thus it should
 be relatively short.  The "info" item can be longer, it will  be displayed in
@@ -1435,9 +1468,9 @@ knows how to color highlight.  It can be used for any filetype and provides a
 minimal language-sensitive completion.

 To enable syntax code completion you can run: >
-	setlocal omnifunc=syntaxcomplete#Complete
+    setlocal omnifunc=syntaxcomplete#Complete

-You can automate this by placing the following in your vimrc (after any
+You can automate this by placing the following in your |.vimrc| (after any
 ":filetype" command): >
    if has("autocmd") && exists("+omnifunc")
 	autocmd Filetype *
@@ -1454,7 +1487,7 @@ customize which syntax groups to include or exclude from the list.  Let's have
 a look at the PHP filetype to see how this works.

 If you edit a file called, index.php, run the following command: >
-	:syntax list
+    syntax list

 The first thing you will notice is that there are many different syntax groups.
 The PHP language can include elements from different languages like HTML,
@@ -1463,24 +1496,38 @@ that begin with the filetype, "php", in this case.  For example these syntax
 groups are included by default with the PHP: phpEnvVar, phpIntVar,
 phpFunctions.

-The PHP language has an enormous number of items which it knows how to syntax
-highlight.  This means these items will be available within the omni
-completion list.  Some people may find this list unwieldy or are only
-interested in certain items.
+If you wish non-filetype syntax items to also be included, you can use a 
+regular expression syntax (added in version 13.0 of autoload\syntaxcomplete.vim)
+to add items.  Looking at the output from ":syntax list" while editing a PHP file 
+I can see some of these entries: >
+    htmlArg,htmlTag,htmlTagName,javaScriptStatement,javaScriptGlobalObjects

-There are two ways to prune this list (if necessary).  If you find certain
-syntax groups you do not wish displayed you can add the following to your
-vimrc: >
-	let g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_php = 'phpCoreConstant,phpConstant'
+To pick up any JavaScript and HTML keyword syntax groups while editing a PHP
+file, you can use 3 different regexs, one for each language.  Or you can 
+simply restrict the include groups to a particular value, without using 
+a regex string: >
+    let g:omni_syntax_group_include_php = 'php\w\+,javaScript\w\+,html\w\+'
+    let g:omni_syntax_group_include_php = 'phpFunctions,phpMethods'
+<
+The basic form of this variable is: >
+    let g:omni_syntax_group_include_{filetype} = 'regex,comma,separated'
+
+The PHP language has an enormous number of items which it knows how to syntax
+highlight.  These these items will be available within the omni completion
+list.  
+
+Some people may find this list unwieldy or are only interested in certain
+items.  There are two ways to prune this list (if necessary).  If you find
+certain syntax groups you do not wish displayed you can use two different 
+methods to identify these groups.  The first specifically lists the syntax 
+groups by name.  The second uses a regular expression to identify both 
+syntax groups.  Simply add one the following to your vimrc: >
+    let g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_php = 'phpCoreConstant,phpConstant'
+    let g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_php = 'php\w*Constant'

 Add as many syntax groups to this list by comma separating them.  The basic
 form of this variable is: >
-	let g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_{filetype} = 'comma,separated,list'
-
-For completeness the opposite is also true.  Creating this variable in your
-vimrc will only include the items in the phpFunctions and phpMethods syntax
-groups: >
-	let g:omni_syntax_group_include_php = 'phpFunctions,phpMethods'
+    let g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_{filetype} = 'regex,comma,separated'

 You can create as many of these variables as you need, varying only the
 filetype at the end of the variable name.
@@ -1521,6 +1568,9 @@ To retrieve only the syntax items for the sqlOperator syntax group: >
 To retrieve all syntax items for both the sqlOperator and sqlType groups: >
    echo OmniSyntaxList( ['sqlOperator', 'sqlType'] )

+A regular expression can also be used: >
+    echo OmniSyntaxList( ['sql\w\+'] )
+
 From within a plugin, you would typically assign the output to a List: >
    let myKeywords = []
    let myKeywords = OmniSyntaxList( ['sqlKeyword'] )
@@ -1836,13 +1886,15 @@ NOTE: These commands cannot be used with |:global| or |:vglobal|.
 			See |++opt| for the possible values of [++opt].

 							*:r!* *:read!*
-:[range]r[ead] !{cmd}	Execute {cmd} and insert its standard output below
+:[range]r[ead] [++opt] !{cmd}
+			Execute {cmd} and insert its standard output below
 			the cursor or the specified line.  A temporary file is
 			used to store the output of the command which is then
 			read into the buffer.  'shellredir' is used to save
 			the output of the command, which can be set to include
 			stderr or not.  {cmd} is executed like with ":!{cmd}",
 			any '!' is replaced with the previous command |:!|.
+			See |++opt| for the possible values of [++opt].

 These commands insert the contents of a file, or the output of a command,
 into the buffer.  They can be undone.  They cannot be repeated with the "."
--- a/runtime/doc/intro.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/intro.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*intro.txt*     For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 May 15
+*intro.txt*     For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2013 Jun 17


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -261,6 +261,7 @@ Vim would never have become what it is now, without the help of these people!
 I wish to thank all the people that sent me bug reports and suggestions.  The
 list is too long to mention them all here.  Vim would not be the same without
 the ideas from all these people: They keep Vim alive!
+*love* *peace* *friendship* *gross-national-happiness*


 In this documentation there are several references to other versions of Vi:
@@ -394,6 +395,8 @@ CTRL-{char}	{char} typed as a control character; that is, typing {char}
 							*quotecommandquote*
 "command"	A reference to a command that you can type is enclosed in
 		double quotes.
+`command`	New style command, this distinguishes it from other quoted
+		text and strings.

 					*key-notation* *key-codes* *keycodes*
 These names for keys are used in the documentation.  They can also be used
--- a/runtime/doc/map.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/map.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*map.txt*       For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Jun 13
+*map.txt*       For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2013 Jun 29


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ modes.
 :nm[ap]	{lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-n|		*:nm* *:nmap*
 :vm[ap]	{lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-v|		*:vm* *:vmap*
 :xm[ap]	{lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-x|		*:xm* *:xmap*
-:smap	{lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-s|		      *:smap*
+:smap	{lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-s|		    *:smap*
 :om[ap]	{lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-o|		*:om* *:omap*
 :map!	{lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-ic|		*:map!*
 :im[ap]	{lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-i|		*:im* *:imap*
@@ -159,9 +159,9 @@ type "a", then "bar" will get inserted.

 1.2 SPECIAL ARGUMENTS					*:map-arguments*

-"<buffer>", "<silent>", "<special>", "<script>", "<expr>" and "<unique>" can
-be used in any order.  They must appear right after the command, before any
-other arguments.
+"<buffer>", "<nowait>", "<silent>", "<special>", "<script>", "<expr>" and
+"<unique>" can be used in any order.  They must appear right after the
+command, before any other arguments.

 				*:map-local* *:map-<buffer>* *E224* *E225*
 If the first argument to one of these commands is "<buffer>" the mapping will
@@ -169,12 +169,23 @@ be effective in the current buffer only.  Example: >
 	:map <buffer>  ,w  /[.,;]<CR>
 Then you can map ",w" to something else in another buffer: >
 	:map <buffer>  ,w  /[#&!]<CR>
-The local buffer mappings are used before the global ones.
+The local buffer mappings are used before the global ones.  See <nowait> below
+to make a short local mapping not taking effect when a longer global one
+exists.
 The "<buffer>" argument can also be used to clear mappings: >
 	:unmap <buffer> ,w
 	:mapclear <buffer>
 Local mappings are also cleared when a buffer is deleted, but not when it is
 unloaded.  Just like local option values.
+Also see |map-precedence|.
+
+						*:map-<nowait>* *:map-nowait*
+When defining a buffer-local mapping for "," there may be a global mapping
+that starts with ",".  Then you need to type another character for Vim to know
+whether to use the "," mapping or the longer one.  To avoid this add the
+<nowait> argument.  Then the mapping will be used when it matches, Vim does
+not wait for more characters to be typed.  However, if the characters were
+already type they are used.

 						*:map-<silent>* *:map-silent*
 To define a mapping which will not be echoed on the command line, add
@@ -228,7 +239,7 @@ text before the cursor and start omni completion when some condition is met.

 For abbreviations |v:char| is set to the character that was typed to trigger
 the abbreviation.  You can use this to decide how to expand the {lhs}.  You
-you should not either insert or change the v:char.
+should not either insert or change the v:char.

 Be very careful about side effects!  The expression is evaluated while
 obtaining characters, you may very well make the command dysfunctional.
@@ -237,11 +248,18 @@ For this reason the following is blocked:
 - Editing another buffer.
 - The |:normal| command.
 - Moving the cursor is allowed, but it is restored afterwards.
- You can use getchar(), but the existing typeahead isn't seen and new
-  typeahead is discarded.
 If you want the mapping to do any of these let the returned characters do
 that.

+You can use getchar(), it consumes typeahead if there is any. E.g., if you
+have these mappings: >
+  inoremap <expr> <C-L> nr2char(getchar())
+  inoremap <expr> <C-L>x "foo"
+If you now type CTRL-L nothing happens yet, Vim needs the next character to
+decide what mapping to use.  If you type 'x' the second mapping is used and
+"foo" is inserted.  If you type any other key the first mapping is used,
+getchar() gets the typed key and returns it.
+
 Here is an example that inserts a list number that increases: >
 	let counter = 0
 	inoremap <expr> <C-L> ListItem()
@@ -520,7 +538,7 @@ mappings.
 <LocalLeader> is just like <Leader>, except that it uses "maplocalleader"
 instead of "mapleader".  <LocalLeader> is to be used for mappings which are
 local to a buffer.  Example: >
-      :map <LocalLeader>q  \DoItNow
+      :map <buffer> <LocalLeader>A  oanother line<Esc>
 <
 In a global plugin <Leader> should be used and in a filetype plugin
 <LocalLeader>.  "mapleader" and "maplocalleader" can be equal.  Although, if
@@ -544,6 +562,7 @@ construct can be used:
 	<Char-123>	character 123
 	<Char-033>	character 27
 	<Char-0x7f>	character 127
+	<S-Char-114>    character 114 ('r') shifted ('R')
 This is useful to specify a (multi-byte) character in a 'keymap' file.
 Upper and lowercase differences are ignored.

@@ -646,6 +665,17 @@ option).  After that it assumes that the 'q' is to be interpreted as such.  If
 you type slowly, or your system is slow, reset the 'timeout' option.  Then you
 might want to set the 'ttimeout' option.

+                            				*map-precedence*
+Buffer-local mappings (defined using |:map-<buffer>|) take precedence over
+global mappings.  When a buffer-local mapping is the same as a global mapping,
+Vim will use the buffer-local mapping.  In addition, Vim will use a complete
+mapping immediately if it was defined with <nowait>, even if a longer mapping
+has the same prefix.  For example, given the following two mappings: >
+    :map <buffer> <nowait> \a   :echo "Local \a"<CR>
+    :map                   \abc :echo "Global \abc"<CR>
+When typing \a the buffer-local mapping will be used immediately.  Vim will
+not wait for more characters to see if the user might be typing \abc.
+
 							*map-keys-fails*
 There are situations where key codes might not be recognized:
 - Vim can only read part of the key code.  Mostly this is only the first
@@ -1180,7 +1210,7 @@ reported if any are supplied).  However, it is possible to specify that the
 command can take arguments, using the -nargs attribute.  Valid cases are:

 	-nargs=0    No arguments are allowed (the default)
-	-nargs=1    Exactly one argument is require, it includes spaces 
+	-nargs=1    Exactly one argument is required, it includes spaces 
 	-nargs=*    Any number of arguments are allowed (0, 1, or many),
 		    separated by white space
 	-nargs=?    0 or 1 arguments are allowed
@@ -1211,25 +1241,33 @@ completion can be enabled:

 	-complete=augroup	autocmd groups
 	-complete=buffer	buffer names
+	-complete=behave	:behave suboptions
+	-complete=color		color schemes
 	-complete=command	Ex command (and arguments)
+	-complete=compiler	compilers
 	-complete=cscope	|:cscope| suboptions
 	-complete=dir		directory names
 	-complete=environment	environment variable names
 	-complete=event		autocommand events
 	-complete=expression	Vim expression
 	-complete=file		file and directory names
+	-complete=file_in_path	file and directory names in |'path'|
 	-complete=filetype	filetype names |'filetype'|
 	-complete=function	function name
 	-complete=help		help subjects
 	-complete=highlight	highlight groups
+	-complete=history	:history suboptions
+	-complete=locale	locale names (as output of locale -a)
 	-complete=mapping	mapping name
 	-complete=menu		menus
 	-complete=option	options
 	-complete=shellcmd	Shell command
 	-complete=sign		|:sign| suboptions
 	-complete=syntax	syntax file names |'syntax'|
+	-complete=syntime	|:syntime| suboptions
 	-complete=tag		tags
 	-complete=tag_listfiles	tags, file names are shown when CTRL-D is hit
+	-complete=user		user names
 	-complete=var		user variables
 	-complete=custom,{func} custom completion, defined via {func}
 	-complete=customlist,{func} custom completion, defined via {func}
--- a/runtime/doc/mbyte.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/mbyte.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*mbyte.txt*     For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Feb 01
+*mbyte.txt*     For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2013 May 18


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar et al.
@@ -48,9 +48,9 @@ COMPILING
 If you already have a compiled Vim program, check if the |+multi_byte| feature
 is included.  The |:version| command can be used for this.

-If +multi_byte is not included, you should compile Vim with "big" features.
-You can further tune what features are included.  See the INSTALL files in the
-source directory.
+If +multi_byte is not included, you should compile Vim with "normal", "big" or
+"huge" features.  You can further tune what features are included.  See the
+INSTALL files in the source directory.


 LOCALE
@@ -475,7 +475,7 @@ Useful utilities for converting the charset:
 	|charset| converter.  Supported |charset|: ISO-2022-CN, ISO-2022-JP,
 	ISO-2022-KR, EUC-CN, EUC-JP, EUC-KR, EUC-TW, UTF-7, UTF-8, ISO-8859
 	series, Shift_JIS, Big5 and HZ.  Lv can be found at:
-	http://www.ff.iij4u.or.jp/~nrt/freeware/lv4495.tar.gz
+	http://www.ff.iij4u.or.jp/~nrt/lv/index.html


 							*mbyte-conversion*
@@ -615,7 +615,7 @@ Each field means:
 	    charsets, such as JIS X 0208, if this field is 0, code points has
 	    the same value as GL, and GR if 1.

-For example, in case of a 14 dots font corresponding to JIS X 0208, it is
+For example, in case of a 16 dots font corresponding to JIS X 0208, it is
 written like:
    -misc-fixed-medium-r-normal--16-110-100-100-c-160-jisx0208.1990-0

@@ -797,8 +797,8 @@ is suitable for complex input, such as CJK.
  number of Hira-gana characters are 76.  So, first, we pre-input text as
  pronounced in Hira-gana, second, we convert Hira-gana to Kanji or Kata-Kana,
  if needed.  There are some Kana-Kanji conversion server: jserver
-  (distributed with Wnn, see below) and canna.  Canna could be found at:
-  ftp://ftp.nec.co.jp/pub/Canna/ (no longer works).
+  (distributed with Wnn, see below) and canna.  Canna can be found at:
+  http://canna.sourceforge.jp/

 There is a good input system: Wnn4.2.  Wnn 4.2 contains,
    xwnmo (|IM-server|)
@@ -857,7 +857,7 @@ Use the RPM or port for your system.


 USING XIM			*multibyte-input* *E284* *E286* *E287* *E288*
-				*E285* *E291* *E292* *E290* *E289*
+				*E285* *E289*

 Note that Display and Input are independent.  It is possible to see your
 language even though you have no input method for it.  But when your Display
@@ -1067,7 +1067,7 @@ The actual mappings are in the lines below "loadkeymap".  In the example "a"
 is mapped to "A" and "b" to "B".  Thus the first item is mapped to the second
 item.  This is done for each line, until the end of the file.
 These items are exactly the same as what can be used in a |:lnoremap| command,
-using "<buffer>" to make the mappings local to the buffer..
+using "<buffer>" to make the mappings local to the buffer.
 You can check the result with this command: >
 	:lmap
 The two items must be separated by white space.  You cannot include white
@@ -1085,6 +1085,13 @@ Since the mapping is defined with |:lnoremap| the resulting quote will not be
 used for the start of another character.
 The "accents" keymap uses this.				*keymap-accents*

+The first column can also be in |<>| form:
+	<C-c>		Ctrl-C
+	<A-c>		Alt-c
+	<A-C>		Alt-C
+Note that the Alt mappings may not work, depending on your keyboard and
+terminal.
+
 Although it's possible to have more than one character in the second column,
 this is unusual.  But you can use various ways to specify the character: >
 	A	a		literal character
@@ -1306,8 +1313,8 @@ character.  However, search patterns may not match on an overlong sequence.
 character.)  An exception is NUL (zero) which is displayed as "<00>".

 In the file and buffer the full range of Unicode characters can be used (31
-bits).  However, displaying only works for 16 bit characters, and only for the
-characters present in the selected font.
+bits).  However, displaying only works for the characters present in the
+selected font.

 Useful commands:
 - "ga" shows the decimal, hexadecimal and octal value of the character under
--- a/runtime/doc/message.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/message.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*message.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 May 10
+*message.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2013 Feb 23


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -730,7 +730,11 @@ Vim cannot create a temporary file.
  Can't open file {filename}
  Can't read file {filename}

-Vim cannot read a temporary file.
+Vim cannot read a temporary file.  Especially on Windows, this can be caused
+by wrong escaping of special characters for cmd.exe; the approach was
+changed with patch 7.3.443.  Try using |shellescape()| for all shell arguments
+given to |system()|, or explicitly add escaping with ^.  Also see
+'shellxquote' and 'shellxescape'.

 							*E464*  >
  Ambiguous use of user-defined command
--- a/runtime/doc/mlang.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/mlang.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*mlang.txt*     For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Dec 11
+*mlang.txt*     For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Jan 15


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ use of "-" and "_".
 			system.  Some systems accept aliases like "en" or
 			"en_US", but some only accept the full specification
 			like "en_US.ISO_8859-1".  On Unix systems you can use
-			the this command to see what locales are supported: >
+			this command to see what locales are supported: >
 				:!locale -a
 <			With the "messages" argument the language used for
 			messages is set.  This can be different when you want,
--- a/runtime/doc/motion.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/motion.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*motion.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Jun 02
+*motion.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2013 Mar 07


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ or change text.  The following operators are available:
 	|>|	>	shift right
 	|<|	<	shift left
 	|zf|	zf	define a fold
-	|g@|    g@      call function set with the 'operatorfunc' option
+	|g@|	g@	call function set with the 'operatorfunc' option

 If the motion includes a count and the operator also had a count before it,
 the two counts are multiplied.  For example: "2d3w" deletes six words.
@@ -104,13 +104,14 @@ strokes and has limited redo functionality.  See the chapter on Visual mode
 |Visual-mode|.

 You can use a ":" command for a motion.  For example "d:call FindEnd()".
-But this can't be redone with "." if the command is more than one line.
+But this can't be repeated with "." if the command is more than one line.
 This can be repeated: >
 	d:call search("f")<CR>
 This cannot be repeated: >
 	d:if 1<CR>
 	   call search("f")<CR>
 	endif<CR>
+Note that when using ":" any motion becomes characterwise exclusive.


 FORCING A MOTION TO BE LINEWISE, CHARACTERWISE OR BLOCKWISE
@@ -269,11 +270,11 @@ T{char}			Till after [count]'th occurrence of {char} to the
 			{char} can be entered like with the |f| command.

 							*;*
-;			Repeat latest f, t, F or T [count] times.
+;			Repeat latest f, t, F or T [count] times. See |cpo-;|

 							*,*
 ,			Repeat latest f, t, F or T in opposite direction
-			[count] times.
+			[count] times. See also |cpo-;|

 ==============================================================================
 3. Up-down motions					*up-down-motions*
@@ -326,6 +327,7 @@ gg			Goto line [count], default first line, on the first
 			non-blank character |linewise|.  If 'startofline' not
 			set, keep the same column.

+							*:[range]*
 :[range]		Set the cursor on the last line number in [range].
 			[range] can also be just one line number, e.g., ":1"
 			or ":'m".
@@ -513,6 +515,8 @@ always select less text than the "a" commands.
 These commands are {not in Vi}.
 These commands are not available when the |+textobjects| feature has been
 disabled at compile time.
+Also see `gn` and `gN`, operating on the last search pattern.
+
 							*v_aw* *aw*
 aw			"a word", select [count] words (see |word|).
 			Leading or trailing white space is included, but not
@@ -689,6 +693,7 @@ movement commands are used.
 	"daw"	delete a word				*daw*
 	"diW"	delete inner WORD (see |WORD|)		*diW*
 	"daW"	delete a WORD (see |WORD|)		*daW*
+	"dgn"   delete the next search pattern match    *dgn*
 	"dd"	delete one line				|dd|
 	"dis"	delete inner sentence			*dis*
 	"das"	delete a sentence			*das*
@@ -750,6 +755,13 @@ m[  or  m]		Set the |'[| or |']| mark.  Useful when an operator is
 			to be simulated by multiple commands.  (does not move
 			the cursor, this is not a motion command).

+						*m<* *m>*
+m<  or  m>		Set the |'<| or |'>| mark.  Useful to change what the
+			`gv` command selects.  (does not move the cursor, this
+			is not a motion command).
+			Note that the Visual mode cannot be set, only the
+			start and end position.
+
 						*:ma* *:mark* *E191*
 :[range]ma[rk] {a-zA-Z'}
 			Set mark {a-zA-Z'} at last line number in [range],
@@ -1017,8 +1029,6 @@ CTRL-O			Go to [count] Older cursor position in jump list
 <Tab>		or					*CTRL-I* *<Tab>*
 CTRL-I			Go to [count] newer cursor position in jump list
 			(not a motion command).
-			In a |quickfix-window| it takes you to the position of
-			the error under the cursor.
 			{not in Vi}
 			{not available without the |+jumplist| feature}

--- a/runtime/doc/netbeans.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/netbeans.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*netbeans.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Sep 29
+*netbeans.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Jan 26


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Gordon Prieur et al.
@@ -263,6 +263,12 @@ The messages are currently sent over a socket.  Since the messages are in
 plain UTF-8 text this protocol could also be used with any other communication
 mechanism.

+Netbeans messages are processed when Vim is idle, waiting for user input.
+When Vim is run in non-interactive mode, for example when running an automated
+test case that sources a Vim script, the idle loop may not be called often
+enough. In that case, insert |:sleep| commands in the Vim script. The |:sleep|
+command does invoke Netbeans messages processing.
+
 6.1 Kinds of messages		|nb-messages|
 6.2 Terms			|nb-terms|
 6.3 Commands			|nb-commands|
@@ -833,11 +839,16 @@ These errors occur when a message violates the protocol:
 			signs.

 							*:nbkey*
-:nb[key] {key}		Pass the {key} to the Vim Controller for processing
-
-When a hot-key has been installed with the specialKeys command, this command
-can be used to generate a hotkey messages to the Vim Controller. The events
-newDotAndMark, keyCommand and keyAtPos are generated (in this order).
+:nb[key] {key}		Pass the {key} to the Vim Controller for processing.
+			When a hot-key has been installed with the specialKeys
+			command, this command can be used to generate a hotkey
+			message to the Vim Controller.
+			This command can also be used to pass any text to the
+			Vim  Controller. It is used by Pyclewn, for example,
+			to build the complete set of gdb commands as Vim user
+			commands.
+			The events newDotAndMark, keyCommand and keyAtPos are
+			generated (in this order).


 ==============================================================================
--- a/runtime/doc/options.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/options.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*options.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Jun 12
+*options.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2013 Jun 29


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -277,8 +277,10 @@ Now the 'list' option is not set, because ":set nolist" resets the global
 value, ":setlocal list" only changes the local value and ":e two" gets the
 global value.  Note that if you do this next: >
 	:e one
-You will not get back the 'list' value as it was the last time you edited
-"one".  The options local to a window are not remembered for each buffer.
+You will get back the 'list' value as it was the last time you edited "one".
+The options local to a window are remembered for each buffer.  This also
+happens when the buffer is not loaded, but they are lost when the buffer is
+wiped out |:bwipe|.

 							*:setl* *:setlocal*
 :setl[ocal] ...		Like ":set" but set only the value local to the
@@ -301,9 +303,8 @@ You will not get back the 'list' value as it was the last time you edited
 			copying the value.
 			{not in Vi}

-:se[t] {option}<	Set the local value of {option} to its global value by
-			making it empty.  Only makes sense for |global-local|
-			options.
+:se[t] {option}<	For |global-local| options: Remove the local value of
+			{option}, so that the global value will be used.
 			{not in Vi}

 							*:setg* *:setglobal*
@@ -401,6 +402,9 @@ On Unix systems the form "${HOME}" can be used too.  The name between {} can
 contain non-id characters then.  Note that if you want to use this for the
 "gf" command, you need to add the '{' and '}' characters to 'isfname'.

+On MS-Windows, if $HOME is not defined as an environment variable, then
+at runtime Vim will set it to the expansion of $HOMEDRIVE$HOMEPATH.
+
 NOTE: expanding environment variables and "~/" is only done with the ":set"
 command, not when assigning a value to an option with ":let".

@@ -478,39 +482,42 @@ to set options automatically for one or more files:
 There are two forms of modelines.  The first form:
 	[text]{white}{vi:|vim:|ex:}[white]{options}

-[text]		any text or empty
-{white}		at least one blank character (<Space> or <Tab>)
-{vi:|vim:|ex:}	the string "vi:", "vim:" or "ex:"
-[white]		optional white space
-{options}	a list of option settings, separated with white space or ':',
-		where each part between ':' is the argument for a ":set"
-		command (can be empty)
+[text]			any text or empty
+{white}			at least one blank character (<Space> or <Tab>)
+{vi:|vim:|ex:}		the string "vi:", "vim:" or "ex:"
+[white]			optional white space
+{options}		a list of option settings, separated with white space
+			or ':', where each part between ':' is the argument
+			for a ":set" command (can be empty)

-Example:
+Examples:
   vi:noai:sw=3 ts=6 ~
+   vim: tw=77 ~

 The second form (this is compatible with some versions of Vi):

-	[text]{white}{vi:|vim:|ex:}[white]se[t] {options}:[text]
+	[text]{white}{vi:|vim:|Vim:|ex:}[white]se[t] {options}:[text]

-[text]		any text or empty
-{white}		at least one blank character (<Space> or <Tab>)
-{vi:|vim:|ex:}	the string "vi:", "vim:" or "ex:"
-[white]		optional white space
-se[t]		the string "set " or "se " (note the space)
-{options}	a list of options, separated with white space, which is the
-		argument for a ":set" command
-:		a colon
-[text]		any text or empty
+[text]			any text or empty
+{white}			at least one blank character (<Space> or <Tab>)
+{vi:|vim:|Vim:|ex:}	the string "vi:", "vim:", "Vim:" or "ex:"
+[white]			optional white space
+se[t]			the string "set " or "se " (note the space); When
+			"Vim" is used it must be "set".
+{options}		a list of options, separated with white space, which
+			is the argument for a ":set" command
+:			a colon
+[text]			any text or empty

-Example:
+Examples:
   /* vim: set ai tw=75: */ ~
+   /* Vim: set ai tw=75: */ ~

-The white space before {vi:|vim:|ex:} is required.  This minimizes the chance
-that a normal word like "lex:" is caught.  There is one exception: "vi:" and
-"vim:" can also be at the start of the line (for compatibility with version
-3.0).  Using "ex:" at the start of the line will be ignored (this could be
-short for "example:").
+The white space before {vi:|vim:|Vim:|ex:} is required.  This minimizes the
+chance that a normal word like "lex:" is caught.  There is one exception:
+"vi:" and "vim:" can also be at the start of the line (for compatibility with
+version 3.0).  Using "ex:" at the start of the line will be ignored (this
+could be short for "example:").

 							*modeline-local*
 The options are set like with ":setlocal": The new value only applies to the
@@ -526,7 +533,7 @@ in another window.  But window-local options will be set.

 							*modeline-version*
 If the modeline is only to be used for some versions of Vim, the version
-number can be specified where "vim:" is used:
+number can be specified where "vim:" or "Vim:" is used:
 	vim{vers}:	version {vers} or later
 	vim<{vers}:	version before {vers}
 	vim={vers}:	version {vers}
@@ -697,6 +704,10 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	when the system locale is set to one of CJK locales.  See Unicode
 	Standard Annex #11 (http://www.unicode.org/reports/tr11).

+	Vim may set this option automatically at startup time when Vim is
+	compiled with the |+termresponse| feature and if |t_u7| is set to the
+	escape sequence to request cursor position report.
+
 			*'antialias'* *'anti'* *'noantialias'* *'noanti'*
 'antialias' 'anti'	boolean (default: off)
 			global
@@ -742,7 +753,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	- Reset the 'rightleft' option.
 	- Disable the use of 'keymap' (without changing its value).
 	Note that 'arabicshape' and 'delcombine' are not reset (it is a global
-	option.
+	option).
 	Also see |arabic.txt|.

 					*'arabicshape'* *'arshape'*
@@ -754,7 +765,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			feature}
 	When on and 'termbidi' is off, the required visual character
 	corrections that need to take place for displaying the Arabic language
-	take affect.  Shaping, in essence, gets enabled; the term is a broad
+	take effect.  Shaping, in essence, gets enabled; the term is a broad
 	one which encompasses:
 	  a) the changing/morphing of characters based on their location
 	     within a word (initial, medial, final and stand-alone).
@@ -984,7 +995,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	- The backup file will be created in the first directory in the list
 	  where this is possible.  The directory must exist, Vim will not
 	  create it for you.
-	- Empty means that no backup file will be created ('patchmode' is
+	- Empty means that no backup file will be created ( 'patchmode' is
 	  impossible!).  Writing may fail because of this.
 	- A directory "." means to put the backup file in the same directory
 	  as the edited file.
@@ -1045,6 +1056,11 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	When $TMPDIR, $TMP or $TEMP is not defined, it is not used for the
 	default value.  "/tmp/*" is only used for Unix.

+	WARNING: Not having a backup file means that when Vim fails to write
+	your buffer correctly and then, for whatever reason, Vim exits, you
+	lose both the original file and what you were writing.  Only disable
+	backups if you don't care about losing the file.
+
 	Note that environment variables are not expanded.  If you want to use
 	$HOME you must expand it explicitly, e.g.: >
 		:let backupskip = escape(expand('$HOME'), '\') . '/tmp/*'
@@ -1100,8 +1116,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	Vim does not try to send a message to an external debugger (Netbeans
 	or Sun Workshop).

-	The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see
-	|sandbox-option|.
+	The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a
+	modeline, see |sandbox-option|.

 	It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
 	evaluating 'balloonexpr' |textlock|.
@@ -1217,7 +1233,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			|:bwipeout|

 	CAREFUL: when "unload", "delete" or "wipe" is used changes in a buffer
-	are lost without a warning.
+	are lost without a warning.  Also, these values may break autocommands
+	that switch between buffers temporarily.
 	This option is used together with 'buftype' and 'swapfile' to specify
 	special kinds of buffers.   See |special-buffers|.

@@ -1444,6 +1461,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	This option is a list of comma separated names.
 	These names are recognized:

+						*clipboard-unnamed*
 	unnamed		When included, Vim will use the clipboard register '*'
 			for all yank, delete, change and put operations which
 			would normally go to the unnamed register.  When a
@@ -1453,15 +1471,20 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			explicitly accessed using the "* notation.  Also see
 			|gui-clipboard|.

-	unnamedplus	A variant of "unnamed" flag which uses the clipboard
-			register '+' (|quoteplus|) instead of register '*' for
-			all operations except yank.  Yank shall copy the text
-			into register '+' and also into '*' when "unnamed" is
-			included.
+						*clipboard-unnamedplus*
+	unnamedplus	A variant of the "unnamed" flag which uses the
+			clipboard register '+' (|quoteplus|) instead of
+			register '*' for all yank, delete, change and put
+			operations which would normally go to the unnamed
+			register.  When "unnamed" is also included to the
+			option, yank operations (but not delete, change or
+			put) will additionally copy the text into register
+			'*'.
 			Only available with the |+X11| feature.
 			Availability can be checked with: >
 				if has('unnamedplus')
 <
+						*clipboard-autoselect*
 	autoselect	Works like the 'a' flag in 'guioptions': If present,
 			then whenever Visual mode is started, or the Visual
 			area extended, Vim tries to become the owner of the
@@ -1473,9 +1496,16 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			"autoselect" flag is used.
 			Also applies to the modeless selection.

+						*clipboard-autoselectplus*
+	autoselectplus  Like "autoselect" but using the + register instead of
+			the * register.  Compare to the 'P' flag in
+			'guioptions'.
+
+						*clipboard-autoselectml*
 	autoselectml	Like "autoselect", but for the modeless selection
 			only.  Compare to the 'A' flag in 'guioptions'.

+						*clipboard-html*
 	html		When the clipboard contains HTML, use this when
 			pasting.  When putting text on the clipboard, mark it
 			as HTML.  This works to copy rendered HTML from
@@ -1486,6 +1516,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			Only supported for GTK version 2 and later.
 			Only available with the |+multi_byte| feature.

+						*clipboard-exclude*
 	exclude:{pattern}
 			Defines a pattern that is matched against the name of
 			the terminal 'term'.  If there is a match, no
@@ -1681,7 +1712,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	when CTRL-P or CTRL-N are used.  It is also used for whole-line
 	completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-L|.  It indicates the type of completion
 	and the places to scan.  It is a comma separated list of flags:
-	.	scan the current buffer ('wrapscan' is ignored)
+	.	scan the current buffer ( 'wrapscan' is ignored)
 	w	scan buffers from other windows
 	b	scan other loaded buffers that are in the buffer list
 	u	scan the unloaded buffers that are in the buffer list
@@ -2117,6 +2148,12 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 								*cpo->*
 		>	When appending to a register, put a line break before
 			the appended text.
+								*cpo-;*
+		;	When using |,| or |;| to repeat the last |t| search
+			and the cursor is right in front of the searched
+			character, the cursor won't move. When not included,
+			the cursor would skip over it and jump to the
+			following occurrence.

 	POSIX flags.  These are not included in the Vi default value, except
 	when $VIM_POSIX was set on startup. |posix|
@@ -2209,7 +2246,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	Specifies whether to use quickfix window to show cscope results.
 	See |cscopequickfix|.

-						*'cscoperelative'* *'csre'*
+		*'cscoperelative'* *'csre'* *'nocscoperelative'* *'nocsre'*
 'cscoperelative' 'csre' boolean (default off)
 			global
 			{not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
@@ -2840,7 +2877,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	See |file-formats| and |file-read|.
 	For the character encoding of the file see 'fileencoding'.
 	When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformat' is ignored, file I/O
-	works like it was set to "unix'.
+	works like it was set to "unix".
 	This option is set automatically when starting to edit a file and
 	'fileformats' is not empty and 'binary' is off.
 	When this option is set, after starting to edit a file, the 'modified'
@@ -2909,6 +2946,14 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
 	set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.

+		*'fileignorecase'* *'fic'* *'nofileignorecase'* *'nofic'*
+'fileignorecase' 'fic'	boolean	(default on for systems where case in file
+				 names is normally ignored)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	When set case is ignored when using file names and directories.
+	See 'wildignorecase' for only ignoring case when doing completion.
+
 					*'filetype'* *'ft'*
 'filetype' 'ft'		string (default: "")
 			local to buffer
@@ -3026,8 +3071,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	The expression used for when 'foldmethod' is "expr".  It is evaluated
 	for each line to obtain its fold level.  See |fold-expr|.

-	The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see
-	|sandbox-option|.
+	The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| if set from a
+	modeline, see |sandbox-option|.
 	This option can't be set from a |modeline| when the 'diff' option is
 	on.

@@ -3169,8 +3214,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	An expression which is used to specify the text displayed for a closed
 	fold.  See |fold-foldtext|.

-	The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see
-	|sandbox-option|.
+	The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| if set from a
+	modeline, see |sandbox-option|.

 	It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
 	evaluating 'foldtext' |textlock|.
@@ -3215,8 +3260,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	format function will be used |C-indenting|.
 	Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  See |option-backslash|
 	about including spaces and backslashes.
-	The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see
-	|sandbox-option|.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.

 						*'formatexpr'* *'fex'*
 'formatexpr' 'fex'	string (default "")
@@ -3249,9 +3294,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	When the expression evaluates to non-zero Vim will fall back to using
 	the internal format mechanism.

-	The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see
-	|sandbox-option|.  That stops the option from working, since changing
-	the buffer text is not allowed.
+	The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a
+	modeline, see |sandbox-option|.  That stops the option from working,
+	since changing the buffer text is not allowed.

 						*'fsync'* *'fs'*
 'fsync' 'fs'		boolean	(default on)
@@ -3535,6 +3580,10 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	to set 'guifontwide' at all unless you want to override the choice
 	made by Pango/Xft.

+	Windows +multibyte only:		*guifontwide_win_mbyte*
+
+	If set and valid, 'guifontwide' is used for IME instead of 'guifont'.
+
 						*'guiheadroom'* *'ghr'*
 'guiheadroom' 'ghr'	number	(default 50)
 			global
@@ -3548,8 +3597,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	screen.

 						*'guioptions'* *'go'*
-'guioptions' 'go'	string	(default "gmrLtT"   (MS-Windows),
-					 "agimrLtT" (GTK, Motif and Athena))
+'guioptions' 'go'	string	(default "egmrLtT"   (MS-Windows),
+					 "aegimrLtT" (GTK, Motif and Athena))
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 			{only available when compiled with GUI enabled}
@@ -3575,6 +3624,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		windowing system's global selection unless explicitly told to
 		by a yank or delete operation for the "* register.
 		The same applies to the modeless selection.
+								*'go-P'*
+	  'P'	Like autoselect but using the "+ register instead of the "*
+	  	register.
 								*'go-A'*
 	  'A'	Autoselect for the modeless selection.  Like 'a', but only
 		applies to the modeless selection.
@@ -3763,9 +3815,10 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'highlight' 'hl'	string	(default (as a single string):
 				     "8:SpecialKey,@:NonText,d:Directory,
 				     e:ErrorMsg,i:IncSearch,l:Search,m:MoreMsg,
-				     M:ModeMsg,n:LineNr,r:Question,
-				     s:StatusLine,S:StatusLineNC,c:VertSplit,
-				     t:Title,v:Visual,w:WarningMsg,W:WildMenu,
+				     M:ModeMsg,n:LineNr,N:CursorLineNr,
+				     r:Question,s:StatusLine,S:StatusLineNC,
+				     c:VertSplit, t:Title,v:Visual,
+				     w:WarningMsg,W:WildMenu,
 				     f:Folded,F:FoldColumn,A:DiffAdd,
 				     C:DiffChange,D:DiffDelete,T:DiffText,
 				     >:SignColumn,B:SpellBad,P:SpellCap,
@@ -3791,6 +3844,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	|hl-ModeMsg|	 M  Mode (e.g., "-- INSERT --")
 	|hl-LineNr|	 n  line number for ":number" and ":#" commands, and
 			    when 'number' or 'relativenumber' option is set.
+	|hl-CursorLineNr|  N like n for when 'cursorline' or 'relativenumber' is
+			    set.
 	|hl-Question|	 r  |hit-enter| prompt and yes/no questions
 	|hl-StatusLine|	 s  status line of current window |status-line|
 	|hl-StatusLineNC| S  status lines of not-current windows
@@ -3852,14 +3907,16 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	are not applied.
 	See also: 'incsearch' and |:match|.
 	When you get bored looking at the highlighted matches, you can turn it
-	off with |:nohlsearch|.  As soon as you use a search command, the
-	highlighting comes back.
+	off with |:nohlsearch|.  This does not change the option value, as
+	soon as you use a search command, the highlighting comes back.
 	'redrawtime' specifies the maximum time spent on finding matches.
 	When the search pattern can match an end-of-line, Vim will try to
 	highlight all of the matched text.  However, this depends on where the
 	search starts.  This will be the first line in the window or the first
 	line below a closed fold.  A match in a previous line which is not
 	drawn may not continue in a newly drawn line.
+	You can specify whether the highlight status is restored on startup
+	with the 'h' flag in 'viminfo' |viminfo-h|.
 	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

 						*'history'* *'hi'*
@@ -3939,6 +3996,26 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	Can be overruled by using "\c" or "\C" in the pattern, see
 	|/ignorecase|.

+						*'imactivatefunc'* *'imaf'*
+'imactivatefunc' 'imaf'	string (default "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with |+xim| and
+			|+GUI_GTK|}
+	This option specifies a function that will be called to
+	activate/inactivate Input Method.
+
+	Example: >
+		function ImActivateFunc(active)
+		  if a:active
+		    ... do something
+		  else
+		    ... do something
+		  endif
+		  " return value is not used
+		endfunction
+		set imactivatefunc=ImActivateFunc
+<
 						*'imactivatekey'* *'imak'*
 'imactivatekey' 'imak'	string (default "")
 			global
@@ -4035,6 +4112,24 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	The value 0 may not work correctly with Athena and Motif with some XIM
 	methods.  Use 'imdisable' to disable XIM then.

+						*'imstatusfunc'* *'imsf'*
+'imstatusfunc' 'imsf'	string (default "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with |+xim| and
+			|+GUI_GTK|}
+	This option specifies a function that is called to obtain the status
+	of Input Method.  It must return a positive number when IME is active.
+
+	Example: >
+		function ImStatusFunc()
+		  let is_active = ...do something
+		  return is_active ? 1 : 0
+		endfunction
+		set imstatusfunc=ImStatusFunc
+<
+	NOTE: This function is invoked very often.  Keep it fast.
+
 						*'include'* *'inc'*
 'include' 'inc'		string	(default "^\s*#\s*include")
 			global or local to buffer |global-local|
@@ -4068,8 +4163,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	found.  Allows doing "gf" on the name after an 'include' statement.
 	Also used for |<cfile>|.

-	The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see
-	|sandbox-option|.
+	The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a
+	modeline, see |sandbox-option|.

 	It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
 	evaluating 'includeexpr' |textlock|.
@@ -4133,8 +4228,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	See |indent-expression|.
 	NOTE: This option is made empty when 'compatible' is set.

-	The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see
-	|sandbox-option|.
+	The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a
+	modeline, see |sandbox-option|.

 	It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
 	evaluating 'indentexpr' |textlock|.
@@ -4563,24 +4658,31 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			{not in Vi}
 	Strings to use in 'list' mode and for the |:list| command.  It is a
 	comma separated list of string settings.
+	  						*lcs-eol*
 	  eol:c		Character to show at the end of each line.  When
 			omitted, there is no extra character at the end of the
 			line.
+	  						*lcs-tab*
 	  tab:xy	Two characters to be used to show a tab.  The first
 			char is used once.  The second char is repeated to
 			fill the space that the tab normally occupies.
 			"tab:>-" will show a tab that takes four spaces as
 			">---".  When omitted, a tab is show as ^I.
+	  						*lcs-trail*
 	  trail:c	Character to show for trailing spaces.  When omitted,
 			trailing spaces are blank.
+	  						*lcs-extends*
 	  extends:c	Character to show in the last column, when 'wrap' is
 			off and the line continues beyond the right of the
 			screen.
+	  						*lcs-precedes*
 	  precedes:c	Character to show in the first column, when 'wrap'
 			is off and there is text preceding the character
 			visible in the first column.
+	  						*lcs-conceal*
 	  conceal:c	Character to show in place of concealed text, when
 			'conceallevel' is set to 1.
+	  						*lcs-nbsp*
 	  nbsp:c	Character to show for a non-breakable space (character
 			0xA0, 160).  Left blank when omitted.

@@ -4674,8 +4776,10 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			local to buffer
 			{not in Vi}
 	Characters that form pairs.  The |%| command jumps from one to the
-	other.  Currently only single byte character pairs are allowed, and
-	they must be different.  The characters must be separated by a colon.
+	other.
+	Only character pairs are allowed that are different, thus you cannot
+	jump between two double quotes.
+	The characters must be separated by a colon.
 	The pairs must be separated by a comma.  Example for including '<' and
 	'>' (HTML): >
 		:set mps+=<:>
@@ -4855,6 +4959,10 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	   written.  A ":set nomodified" command also resets the original
 	   values to the current values and the 'modified' option will be
 	   reset.
+	This option is not set when a change is made to the buffer as the
+	result of a BufNewFile, BufRead/BufReadPost, BufWritePost,
+	FileAppendPost or VimLeave autocommand event.  See |gzip-example| for
+	an explanation.
 	When 'buftype' is "nowrite" or "nofile" this option may be set, but
 	will be ignored.

@@ -5043,7 +5151,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	respectively; see |CTRL-A| for more info on these commands.
 	alpha	If included, single alphabetical characters will be
 		incremented or decremented.  This is useful for a list with a
-		letter index a), b), etc.			*octal-number*
+		letter index a), b), etc.	  	*octal-nrformats*
 	octal	If included, numbers that start with a zero will be considered
 		to be octal.  Example: Using CTRL-A on "007" results in "010".
 	hex	If included, numbers starting with "0x" or "0X" will be
@@ -5063,8 +5171,20 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	number.
 	When a long, wrapped line doesn't start with the first character, '-'
 	characters are put before the number.
-	See |hl-LineNr| for the highlighting used for the number.
-	When setting this option, 'relativenumber' is reset.
+	See |hl-LineNr|  and |hl-CursorLineNr| for the highlighting used for
+	the number.
+						*number_relativenumber*
+	The 'relativenumber' option changes the displayed number to be
+	relative to the cursor.  Together with 'number' there are these
+	four combinations (cursor in line 3):
+
+              	'nonu'          'nu'            'nonu'          'nu'
+		'nornu'         'nornu'         'rnu'           'rnu'
+
+	    |apple          |  1 apple      |  2 apple      |  2 apple
+	    |pear           |  2 pear       |  1 pear       |  1 pear
+	    |nobody         |  3 nobody     |  0 nobody     |3   nobody
+	    |there          |  4 there      |  1 there      |  1 there

 						*'numberwidth'* *'nuw'*
 'numberwidth' 'nuw'	number	(Vim default: 4  Vi default: 8)
@@ -5096,6 +5216,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	invoked and what it should return.
 	This option is usually set by a filetype plugin:
 	|:filetype-plugin-on|
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.


 			    *'opendevice'* *'odev'* *'noopendevice'* *'noodev'*
@@ -5231,7 +5353,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	recognized as a compressed file.
 	Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.

-					*'path'* *'pa'* *E343* *E345* *E347*
+				*'path'* *'pa'* *E343* *E345* *E347* *E854*
 'path' 'pa'		string	(default on Unix: ".,/usr/include,,"
 				   on OS/2:	  ".,/emx/include,,"
 				   other systems: ".,,")
@@ -5446,6 +5568,19 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	matches will be highlighted.  This is used to avoid that Vim hangs
 	when using a very complicated pattern.

+						*'regexpengine'* *'re'*
+'regexpengine' 're'	number	(default 0)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	This selects the default regexp engine. |two-engines|
+	The possible values are:
+		0	automatic selection
+		1	old engine
+		2	NFA engine
+	Note that when using the NFA engine and the pattern contains something
+	that is not supported the pattern will not match.  This is only useful
+	for debugging the regexp engine.
+
 		*'relativenumber'* *'rnu'* *'norelativenumber'* *'nornu'*
 'relativenumber' 'rnu'	boolean	(default off)
 			local to window
@@ -5462,8 +5597,12 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	number.
 	When a long, wrapped line doesn't start with the first character, '-'
 	characters are put before the number.
-	See |hl-LineNr| for the highlighting used for the number.
-	When setting this option, 'number' is reset.
+	See |hl-LineNr|  and |hl-CursorLineNr| for the highlighting used for
+	the number.
+	
+	The number in front of the cursor line also depends on the value of
+	'number', see |number_relativenumber| for all combinations of the two
+	options.

 						*'remap'* *'noremap'*
 'remap'			boolean	(default on)
@@ -5884,16 +6023,20 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	security reasons.

 						*'shellcmdflag'* *'shcf'*
-'shellcmdflag' 'shcf'	string	(default: "-c", MS-DOS and Win32, when 'shell'
-					does not contain "sh" somewhere: "/c")
+'shellcmdflag' 'shcf'	string	(default: "-c";
+				 MS-DOS and Win32, when 'shell' does not
+				 contain "sh" somewhere: "/c")
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 	Flag passed to the shell to execute "!" and ":!" commands; e.g.,
 	"bash.exe -c ls" or "command.com /c dir".  For the MS-DOS-like
 	systems, the default is set according to the value of 'shell', to
 	reduce the need to set this option by the user.  It's not used for
-	OS/2 (EMX figures this out itself).  See |option-backslash| about
-	including spaces and backslashes.  See |dos-shell|.
+	OS/2 (EMX figures this out itself).
+	On Unix it can have more than one flag.  Each white space separated
+	part is passed as an argument to the shell command.
+	See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
+	Also see |dos-shell| for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
 	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
 	security reasons.

@@ -5996,7 +6139,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			{not in Vi}
 	When on, use temp files for shell commands.  When off use a pipe.
 	When using a pipe is not possible temp files are used anyway.
-	Currently a pipe is only supported on Unix.  You can check it with: >
+	Currently a pipe is only supported on Unix and MS-Windows 2K and
+	later.  You can check it with: >
 		:if has("filterpipe")
 <	The advantage of using a pipe is that nobody can read the temp file
 	and the 'shell' command does not need to support redirection.
@@ -6020,8 +6164,18 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	0 and 2: use "shell 'shellcmdflag' cmd" to start external commands
 	1 and 3: use "shell cmd" to start external commands

+						*'shellxescape'* *'sxe'*
+'shellxescape' 'sxe'	string	(default: "";
+				 for MS-DOS and MS-Windows: "\"&|<>()@^")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	When 'shellxquote' is set to "(" then the characters listed in this
+	option will be escaped with a '^' character.  This makes it possible
+	to execute most external commands with cmd.exe.
+
 						*'shellxquote'* *'sxq'*
 'shellxquote' 'sxq'	string	(default: "";
+					for Win32, when 'shell' is cmd.exe: "("
 					for Win32, when 'shell' contains "sh"
 					somewhere: "\""
 					for Unix, when using system(): "\"")
@@ -6031,11 +6185,15 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	the "!" and ":!" commands.  Includes the redirection.  See
 	'shellquote' to exclude the redirection.  It's probably not useful
 	to set both options.
-	This is an empty string by default.  Known to be useful for
-	third-party shells when using the Win32 version, such as the MKS Korn
-	Shell or bash, where it should be "\"".  The default is adjusted
-	according the value of 'shell', to reduce the need to set this option
-	by the user.  See |dos-shell|.
+	When the value is '(' then ')' is appended. When the value is '"('
+	then ')"' is appended.
+	When the value is '(' then also see 'shellxescape'.
+	This is an empty string by default on most systems, but is known to be
+	useful for on Win32 version, either for cmd.exe which automatically
+	strips off the first and last quote on a command, or 3rd-party shells
+	such as the MKS Korn Shell or bash, where it should be "\"".  The
+	default is adjusted according the value of 'shell', to reduce the need
+	to set this option by the user.  See |dos-shell|.
 	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
 	security reasons.

@@ -6053,6 +6211,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			local to buffer
 	Number of spaces to use for each step of (auto)indent.  Used for
 	|'cindent'|, |>>|, |<<|, etc.
+	When zero the 'ts' value will be used.  Use the |shiftwidth()|
+	function to get the effective shiftwidth value.

 						*'shortmess'* *'shm'*
 'shortmess' 'shm'	string	(Vim default "filnxtToO", Vi default: "",
@@ -6256,7 +6416,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	Override the 'ignorecase' option if the search pattern contains upper
 	case characters.  Only used when the search pattern is typed and
 	'ignorecase' option is on.  Used for the commands "/", "?", "n", "N",
-	":g" and ":s".  Not used for "*", "#", "gd", tag search, etc..  After
+	":g" and ":s".  Not used for "*", "#", "gd", tag search, etc.  After
 	"*" and "#" you can make 'smartcase' used by doing a "/" command,
 	recalling the search pattern from history and hitting <Enter>.
 	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
@@ -6316,6 +6476,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	of 8, while being able to edit like it is set to 'sts'.  However,
 	commands like "x" still work on the actual characters.
 	When 'sts' is zero, this feature is off.
+	When 'sts' is negative, the value of 'shiftwidth' is used.
 	'softtabstop' is set to 0 when the 'paste' option is set.
 	See also |ins-expandtab|.  When 'expandtab' is not set, the number of
 	spaces is minimized by using <Tab>s.
@@ -6529,6 +6690,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	evaluated and the result is used as the option value.  Example: >
 		:set statusline=%!MyStatusLine()
 <	The result can contain %{} items that will be evaluated too.
+	Note that the "%!" expression is evaluated in the context of the
+	current window and buffer, while %{} items are evaluated in the
+	context of the window that the statusline belongs to.

 	When there is error while evaluating the option then it will be made
 	empty to avoid further errors.  Otherwise screen updating would loop.
@@ -6590,7 +6754,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	V N   Virtual column number as -{num}.  Not displayed if equal to 'c'.
 	p N   Percentage through file in lines as in |CTRL-G|.
 	P S   Percentage through file of displayed window.  This is like the
-	      percentage described for 'ruler'.  Always 3 in length.
+	      percentage described for 'ruler'.  Always 3 in length, unless
+	      translated.
 	a S   Argument list status as in default title.  ({current} of {max})
 	      Empty if the argument file count is zero or one.
 	{ NF  Evaluate expression between '%{' and '}' and substitute result.
@@ -6634,8 +6799,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	The variable "actual_curbuf" is set to the 'bufnr()' number of the
 	real current buffer.

-	The 'statusline' option may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see
-	|sandbox-option|.
+	The 'statusline' option will be evaluated in the |sandbox| if set from
+	a modeline, see |sandbox-option|.

 	It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
 	evaluating 'statusline' |textlock|.
@@ -6748,8 +6913,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	   usetab	Like "useopen", but also consider windows in other tab
 			pages.
 	   split	If included, split the current window before loading
-			a buffer.  Otherwise: do not split, use current window.
-			Supported in |quickfix| commands that display errors.
+			a buffer for a |quickfix| command that display errors.
+			Otherwise: do not split, use current window.
 	   newtab	Like "split", but open a new tab page.  Overrules
 			"split" when both are present.

@@ -7003,7 +7168,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			{not in Vi}
 	Encoding used for the terminal.  This specifies what character
 	encoding the keyboard produces and the display will understand.  For
-	the GUI it only applies to the keyboard ('encoding' is used for the
+	the GUI it only applies to the keyboard ( 'encoding' is used for the
 	display).  Except for the Mac when 'macatsui' is off, then
 	'termencoding' should be "macroman".
 	In the Win32 console version the default value is the console codepage
@@ -7078,8 +7243,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	the file should contain words with similar meaning, separated by
 	non-keyword characters (white space is preferred).  Maximum line
 	length is 510 bytes.
-	To obtain a file to be used here, check out the wordlist FAQ at
-	http://www.hyphenologist.co.uk .
+	To obtain a file to be used here, check out this ftp site:
+	ftp://ftp.ox.ac.uk/pub/wordlists/  First get the README file.
 	To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash.  Spaces
 	after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file
 	name.  See |option-backslash| about using backslashes.
@@ -7354,6 +7519,12 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	   jsbterm	JSB term mouse handling.
 							*pterm-mouse*
 	   pterm	QNX pterm mouse handling.
+							*urxvt-mouse*
+	   urxvt	Mouse handling for the urxvt (rxvt-unicode) terminal.
+							*sgr-mouse*
+	   sgr		Mouse handling for the terminal that emits SGR-styled
+			mouse reporting. Works with xterm version 277 or
+			later.

 	The mouse handling must be enabled at compile time |+mouse_xterm|
 	|+mouse_dec| |+mouse_netterm|.
@@ -7366,6 +7537,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	or "xterm2" already.  The main use of this option is to set it to
 	"xterm", when the terminal name doesn't start with "xterm", but it can
 	handle xterm mouse codes.
+	The "sgr" value will be set if the xterm version is 277 or later.
 	The "xterm2" value will be set if the xterm version is reported to be
 	95 or higher.  This only works when compiled with the |+termresponse|
 	feature and if |t_RV| is set to the escape sequence to request the
@@ -7405,7 +7577,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	given, no further entry is used.
 	See |undo-persistence|.

-						*'undofile'* *'udf'*
+				*'undofile'* *'noundofile'* *'udf'* *'noudf'*
 'undofile' 'udf'	boolean	(default off)
 			local to buffer
 			{not in Vi}
@@ -7417,7 +7589,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	For more information about this feature see |undo-persistence|.
 	The undo file is not read when 'undoreload' causes the buffer from
 	before a reload to be saved for undo.
-	WARNING: this is a very new feature.  Use at your own risk!
+	When 'undofile' is turned off the undo file is NOT deleted.

 						*'undolevels'* *'ul'*
 'undolevels' 'ul'	number	(default 100, 1000 for Unix, VMS,
@@ -7570,15 +7742,18 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	parameter.  The following is a list of the identifying characters and
 	the effect of their value.
 	CHAR	VALUE	~
+							*viminfo-!*
 	!	When included, save and restore global variables that start
 		with an uppercase letter, and don't contain a lowercase
 		letter.  Thus "KEEPTHIS and "K_L_M" are stored, but "KeepThis"
 		and "_K_L_M" are not.  Nested List and Dict items may not be
 		read back correctly, you end up with an empty item.
+							*viminfo-quote*
 	"	Maximum number of lines saved for each register.  Old name of
 		the '<' item, with the disadvantage that you need to put a
 		backslash before the ", otherwise it will be recognized as the
 		start of a comment!
+							*viminfo-%*
 	%	When included, save and restore the buffer list.  If Vim is
 		started with a file name argument, the buffer list is not
 		restored.  If Vim is started without a file name argument, the
@@ -7588,38 +7763,48 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		When followed by a number, the number specifies the maximum
 		number of buffers that are stored.  Without a number all
 		buffers are stored.
+							*viminfo-'*
 	'	Maximum number of previously edited files for which the marks
 		are remembered.  This parameter must always be included when
 		'viminfo' is non-empty.
 		Including this item also means that the |jumplist| and the
 		|changelist| are stored in the viminfo file.
+							*viminfo-/*
 	/	Maximum number of items in the search pattern history to be
 		saved.  If non-zero, then the previous search and substitute
 		patterns are also saved.  When not included, the value of
 		'history' is used.
+							*viminfo-:*
 	:	Maximum number of items in the command-line history to be
 		saved.  When not included, the value of 'history' is used.
+							*viminfo-<*
 	<	Maximum number of lines saved for each register.  If zero then
 		registers are not saved.  When not included, all lines are
 		saved.  '"' is the old name for this item.
 		Also see the 's' item below: limit specified in Kbyte.
+							*viminfo-@*
 	@	Maximum number of items in the input-line history to be
 		saved.  When not included, the value of 'history' is used.
+							*viminfo-c*
 	c	When included, convert the text in the viminfo file from the
 		'encoding' used when writing the file to the current
 		'encoding'.  See |viminfo-encoding|.
+							*viminfo-f*
 	f	Whether file marks need to be stored.  If zero, file marks ('0
 		to '9, 'A to 'Z) are not stored.  When not present or when
 		non-zero, they are all stored.  '0 is used for the current
 		cursor position (when exiting or when doing ":wviminfo").
+							*viminfo-h*
 	h	Disable the effect of 'hlsearch' when loading the viminfo
 		file.  When not included, it depends on whether ":nohlsearch"
 		has been used since the last search command.
+							*viminfo-n*
 	n	Name of the viminfo file.  The name must immediately follow
 		the 'n'.  Must be the last one!  If the "-i" argument was
 		given when starting Vim, that file name overrides the one
 		given here with 'viminfo'.  Environment variables are expanded
 		when opening the file, not when setting the option.
+							*viminfo-r*
 	r	Removable media.  The argument is a string (up to the next
 		',').  This parameter can be given several times.  Each
 		specifies the start of a path for which no marks will be
@@ -7628,6 +7813,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		also use it for temp files, e.g., for Unix: "r/tmp".  Case is
 		ignored.  Maximum length of each 'r' argument is 50
 		characters.
+							*viminfo-s*
 	s	Maximum size of an item in Kbyte.  If zero then registers are
 		not saved.  Currently only applies to registers.  The default
 		"s10" will exclude registers with more than 10 Kbyte of text.
@@ -7779,9 +7965,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			{not available when compiled without the |+wildignore|
 			feature}
 	A list of file patterns.  A file that matches with one of these
-	patterns is ignored when completing file or directory names, and
-	influences the result of |expand()|, |glob()| and |globpath()| unless
-	a flag is passed to disable this.
+	patterns is ignored when expanding |wildcards|, completing file or
+	directory names, and influences the result of |expand()|, |glob()| and
+	|globpath()| unless a flag is passed to disable this.
 	The pattern is used like with |:autocmd|, see |autocmd-patterns|.
 	Also see 'suffixes'.
 	Example: >
@@ -7796,7 +7982,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 	When set case is ignored when completing file names and directories.
-	Has no effect on systems where file name case is generally ignored.
+	Has no effect when 'fileignorecase' is set.
 	Does not apply when the shell is used to expand wildcards, which
 	happens when there are special characters.

@@ -7815,6 +8001,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	CTRL-P/CTRL-N, cause the highlight to move to the appropriate match.
 	When 'wildmode' is used, "wildmenu" mode is used where "full" is
 	specified.  "longest" and "list" do not start "wildmenu" mode.
+	You can check the current mode with |wildmenumode()|.
 	If there are more matches than can fit in the line, a ">" is shown on
 	the right and/or a "<" is shown on the left.  The status line scrolls
 	as needed.
@@ -8083,8 +8270,13 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			{not in Vi}
 	Make a backup before overwriting a file.  The backup is removed after
 	the file was successfully written, unless the 'backup' option is
-	also on.  Reset this option if your file system is almost full.  See
-	|backup-table| for another explanation.
+	also on.
+	WARNING: Switching this option off means that when Vim fails to write
+	your buffer correctly and then, for whatever reason, Vim exits, you
+	lose both the original file and what you were writing.  Only reset
+	this option if your file system is almost full and it makes the write
+	fail (and make sure not to exit Vim until the write was successful).
+	See |backup-table| for another explanation.
 	When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway.
 	NOTE: This option is set to the default value when 'compatible' is
 	set.
--- a/runtime/doc/os_vms.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/os_vms.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*os_vms.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Aug 16
+*os_vms.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Aug 14


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL
@@ -38,9 +38,6 @@ You can download the Vim source code by ftp from the official Vim site:
 Or use one of the mirrors:
 	ftp://ftp.vim.org/pub/vim/MIRRORS

-You will need both the Unix and Extra archives to build vim.exe for VMS.
-For using Vim's full power you will need the runtime files as well.
-
 You can download precompiled executables from:
 	http://www.polarhome.com/vim/
 	ftp://ftp.polarhome.com/pub/vim/
@@ -75,7 +72,7 @@ See the file [.SRC]INSTALLVMS.TXT.
 4. Problems						*vms-problems*

 The code has been tested under Open VMS 6.2 - 8.2 on Alpha, VAX and IA64
-platforms with the DEC C compiler.  It should work without bigger problems.
+platforms with the DEC C compiler.  It should work without big problems.
 If your system does not have some include libraries you can tune up in
 OS_VMS_CONF.H file.

@@ -88,11 +85,11 @@ Also GTK, XPM library paths should be configured in MAKE_VMS.MMS

 Note: Under VAX it should work with the DEC C compiler without problems.  The
 VAX C compiler is not fully ANSI C compatible in pre-processor directives
-semantics, therefore you have to use a converter program what will do the lion
+semantics, therefore you have to use a converter program that will do the lion
 part of the job.  For detailed instructions read file INSTALLvms.txt

-MMS_VIM.EXE is build together with VIM.EXE, but for XD.EXE you should
-change to subdirectory and build it separately.
+MMS_VIM.EXE is build together with VIM.EXE, but for XXD.EXE you should
+change to a subdirectory and build it separately.

 CTAGS is not part of the Vim source distribution anymore, however the OpenVMS
 specific source might contain CTAGS source files as described above.
@@ -184,9 +181,9 @@ You may want to create .vimrc and .gvimrc files in your home directory

 The easiest way is just rename example files.  You may leave the menu file
 (MENU.VIM) and files vimrc and gvimrc in the original $VIM directory.  It will
-be default setup for all users, and for users it is enough just to have their
-own additions or resetting in their home directory in files .vimrc and .gvimrc.
-It should work without problems.
+be the default setup for all users, and for users it is enough to just have
+their own additions or resetting in their home directory in files .vimrc and
+.gvimrc.  It should work without problems.

 Note: Remember, system rc files (default for all users) don't have a leading
 ".".  So, system rc files are: >
@@ -200,7 +197,7 @@ and user customized rc files are: >
 	sys$login:.vimrc
 	sys$login:.gvimrc

-You can check that everything is on the right place with the :version command.
+You can check that everything is at the right place with the :version command.

 Example LOGIN.COM: >

@@ -209,15 +206,15 @@ Example LOGIN.COM: >
 	$ gv*im:== spawn/nowait/input=NLA0 mcr VIM:VIM.EXE -g -GEOMETRY 80x40
 	$ set disp/create/node=192.168.5.223/trans=tcpip

-Note: This set-up should be enough, if you are working on standalone server or
-clustered environment, but if you want to use Vim as internode editor in
+Note: This set-up should be enough, if you are working on a standalone server or
+clustered environment, but if you want to use Vim as an internode editor in
 DECNET environment, it will satisfy as well.
 You just have to define the "whole" path: >

 	$ define VIM "<server_name>[""user password""]::device:<path>"
 	$ vi*m :== "mcr VIM:VIM.EXE"

-As for example: >
+For example: >

 	$ define VIM "PLUTO::RF10:[UTIL.VIM]"
 	$ define VIM "PLUTO""ZAY mypass""::RF10:[UTIL.VIM]" ! if passwd required
@@ -300,12 +297,12 @@ For more information type $help set disp in VMS prompt.

 4) If you are working on MS-Windows or some other non X/Window environment
   you need to set up one X server and run Vim as in point 2.
-   For MS-Windows there are available free X servers as MIX , Omni X etc.,
+   For MS-Windows there are available free X servers as MIX, Omni X etc.,
   as well as excellent commercial products as eXcursion or ReflectionX with
   built-in DEC support.

 Please note, that executables without GUI are slightly faster during startup
-then with enabled GUI in character mode. Therefore, if you do not use GUI
+than with enabled GUI in character mode. Therefore, if you do not use GUI
 features, it is worth to choose non GUI executables.

 ==============================================================================
@@ -326,8 +323,8 @@ features, it is worth to choose non GUI executables.
 8.12 diff-mode
 8.13 Allow '$' in C keywords
 8.14 VIMTUTOR for beginners
-8.15 Slow start in console mode issue 
-8.16 Common VIM directory - different architectures 
+8.15 Slow start in console mode issue
+8.16 Common VIM directory - different architectures

 8.1 Backspace/delete

@@ -360,7 +357,7 @@ number, try these settings. >
 	:set nowritebackup   " does not have any purpose on VMS.  It's the
 			     " default.

-Recovery is working perfect as well from the default swap file.
+Recovery is working perfectly as well from the default swap file.
 Read more with :help swapfile

 (Claude Marinier <ClaudeMarinier@xwavesolutions.com> Vim 5.5, Zoltan Arpadffy
@@ -386,7 +383,7 @@ Note: You may use <,> brackets as well (device:<path>file.ext;version) as
 rf10:<user.zay.work>test.c;1

 (David Elins <delins@foliage.com>, Jerome Lauret
-<JLAURET@mail.chem.sunysb.edu> Vim 5.6 )
+<JLAURET@mail.chem.sunysb.edu> Vim 5.6)


 8.5 Remote host invocation
@@ -445,14 +442,14 @@ Terminal entry not found in termcap
    builtin_dumb
 defaulting to 'vt320'
 ---
-The solution is to define default terminal name: >
+The solution is to define the default terminal name: >

 	$ ! unknown terminal name.  Let us use vt320 or ansi instead.
 	$ ! Note: it's case sensitive
 	$ define term "vt320"

-Terminals from VT100 to VT320 (as V300, VT220, VT200 ) do not need any extra
-keyboard mappings.  They should work perfect as they are, including arrows,
+Terminals from VT100 to VT320 (as V300, VT220, VT200) do not need any extra
+keyboard mappings.  They should work perfectly as they are, including arrows,
 Ins, Del buttons etc., except Backspace in GUI mode.  To solve it, add to
 .gvimrc: >

@@ -465,8 +462,8 @@ your .vimrc file: >

 	set ttyfast	" set fast terminal

-Note: if you're using Vim on remote host or through very slow connection, it's
-recommended to avoid fast terminal option with: >
+Note: if you're using Vim on remote host or through a very slow connection, it's
+recommended to avoid the fast terminal option with: >

 	set nottyfast   " set terminal to slow mode

@@ -483,8 +480,8 @@ special commands to execute executables: >

 OpenVMS users always have to be aware that the Vim command :! "just" drop them
 to DCL prompt.  This feature is possible to use without any problem with all
-DCL commands, but if we want to execute some program as XXD, CTAGS, JTAGS etc.
-we're running into trouble if we follow the Vim documentation (see: help
+DCL commands, but if we want to execute some programs such as XXD, CTAGS, JTAGS,
+etc.  we're running into trouble if we follow the Vim documentation (see: help
 xxd).

 Solution: Execute with the MC command and add the full path to the executable.
@@ -534,7 +531,7 @@ Example: >

 	$define SYS$PRINT HP5ANSI

-You can print out whole buffer or just the marked area.
+You can print out the whole buffer or just the marked area.
 More info under :help hardcopy

 (Zoltan Arpadffy, Vim 6.0c)
@@ -561,16 +558,16 @@ will be confused after a window-resize.
 From 6.0 diff functionality has been implemented, but OpenVMS does not use
 GNU/Unix like diff therefore built in diff does not work.
 There is a simple solution to solve this anomaly.  Install a Unix like diff
-and Vim will work perfect in diff mode too.  You just have to redefine your
+and Vim will work perfectly in diff mode too.  You just have to redefine your
 diff program as: >

 	define /nolog diff <GNU_PATH>diff.exe

 Another, more sophisticated solution is described below (8.12 diff-mode)
-There are some other programs as patch, make etc that may cause same problems.
-At www.polarhome.com is possible to download an GNU package for Alpha and VAX
-boxes that is meant to solve GNU problems on OpenVMS.
-( Zoltan Arpadffy, Vim 6.1)
+There are other programs such as patch, make etc that may cause the same
+problems.  At www.polarhome.com is possible to download an GNU package for
+Alpha and VAX boxes that is meant to solve GNU problems on OpenVMS.
+(Zoltan Arpadffy, Vim 6.1)


 8.12 diff-mode
@@ -632,7 +629,7 @@ You can now compare files in 4 ways: >
    3. VIM  diff:  $ VIMDIFF  <FILE1> <FILE2>
    4. GVIM diff:  $ GVIMDIFF <FILE1> <FILE2>

-( Coen Engelbarts, Vim 6.1)
+(Coen Engelbarts, Vim 6.1)


 8.13 Allow '$' in C keywords
@@ -653,35 +650,36 @@ Now word-based commands, e.g. the '*'-search-command and the CTRL-]
 tag-lookup, work on the whole identifier.  (Ctags on VMS also supports '$' in
 C keywords since ctags version 5.1.)

-( Coen Engelbarts, Vim 6.1)
+(Coen Engelbarts, Vim 6.1)

 8.14 VIMTUTOR for beginners

-It exits VIMTUTOR.COM DCL script that can help Vim beginners to learn/make
-first steps with Vim on OpenVMS.  Depending of binary distribution you may
-start it with: >
+The VIMTUTOR.COM DCL script can help Vim beginners to learn/make their first
+steps with Vim on OpenVMS.  Depending of binary distribution you may start it
+with: >

 	@vim:vimtutor

 (Thomas.R.Wyant III, Vim 6.1)

-8.14 Slow start in console mode issue
+8.16 Slow start in console mode issue

 As GUI/GTK Vim works equally well in console mode, many administrators
 deploy those executables system wide.
 Unfortunately, on a remote slow connections GUI/GTK executables behave rather
-slow when user wants to run Vim just in the console mode - because of X environment detection timeout.
+slow when user wants to run Vim just in the console mode - because of X
+environment detection timeout.

 Luckily, there is a simple solution for that. Administrators need to deploy
 both GUI/GTK build and just console build executables, like below: >

    |- vim73
    |----- doc
-    |----- syntax        
+    |----- syntax
       vimrc    (system rc files)
       gvimrc
-       gvim.exe (the renamed GUI or GTK built vim.exe)      
-       vim.exe  (the console only executable) 
+       gvim.exe (the renamed GUI or GTK built vim.exe)
+       vim.exe  (the console only executable)

 Define system symbols like below in for ex in LOGIN.COM or SYLOGIN.COM: >

@@ -692,7 +690,7 @@ Define system symbols like below in for ex in LOGIN.COM or SYLOGIN.COM: >
 	$ gv*im :== spawn/nowait/input=NLA0 mcr VIM:GVIM.EXE -g -GEOMETRY 80x40


-Like this, users that do not have X environment and want to use Vim just in 
+Like this, users that do not have X environment and want to use Vim just in
 console mode can avoid performance problems.

 (Zoltan Arpadffy, Vim 7.2)
@@ -714,8 +712,8 @@ View of Cluster from system ID 11655  node: TOR
 +---------------------------------+

 It is convenient to have a common VIM directory but execute different
-executables. 
-There are more solutions for this problem:
+executables.
+There are several solutions for this problem:

 Solution 1.  All executables in the same directory with different names
 This is easily done with the following script that can be added
@@ -769,7 +767,7 @@ GNU_TOOLS.ZIP package downloadable from http://www.polarhome.com/vim/
 Version 7.3
 - CTAGS 5.8 included
 - VMS compile warnings fixed - floating-point overflow warning corrected on VAX
- filepath completition corrected - too many chars were escaped in filename
+- filepath completion corrected - too many chars were escaped in filename
  and shell commands
 - the following plugins are included into VMS runtime:
 	genutils 2.4, multiselect 2.2, multvals 3.1, selectbuf 4.3,
@@ -784,10 +782,10 @@ Version 7.3
 Version 7.2 (2008 Aug 9)
 - VCF files write corrected
 - CTAGS 5.7 included
- corrected make_vms.mms (on VAX gave syntax error) 
+- corrected make_vms.mms (on VAX gave syntax error)

 Version 7.1 (2007 Jun 15)
- create TAGS file from menu 
+- create TAGS file from menu

 Version 7 (2006 May 8)
 - Improved low level char input (affects just console mode)
--- a/runtime/doc/os_win32.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/os_win32.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*os_win32.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 May 28
+*os_win32.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 May 18


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by George Reilly
@@ -314,13 +314,13 @@ A. When using :! to run an external command, you can run it with "start": >
   not have to be closed before Vim.
   To avoid this special treatment, use ":! start".
   There are two optional arguments (see the next Q):
-       /min  the window will be minimized.
-       /b"   no console window will be opened
-   You can only one of these flags at a time.  A second second one will be
+       /min  the window will be minimized
+       /b    no console window will be opened
+   You can use only one of these flags at a time.  A second one will be
   treated as the start of the command.

 Q. How do I avoid getting a window for programs that I run asynchronously?
-A. You have two possible solutions depending on what exactly do you want:
+A. You have two possible solutions depending on what you want:
   1) You may use the /min flag in order to run program in a minimized state
      with no other changes. It will work equally for console and GUI
      applications.
@@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ A. You have two possible solutions depending on what exactly do you want:
      console window for them (GUI applications are not affected). But you
      should use this flag only if the application you run doesn't require any
      input.  Otherwise it will get an EOF error because its input stream
-      (stdin) would be redirected to \\.\NUL (stdoud and stderr too).
+      (stdin) would be redirected to \\.\NUL (stdout and stderr too).

   Example for a console application, run Exuberant ctags: >
        :!start /min ctags -R .
--- a/runtime/doc/pattern.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/pattern.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*pattern.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 May 25
+*pattern.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2013 Jun 02


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ explanations are in chapter 27 |usr_27.txt|.
 10. Highlighting matches	|match-highlight|

 ==============================================================================
-1. Search commands				*search-commands* *E486*
+1. Search commands				*search-commands*

 							*/*
 /{pattern}[/]<CR>	Search forward for the [count]'th occurrence of
@@ -150,6 +150,11 @@ use <Esc> to abandon the search.
 All matches for the last used search pattern will be highlighted if you set
 the 'hlsearch' option.  This can be suspended with the |:nohlsearch| command.

+When no match is found you get the error: *E486* Pattern not found
+Note that for the |:global| command this behaves like a normal message, for Vi
+compatibility.  For the |:s| command the "e" flag can be used to avoid the
+error message |:s_flags|.
+
 					*search-offset* *{offset}*
 These commands search for the specified pattern.  With "/" and "?" an
 additional offset may be given.  There are two types of offsets: line offsets
@@ -345,6 +350,27 @@ For starters, read chapter 27 of the user manual |usr_27.txt|.
 		or  \z( pattern \)		|/\z(|


+				*/\%#=* *two-engines*
+Vim includes two regexp engines:
+1. An old, backtracking engine that supports everything.
+2. A new, NFA engine that works much faster on some patterns, but does not
+   support everything.
+
+Vim will automatically select the right engine for you.  However, if you run
+into a problem or want to specifically select one engine or the other, you can
+prepend one of the following to the pattern:
+
+	\%#=0	Force automatic selection.  Only has an effect when
+	        'regexpengine' has been set to a non-zero value.
+	\%#=1	Force using the old engine.
+	\%#=2	Force using the NFA engine.
+
+You can also use the 'regexpengine' option to change the default.
+
+			 *E864* *E868* *E874* *E875* *E876* *E877* *E878*
+If selecting the NFA engine and it runs into something that is not implemented
+the pattern will not match.  This is only useful when debugging Vim.
+
 ==============================================================================
 3. Magic							*/magic*

@@ -391,9 +417,10 @@ pattern.

 ==============================================================================
 4. Overview of pattern items				*pattern-overview*
+						*E865* *E866* *E867* *E869*

 Overview of multi items.				*/multi* *E61* *E62*
-More explanation and examples below, follow the links.			*E64*
+More explanation and examples below, follow the links.		*E64* *E871*

 	  multi ~
     'magic' 'nomagic'	matches of the preceding atom ~
@@ -499,16 +526,18 @@ Character classes {not in Vi}:				*/character-classes*
 	x	x	a character with no special meaning matches itself

 |/[]|	[]	\[]	any character specified inside the []
-|/\%[]| \%[]	\%[]	a sequence of optionally matched atoms
+|/\%[]|	\%[]	\%[]	a sequence of optionally matched atoms

 |/\c|	\c	\c	ignore case, do not use the 'ignorecase' option
 |/\C|	\C	\C	match case, do not use the 'ignorecase' option
+|/\Z|	\Z	\Z	ignore differences in Unicode "combining characters".
+			Useful when searching voweled Hebrew or Arabic text.
+
 |/\m|	\m	\m	'magic' on for the following chars in the pattern
 |/\M|	\M	\M	'magic' off for the following chars in the pattern
 |/\v|	\v	\v	the following chars in the pattern are "very magic"
 |/\V|	\V	\V	the following chars in the pattern are "very nomagic"
-|/\Z|	\Z	\Z	ignore differences in Unicode "combining characters".
-			Useful when searching voweled Hebrew or Arabic text.
+|/\%#=|   \%#=1   \%#=1   select regexp engine |/zero-width|

 |/\%d|	\%d	\%d	match specified decimal character (eg \%d123)
 |/\%x|	\%x	\%x	match specified hex character (eg \%x2a)
@@ -576,7 +605,7 @@ overview.
 \?	Just like \=.  Cannot be used when searching backwards with the "?"
 	command. {not in Vi}

-						*/\{* *E58* *E60* *E554*
+					*/\{* *E58* *E60* *E554* *E870*
 \{n,m}	Matches n to m of the preceding atom, as many as possible
 \{n}	Matches n of the preceding atom
 \{n,}	Matches at least n of the preceding atom, as many as possible
@@ -632,10 +661,10 @@ overview.
 							*/\@!*
 \@!	Matches with zero width if the preceding atom does NOT match at the
 	current position. |/zero-width| {not in Vi}
-	Like '(?!pattern)" in Perl.
+	Like "(?!pattern)" in Perl.
 	Example			matches ~
 	foo\(bar\)\@!		any "foo" not followed by "bar"
-	a.\{-}p\@!		"a", "ap", "aap", "app", etc. not immediately
+	a.\{-}p\@!		"a", "ap", "app", "appp", etc. not immediately
 				followed by a "p"
 	if \(\(then\)\@!.\)*$	"if " not followed by "then"

@@ -643,7 +672,7 @@ overview.
 	does not match.  "a.*p\@!" will match from an "a" to the end of the
 	line, because ".*" can match all characters in the line and the "p"
 	doesn't match at the end of the line.  "a.\{-}p\@!" will match any
-	"a", "ap", "aap", etc. that isn't followed by a "p", because the "."
+	"a", "ap", "app", etc. that isn't followed by a "p", because the "."
 	can match a "p" and "p\@!" doesn't match after that.

 	You can't use "\@!" to look for a non-match before the matching
@@ -662,13 +691,14 @@ overview.
 							*/\@<=*
 \@<=	Matches with zero width if the preceding atom matches just before what
 	follows. |/zero-width| {not in Vi}
-	Like '(?<=pattern)" in Perl, but Vim allows non-fixed-width patterns.
+	Like "(?<=pattern)" in Perl, but Vim allows non-fixed-width patterns.
 	Example			matches ~
 	\(an\_s\+\)\@<=file	"file" after "an" and white space or an
 				end-of-line
 	For speed it's often much better to avoid this multi.  Try using "\zs"
 	instead |/\zs|.  To match the same as the above example:
 		an\_s\+\zsfile
+	At least set a limit for the look-behind, see below.

 	"\@<=" and "\@<!" check for matches just before what follows.
 	Theoretically these matches could start anywhere before this position.
@@ -681,20 +711,37 @@ overview.
 	Example			matches ~
 	\1\@<=,\([a-z]\+\)	",abc" in "abc,abc"

+\@123<=
+	Like "\@<=" but only look back 123 bytes. This avoids trying lots
+	of matches that are known to fail and make executing the pattern very
+	slow.  Example, check if there is a "<" just before "span":
+		/<\@1<=span
+	This will try matching "<" only one byte before "span", which is the
+	only place that works anyway.
+	After crossing a line boundary, the limit is relative to the end of
+	the line.  Thus the characters at the start of the line with the match
+	are not counted (this is just to keep it simple).
+	The number zero is the same as no limit.
+
 							*/\@<!*
 \@<!	Matches with zero width if the preceding atom does NOT match just
 	before what follows.  Thus this matches if there is no position in the
 	current or previous line where the atom matches such that it ends just
 	before what follows.  |/zero-width| {not in Vi}
-	Like '(?<!pattern)" in Perl, but Vim allows non-fixed-width patterns.
+	Like "(?<!pattern)" in Perl, but Vim allows non-fixed-width patterns.
 	The match with the preceding atom is made to end just before the match
 	with what follows, thus an atom that ends in ".*" will work.
 	Warning: This can be slow (because many positions need to be checked
-	for a match).
+	for a match).  Use a limit if you can, see below.
 	Example			matches ~
 	\(foo\)\@<!bar		any "bar" that's not in "foobar"
 	\(\/\/.*\)\@<!in	"in" which is not after "//"

+\@123<!
+	Like "\@<!" but only look back 123 bytes. This avoids trying lots of
+	matches that are known to fail and make executing the pattern very
+	slow.
+
 							*/\@>*
 \@>	Matches the preceding atom like matching a whole pattern. {not in Vi}
 	Like "(?>pattern)" in Perl.
@@ -932,7 +979,7 @@ match ASCII characters, as indicated by the range.
 \l	lowercase character:		[a-z]		*/\l*
 \L	non-lowercase character:	[^a-z]		*/\L*
 \u	uppercase character:		[A-Z]		*/\u*
-\U	non-uppercase character		[^A-Z]		*/\U*
+\U	non-uppercase character:	[^A-Z]		*/\U*

 	NOTE: Using the atom is faster than the [] form.

@@ -957,7 +1004,8 @@ match ASCII characters, as indicated by the range.
 ~	matches the last given substitute string	*/~* */\~*

 \(\)	A pattern enclosed by escaped parentheses.	*/\(* */\(\)* */\)*
-	E.g., "\(^a\)" matches 'a' at the start of a line.  *E51* *E54* *E55*
+	E.g., "\(^a\)" matches 'a' at the start of a line.
+	*E51* *E54* *E55* *E872* *E873*

 \1      Matches the same string that was matched by	*/\1* *E65*
 	the first sub-expression in \( and \). {not in Vi}
@@ -988,6 +1036,8 @@ x	A single character, with no special meaning, matches itself
 	[xyz]		any 'x', 'y' or 'z'
 	[a-zA-Z]$	any alphabetic character at the end of a line
 	\c[a-z]$	same
+	[А-яЁё]		Russian alphabet (with utf-8 and cp1251)
+
 								*/[\n]*
 	With "\_" prepended the collection also includes the end-of-line.
 	The same can be done by including "\n" in the collection.  The
@@ -1036,11 +1086,9 @@ x	A single character, with no special meaning, matches itself
 	  These items only work for 8-bit characters.
 							*/[[=* *[==]*
 	- An equivalence class.  This means that characters are matched that
-	  have almost the same meaning, e.g., when ignoring accents.  The form
-	  is:
+	  have almost the same meaning, e.g., when ignoring accents.  This
+	  only works for Unicode, latin1 and latin9.  The form is:
 		[=a=]
-	  Currently this is only implemented for latin1.  Also works for the
-	  latin1 characters in utf-8 and latin9.
 							*/[[.* *[..]*
 	- A collation element.  This currently simply accepts a single
 	  character in the form:
@@ -1056,6 +1104,8 @@ x	A single character, with no special meaning, matches itself
 	  any character that's not in "^]-\bdertnoUux".  "[\xyz]" matches '\',
 	  'x', 'y' and 'z'.  It's better to use "\\" though, future expansions
 	  may use other characters after '\'.
+	- Omitting the trailing ] is not considered an error. "[]" works like
+	  "[]]", it matches the ']' character.
 	- The following translations are accepted when the 'l' flag is not
 	  included in 'cpoptions' {not in Vi}:
 		\e	<Esc>
@@ -1161,6 +1211,8 @@ When "\Z" appears anywhere in the pattern, composing characters are ignored.
 Thus only the base characters need to match, the composing characters may be
 different and the number of composing characters may differ.  Only relevant
 when 'encoding' is "utf-8".
+Exception: If the pattern starts with one or more composing characters, these
+must match.

 When a composing character appears at the start of the pattern of after an
 item that doesn't include the composing character, a match is found at any
@@ -1170,8 +1222,20 @@ When using a dot and a composing character, this works the same as the
 composing character by itself, except that it doesn't matter what comes before
 this.

-The order of composing characters matters, even though changing the order
-doesn't change what a character looks like.  This may change in the future.
+The order of composing characters does not matter.  Also, the text may have
+more composing characters than the pattern, it still matches.  But all
+composing characters in the pattern must be found in the text.
+
+Suppose B is a base character and x and y are composing characters:
+	pattern		text		match ~
+	Bxy		Bxy		yes (perfect match)
+	Bxy		Byx		yes (order ignored)
+	Bxy		By		no (x missing)
+	Bxy		Bx		no (y missing)
+	Bx		Bx		yes (perfect match)
+	Bx		By		no (x missing)
+	Bx		Bxy		yes (extra y ignored)
+	Bx		Byx		yes (extra y ignored)

 ==============================================================================
 9. Compare with Perl patterns				*perl-patterns*
--- a/runtime/doc/pi_getscript.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/pi_getscript.txt
@@ -1,15 +1,21 @@
-*pi_getscript.txt*  For Vim version 7.0.  Last change: 2011 May 31
+*pi_getscript.txt*  For Vim version 7.0.  Last change: 2012 Apr 07
 >
-		GETSCRIPT REFERENCE MANUAL  by Charles E. Campbell, Jr.
+		GETSCRIPT REFERENCE MANUAL  by Charles E. Campbell
 <
-Authors:  Charles E. Campbell, Jr.  <NdrOchip@ScampbellPfamilyA.Mbiz>
+Authors:  Charles E. Campbell  <NdrOchip@ScampbellPfamilyA.Mbiz>
 	  (remove NOSPAM from the email address)
 						*GetLatestVimScripts-copyright*
-Copyright: (c) 2004-2010 by Charles E. Campbell, Jr.	*glvs-copyright*
-           The VIM LICENSE applies to getscript.vim and
-           pi_getscript.txt (see |copyright|) except use
-           "getscript" instead of "Vim".  No warranty, express or implied.
-	   Use At-Your-Own-Risk.
+Copyright: (c) 2004-2012 by Charles E. Campbell	*glvs-copyright*
+	The VIM LICENSE (see |copyright|) applies to the files in this
+	package, including getscriptPlugin.vim, getscript.vim,
+	GetLatestVimScripts.dist, and pi_getscript.txt, except use "getscript"
+	instead of "VIM".  Like anything else that's free, getscript and its
+	associated files are provided *as is* and comes with no warranty of
+	any kind, either expressed or implied.  No guarantees of
+	merchantability.  No guarantees of suitability for any purpose.  By
+	using this plugin, you agree that in no event will the copyright
+	holder be liable for any damages resulting from the use of this
+	software. Use at your own risk!

 Getscript is a plugin that simplifies retrieval of the latest versions of the
 scripts that you yourself use!  Typing |:GLVS| will invoke getscript; it will
@@ -337,6 +343,11 @@ after/syntax/c.vim contained in it to overwrite a user's c.vim.
 	default= $HOME/vimfiles (windows)
 		Override where :AutoInstall: scripts will be installed.
 		Doesn't override vimball installation.
+>
+	g:GetLatestVimScripts_scriptaddr
+<       default='http://vim.sourceforge.net/script.php?script_id='
+		Override this if your system needs
+	  ...  ='http://vim.sourceforge.net/script/script.php?script_id='

 ==============================================================================
 8. GetLatestVimScripts Algorithm		*glvs-algorithm* *glvs-alg*
@@ -374,6 +385,12 @@ The AutoInstall process will:
 ==============================================================================
 9. GetLatestVimScripts History		*getscript-history* *glvs-hist* {{{1

+v35 Apr 07, 2012 : * (MengHuan Yu) pointed out that the script url has
+		     changed (somewhat).  However, it doesn't work, and
+		     the original one does (under Linux). I'll make it
+		     yet-another-option.
+v34 Jun 23, 2011 : * handles additional decompression options for tarballs
+                     (tgz taz tbz txz)
 v33 May 31, 2011 : * using fnameescape() instead of escape()
 		   * *.xz support
 v32 Jun 19, 2010 : * (Jan Steffens) added support for xz compression
--- a/runtime/doc/pi_gzip.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/pi_gzip.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*pi_gzip.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2002 Oct 29
+*pi_gzip.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Jul 19


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -25,6 +25,8 @@ with these extensions:
 	*.Z		compress (Lempel-Ziv)
 	*.gz		gzip
 	*.bz2		bzip2
+	*.lzma		lzma
+	*.xz		xz

 That's actually the only thing you need to know.  There are no options.

--- a/runtime/doc/pi_netrw.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/pi_netrw.txt
--- a/runtime/doc/pi_paren.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/pi_paren.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*pi_paren.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2008 Jun 16
+*pi_paren.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2013 May 08


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -46,7 +46,10 @@ are:
  closed folds.
 - 'synmaxcol' times 2 bytes before or after the cursor to avoid a delay
  in a long line with syntax highlighting.
-
+- A timeout of 300 msec (60 msec in Insert mode). This can be changed with the
+  g:matchparen_timeout and g:matchparen_insert_timeout variables and their
+  buffer-local equivalents b:matchparen_timeout and
+  b:matchparen_insert_timeout.

 If you would like the |%| command to work better, the matchit plugin can be
 used, see |matchit-install|.  This plugin also helps to skip matches in
--- a/runtime/doc/pi_tar.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/pi_tar.txt
@@ -1,14 +1,21 @@
-*pi_tar.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 May 31
+*pi_tar.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2013 Apr 17

 		       +====================+
 		       | Tar File Interface |
 		       +====================+

-Author:  Charles E. Campbell, Jr.  <NdrOchip@ScampbellPfamily.AbizM>
+Author:  Charles E. Campbell  <NdrOchip@ScampbellPfamily.AbizM>
 	  (remove NOSPAM from Campbell's email first)
-Copyright 2005-2010: The GPL (gnu public license) applies to	*tar-copyright*
-	   tar.vim, tarPlugin.vim, and pi_tar.txt.
-	   No warranty, express or implied.  Use At-Your-Own-Risk.
+Copyright 2005-2012:					*tar-copyright*
+	The VIM LICENSE (see |copyright|) applies to the files in this
+	package, including tarPlugin.vim, tar.vim, and pi_tar.txt.  Like
+	anything else that's except use "tar.vim" instead of "VIM".  Like
+	anything else that's free, tar.vim and its associated files are
+	provided *as is* and comes with no warranty of any kind, either
+	expressed or implied.  No guarantees of merchantability.  No
+	guarantees of suitability for any purpose.  By using this plugin, you
+	agree that in no event will the copyright holder be liable for any
+	damages resulting from the use of this software. Use at your own risk!

 ==============================================================================
 1. Contents					*tar* *tar-contents*
@@ -43,6 +50,21 @@ Copyright 2005-2010: The GPL (gnu public license) applies to	*tar-copyright*
 	*g:tar_extractcmd* , which by default is >
 		"tar -xf"
 <
+						*:TarDiff*
+   DIFFERENCING SUPPORT~
+
+   :TarDiff [filename]
+
+	This command will attempt to show the differences between the tarball
+	version of a file and the associated file on the system.  In order to
+	find that file on the system, the script uses the path associated with
+	the file mentioned in the tarball.  If the current directory is not
+	correct for that path, :TarDiff will fail to find the associated file.
+
+	If the [filename] is given, that that filename (and path) will be used
+	to specify the associated file.
+
+
   PREVENTING LOADING~

   If for some reason you do not wish to use vim to examine tar'd files,
@@ -83,6 +105,7 @@ Copyright 2005-2010: The GPL (gnu public license) applies to	*tar-copyright*
 4. History						*tar-history*


+   v28 Jun 23, 2011 * a few more decompression options (tbz tb2 txz)
   v27 May 31, 2011 * moved cygwin detection before g:tar_copycmd handling
   		    * inserted additional |:keepj| modifiers
 		    * changed silent  to  sil!  (|:silent|)
--- a/runtime/doc/pi_vimball.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/pi_vimball.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*pi_vimball.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Apr 02
+*pi_vimball.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Jan 17

 			       ----------------
 			       Vimball Archiver
@@ -6,16 +6,22 @@

 Author:  Charles E. Campbell, Jr.  <NdrOchip@ScampbellPfamily.AbizM>
 	  (remove NOSPAM from Campbell's email first)
-Copyright: (c) 2004-2011 by Charles E. Campbell, Jr.	*Vimball-copyright*
-	   The VIM LICENSE applies to Vimball.vim, and Vimball.txt
-	   (see |copyright|) except use "Vimball" instead of "Vim".
-	   No warranty, express or implied.
-	   Use At-Your-Own-Risk!
+Copyright: (c) 2004-2012 by Charles E. Campbell, Jr.	*Vimball-copyright*
+	The VIM LICENSE (see |copyright|) applies to the files in this
+	package, including vimballPlugin.vim, vimball.vim, and pi_vimball.txt.
+	except use "vimball" instead of "VIM".  Like anything else that's free,
+	vimball.vim and its associated files are provided *as is* and comes with
+	no warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied.  No guarantees
+	of merchantability.  No guarantees of suitability for any purpose.  By
+	using this plugin, you agree that in no event will the copyright
+	holder be liable for any damages resulting from the use of this
+	software. Use at your own risk!

 ==============================================================================
 1. Contents				*vba* *vimball* *vimball-contents*

 	1. Contents......................................: |vimball-contents|
+	2. Vimball Introduction..........................: |vimball-intro|
 	3. Vimball Manual................................: |vimball-manual|
 	   MkVimball.....................................: |:MkVimball|
 	   UseVimball....................................: |:UseVimball|
@@ -176,6 +182,8 @@ WINDOWS							*vimball-windows*
 ==============================================================================
 4. Vimball History					*vimball-history* {{{1

+	34 : Sep 22, 2011 * "UseVimball path" now supports a non-full path by
+			    prepending the current directory to it.
 	33 : Apr 02, 2011 * Gave priority to *.vmb over *.vba
 			  * Changed silent! to sil! (shorter)
 			  * Safed |'swf'| setting (during vimball extraction,
--- a/runtime/doc/pi_zip.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/pi_zip.txt
@@ -1,20 +1,21 @@
-*pi_zip.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 May 24
+*pi_zip.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2013 Apr 17

 				+====================+
 				| Zip File Interface |
 				+====================+

-Author:  Charles E. Campbell, Jr.  <NdrOchip@ScampbellPfamily.AbizM>
+Author:  Charles E. Campbell  <NdrOchip@ScampbellPfamily.AbizM>
 	  (remove NOSPAM from Campbell's email first)
-Copyright: Copyright (C) 2005-2011 Charles E Campbell, Jr *zip-copyright*
-           Permission is hereby granted to use and distribute this code,
-	   with or without modifications, provided that this copyright
-	   notice is copied with it. Like anything else that's free,
-	   zip.vim, zipPlugin.vim, and pi_zip.txt are provided *as is*
-	   and it comes with no warranty of any kind, either expressed or
-	   implied. By using this plugin, you agree that in no event will
-	   the copyright holder be liable for any damages resulting from
-	   the use of this software.
+Copyright: Copyright (C) 2005-2012 Charles E Campbell	 *zip-copyright*
+	The VIM LICENSE (see |copyright|) applies to the files in this
+	package, including zipPlugin.vim, zip.vim, and pi_zip.vim.  except use
+	"zip.vim" instead of "VIM".  Like anything else that's free, zip.vim
+	and its associated files are provided *as is* and comes with no
+	warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied.  No guarantees of
+	merchantability.  No guarantees of suitability for any purpose.  By
+	using this plugin, you agree that in no event will the copyright
+	holder be liable for any damages resulting from the use of this
+	software. Use at your own risk!

 ==============================================================================
 1. Contents						*zip* *zip-contents*
@@ -69,12 +70,11 @@ Copyright: Copyright (C) 2005-2011 Charles E Campbell, Jr *zip-copyright*
 	let g:loaded_zipPlugin= 1
 	let g:loaded_zip      = 1
 <
-<

 ==============================================================================
 3. Additional Extensions					*zip-extension*

-   Apparently there are a number of archivers who generate zip files that
+   Apparently there are a number of archivers which generate zip files that
   don't use the .zip extension (.jar, .xpi, etc).  To handle such files,
   place a line in your <.vimrc> file: >

@@ -85,6 +85,13 @@ Copyright: Copyright (C) 2005-2011 Charles E Campbell, Jr *zip-copyright*

 ==============================================================================
 4. History							*zip-history* {{{1
+   v26 Nov 15, 2012 * (Jason Spiro) provided a lot of new extensions that
+		      are synonyms for .zip
+   v25 Jun 27, 2011 * using keepj with unzip -Z
+		      (consistent with the -p variant)
+		    * (Ben Staniford) now uses
+			has("win32unix") && executable("cygpath")
+		      before converting to cygwin-style paths
   v24 Jun 21, 2010 * (Cédric Bosdonnat) unzip seems to need its filenames
 		      fnameescape'd as well as shellquote'd
 		    * (Motoya Kurotsu) inserted keepj before 0d to protect
--- a/runtime/doc/quickfix.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/quickfix.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*quickfix.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 May 10
+*quickfix.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2013 Mar 07


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -561,7 +561,9 @@ commands can be combined to create a NewGrep command: >
 					*:vim* *:vimgrep* *E682* *E683*
 :vim[grep][!] /{pattern}/[g][j] {file} ...
 			Search for {pattern} in the files {file} ... and set
-			the error list to the matches.
+			the error list to the matches.  Files matching
+			'wildignore' are ignored; files in 'suffixes' are
+			searched last.
 			Without the 'g' flag each line is added only once.
 			With 'g' every match is added.

@@ -572,6 +574,8 @@ commands can be combined to create a NewGrep command: >
 			'ignorecase' applies.  To overrule it put |/\c| in the
 			pattern to ignore case or |/\C| to match case.
 			'smartcase' is not used.
+			If {pattern} is empty (e.g. // is specified), the last
+			used search pattern is used. |last-pattern|

 			When a number is put before the command this is used
 			as the maximum number of matches to find.  Use
@@ -913,8 +917,8 @@ Basic items
 	%n		error number (finds a number)
 	%m		error message (finds a string)
 	%r		matches the "rest" of a single-line file message %O/P/Q
-	%p		pointer line (finds a sequence of '-', '.' or ' ' and
-			uses the length for the column number)
+	%p		pointer line (finds a sequence of '-', '.', ' ' or
+			tabs and uses the length for the column number)
 	%*{conv}	any scanf non-assignable conversion
 	%%		the single '%' character
 	%s		search text (finds a string)
--- a/runtime/doc/quickref.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/quickref.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*quickref.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Jun 12
+*quickref.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2013 Jun 29


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@

 							 *quickref* *Contents*
 tag	  subject			 tag	  subject	~
-|Q_ct|  list of help files		|Q_re|	Repeating commands
+|Q_ct|	list of help files		|Q_re|	Repeating commands
 |Q_lr|	motion: Left-right		|Q_km|	Key mapping
 |Q_ud|	motion: Up-down			|Q_ab|	Abbreviations
 |Q_tm|	motion: Text object		|Q_op|	Options
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
 |Q_co|	change: Complex			|Q_bu|	Buffer list commands
 |Q_vi|	Visual mode			|Q_sy|	Syntax highlighting
 |Q_to|	Text objects			|Q_gu|	GUI commands
-					|Q_fo|  Folding
+					|Q_fo|	Folding

 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 N is used to indicate an optional count that can be given before the command.
@@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ N is used to indicate an optional count that can be given before the command.
 |:marks|  :marks	print the active marks
 |CTRL-O|  N  CTRL-O	go to Nth older position in jump list
 |CTRL-I|  N  CTRL-I	go to Nth newer position in jump list
-|:ju|	  :ju[mps]	print the jump list
+|:ju|     :ju[mps]	print the jump list
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 *Q_vm*		Various motions

@@ -204,30 +204,30 @@ N is used to indicate an optional count that can be given before the command.
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 *Q_ta*		Using tags

-|:ta|	   :ta[g][!] {tag}	jump to tag {tag}
-|:ta|	   :[count]ta[g][!]	jump to [count]'th newer tag in tag list
+|:ta|      :ta[g][!] {tag}	jump to tag {tag}
+|:ta|      :[count]ta[g][!]	jump to [count]'th newer tag in tag list
 |CTRL-]|      CTRL-]		jump to the tag under cursor, unless changes
 				   have been made
-|:ts|	   :ts[elect][!] [tag]	list matching tags and select one to jump to
+|:ts|      :ts[elect][!] [tag]	list matching tags and select one to jump to
 |:tjump|   :tj[ump][!] [tag]	jump to tag [tag] or select from list when
 				   there are multiple matches
-|:ltag|	   :lt[ag][!] [tag]	jump to tag [tag] and add matching tags to the
+|:ltag|    :lt[ag][!] [tag]	jump to tag [tag] and add matching tags to the
 				   location list

-|:tags|	   :tags		print tag list
+|:tags|    :tags		print tag list
 |CTRL-T|   N  CTRL-T		jump back from Nth older tag in tag list
-|:po|	   :[count]po[p][!]	jump back from [count]'th older tag in tag list
+|:po|      :[count]po[p][!]	jump back from [count]'th older tag in tag list
 |:tnext|   :[count]tn[ext][!]	jump to [count]'th next matching tag
 |:tp|      :[count]tp[revious][!] jump to [count]'th previous matching tag
-|:tr|	   :[count]tr[ewind][!] jump to [count]'th matching tag
-|:tl|	   :tl[ast][!]		jump to last matching tag
+|:tr|      :[count]tr[ewind][!]	jump to [count]'th matching tag
+|:tl|      :tl[ast][!]		jump to last matching tag

-|:ptag|	   :pt[ag] {tag}	open a preview window to show tag {tag}
-|CTRL-W_}|     CTRL-W }		like CTRL-] but show tag in preview window
+|:ptag|    :pt[ag] {tag}	open a preview window to show tag {tag}
+|CTRL-W_}|    CTRL-W }		like CTRL-] but show tag in preview window
 |:pts|     :pts[elect]		like ":tselect" but show tag in preview window
 |:ptjump|  :ptj[ump]		like ":tjump" but show tag in preview window
 |:pclose|  :pc[lose]		close tag preview window
-|CTRL-W_z|     CTRL-W z		close tag preview window
+|CTRL-W_z|    CTRL-W z		close tag preview window
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 *Q_sc*		Scrolling

@@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ These only work when 'wrap' is off:
 |:startreplace| :startr[eplace][!]  start Replace mode, at EOL when [!] used

 in Visual block mode:
-|v_b_I|    I	insert the same text in front of all the selected lines
+|v_b_I|	   I	insert the same text in front of all the selected lines
 |v_b_A|	   A	append the same text after all the selected lines
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 *Q_ai*		Insert mode keys
@@ -334,16 +334,16 @@ In Insert or Command-line mode:
 *Q_de*		Deleting text

 |x|	N  x		delete N characters under and after the cursor
-|<Del>| N  <Del>	delete N characters under and after the cursor
+|<Del>|	N  <Del>	delete N characters under and after the cursor
 |X|	N  X		delete N characters before the cursor
 |d|	N  d{motion}	delete the text that is moved over with {motion}
-|v_d|	{visual}d	delete the highlighted text
+|v_d|	   {visual}d	delete the highlighted text
 |dd|	N  dd		delete N lines
 |D|	N  D		delete to the end of the line (and N-1 more lines)
 |J|	N  J		join N-1 lines (delete <EOL>s)
-|v_J|	{visual}J	join the highlighted lines
+|v_J|	   {visual}J	join the highlighted lines
 |gJ|	N  gJ		like "J", but without inserting spaces
-|v_gJ|	{visual}gJ	like "{visual}J", but without inserting spaces
+|v_gJ|	   {visual}gJ	like "{visual}J", but without inserting spaces
 |:d|	:[range]d [x]	delete [range] lines [into register x]
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 *Q_cm*		Copying and moving text
@@ -369,7 +369,7 @@ In Insert or Command-line mode:
 |R|	  N  R		enter Replace mode (repeat the entered text N times)
 |gR|	  N  gR		enter virtual Replace mode: Like Replace mode but
 			   without affecting layout
-|v_b_r|	  {visual}r{char}
+|v_b_r|	     {visual}r{char}
 			in Visual block mode: Replace each char of the
 			   selected text with {char}

@@ -447,13 +447,13 @@ In Insert or Command-line mode:

 |visual-index|	list of Visual mode commands.

-|v|	   v		start highlighting characters  }  move cursor and use
-|V|	   V		start highlighting linewise    }  operator to affect
+|v|        v		start highlighting characters  }  move cursor and use
+|V|        V		start highlighting linewise    }  operator to affect
 |CTRL-V|   CTRL-V	start highlighting blockwise   }  highlighted text
-|v_o|	   o		exchange cursor position with start of highlighting
-|gv|	   gv		start highlighting on previous visual area
-|v_v|	   v		highlight characters or stop highlighting
-|v_V|	   V		highlight linewise or stop highlighting
+|v_o|      o		exchange cursor position with start of highlighting
+|gv|       gv		start highlighting on previous visual area
+|v_v|      v		highlight characters or stop highlighting
+|v_V|      V		highlight linewise or stop highlighting
 |v_CTRL-V| CTRL-V	highlight blockwise or stop highlighting
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 *Q_to*		Text objects (only in Visual mode or after an operator)
@@ -509,8 +509,8 @@ In Insert or Command-line mode:
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 *Q_km*		Key mapping

-|:map|	     :ma[p] {lhs} {rhs}	  map {lhs} to {rhs} in Normal and Visual mode
-|:map!|	     :ma[p]! {lhs} {rhs}  map {lhs} to {rhs} in Insert and Command-line
+|:map|       :ma[p] {lhs} {rhs}	  map {lhs} to {rhs} in Normal and Visual mode
+|:map!|      :ma[p]! {lhs} {rhs}  map {lhs} to {rhs} in Insert and Command-line
 				     mode
 |:noremap|   :no[remap][!] {lhs} {rhs}
 				  same as ":map", no remapping for this {rhs}
@@ -522,19 +522,19 @@ In Insert or Command-line mode:
 				     Normal and Visual mode
 |:map_l!|    :ma[p]! [lhs]	  list mappings (starting with [lhs]) for
 				     Insert and Command-line mode
-|:cmap|	     :cmap/:cunmap/:cnoremap
+|:cmap|      :cmap/:cunmap/:cnoremap
 				  like ":map!"/":unmap!"/":noremap!" but for
 				     Command-line mode only
-|:imap|	     :imap/:iunmap/:inoremap
+|:imap|      :imap/:iunmap/:inoremap
 				  like ":map!"/":unmap!"/":noremap!" but for
 				     Insert mode only
-|:nmap|	     :nmap/:nunmap/:nnoremap
+|:nmap|      :nmap/:nunmap/:nnoremap
 				  like ":map"/":unmap"/":noremap" but for
 				     Normal mode only
-|:vmap|	     :vmap/:vunmap/:vnoremap
+|:vmap|      :vmap/:vunmap/:vnoremap
 				  like ":map"/":unmap"/":noremap" but for
 				     Visual mode only
-|:omap|	     :omap/:ounmap/:onoremap
+|:omap|      :omap/:ounmap/:onoremap
 				  like ":map"/":unmap"/":noremap" but only for
 				     when an operator is pending
 |:mapc|      :mapc[lear]	  remove mappings for Normal and Visual mode
@@ -691,6 +691,7 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'fileencodings'   'fencs'   automatically detected character encodings
 'fileformat'	  'ff'	    file format used for file I/O
 'fileformats'	  'ffs'     automatically detected values for 'fileformat'
+'fileignorecase'  'fic'     ignore case when using file names
 'filetype'	  'ft'	    type of file, used for autocommands
 'fillchars'	  'fcs'     characters to use for displaying special items
 'fkmap'		  'fk'	    Farsi keyboard mapping
@@ -737,10 +738,12 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'iconstring'		    string to use for the Vim icon text
 'ignorecase'	  'ic'	    ignore case in search patterns
 'imactivatekey'   'imak'    key that activates the X input method
+'imactivatefunc'  'imaf'    function to enable/disable the X input method
 'imcmdline'	  'imc'     use IM when starting to edit a command line
 'imdisable'	  'imd'     do not use the IM in any mode
 'iminsert'	  'imi'     use :lmap or IM in Insert mode
 'imsearch'	  'ims'     use :lmap or IM when typing a search pattern
+'imstatusfunc'    'imsf'    function to obtain X input method status
 'include'	  'inc'     pattern to be used to find an include file
 'includeexpr'	  'inex'    expression used to process an include line
 'incsearch'	  'is'	    highlight match while typing search pattern
@@ -823,6 +826,7 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'quoteescape'	  'qe'	    escape characters used in a string
 'readonly'	  'ro'	    disallow writing the buffer
 'redrawtime'	  'rdt'     timeout for 'hlsearch' and |:match| highlighting
+'regexpengine'	  're'	    default regexp engine to use
 'relativenumber'  'rnu'	    show relative line number in front of each line
 'remap'			    allow mappings to work recursively
 'report'		    threshold for reporting nr. of lines changed
@@ -851,6 +855,7 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'shellslash'	  'ssl'     use forward slash for shell file names
 'shelltemp'	  'stmp'    whether to use a temp file for shell commands
 'shelltype'	  'st'	    Amiga: influences how to use a shell
+'shellxescape'	  'sxe'     characters to escape when 'shellxquote' is (
 'shellxquote'	  'sxq'     like 'shellquote', but include redirection
 'shiftround'	  'sr'	    round indent to multiple of shiftwidth
 'shiftwidth'	  'sw'	    number of spaces to use for (auto)indent step
@@ -957,9 +962,9 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 *Q_ur*		Undo/Redo commands

-|u|	  N  u		undo last N changes
+|u|       N  u		undo last N changes
 |CTRL-R|  N  CTRL-R	redo last N undone changes
-|U|	     U		restore last changed line
+|U|          U		restore last changed line
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 *Q_et*		External commands

@@ -1010,7 +1015,7 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 				   C4350, etc.)
 |:normal|	:norm[al][!] {commands}
 				execute Normal mode commands
-|Q|		Q		switch to "Ex" mode
+|Q|		   Q		switch to "Ex" mode

 |:redir|	:redir >{file}		redirect messages to {file}
 |:silent|	:silent[!] {command}	execute {command} silently
@@ -1086,11 +1091,11 @@ Context-sensitive completion on the command-line:
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 *Q_ex*		Special Ex characters

-|:bar|	    |		separates two commands (not for ":global" and ":!")
+|:bar|      |		separates two commands (not for ":global" and ":!")
 |:quote|    "		begins comment

-|:_%|	    %		current file name (only where a file name is expected)
-|:_#|	    #[num]	alternate file name [num] (only where a file name is
+|:_%|       %		current file name (only where a file name is expected)
+|:_#|       #[num]	alternate file name [num] (only where a file name is
 			   expected)
 	Note: The next seven are typed literally; these are not special keys!
 |:<abuf>|   <abuf>	buffer number, for use in an autocommand (only where a
@@ -1170,18 +1175,18 @@ Context-sensitive completion on the command-line:
 	   Without !: Fail if changes have been made to the current buffer.
 	      With !: Discard any changes to the current buffer.
 |:edit_f|  :e[dit][!] {file}	edit {file}
-|:edit|	   :e[dit][!]		reload the current file
-|:enew|	   :ene[w][!]		edit a new, unnamed buffer
+|:edit|    :e[dit][!]		reload the current file
+|:enew|    :ene[w][!]		edit a new, unnamed buffer
 |:find|    :fin[d][!] {file}	find {file} in 'path' and edit it

-|CTRL-^|   N   CTRL-^		edit alternate file N (equivalent to ":e #N")
-|gf|	       gf  or ]f	edit the file whose name is under the cursor
-|:pwd|	   :pwd			print the current directory name
-|:cd|	   :cd [path]		change the current directory to [path]
-|:cd-|	   :cd -		back to previous current directory
-|:file|	   :f[ile]		print the current file name and the cursor
+|CTRL-^|   N  CTRL-^		edit alternate file N (equivalent to ":e #N")
+|gf|          gf  or ]f		edit the file whose name is under the cursor
+|:pwd|     :pwd			print the current directory name
+|:cd|      :cd [path]		change the current directory to [path]
+|:cd-|     :cd -		back to previous current directory
+|:file|    :f[ile]		print the current file name and the cursor
 				   position
-|:file|	   :f[ile] {name}	set the current file name to {name}
+|:file|    :f[ile] {name}	set the current file name to {name}
 |:files|   :files		show alternate file names
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 *Q_fl*		Using the argument list			|argument-list|
@@ -1197,12 +1202,12 @@ Context-sensitive completion on the command-line:

 	     in current window    in new window	~
 |:argument|  :argu[ment] N	  :sar[gument] N	edit file N
-|:next|	     :n[ext]		  :sn[ext]		edit next file
+|:next|      :n[ext]		  :sn[ext]		edit next file
 |:next_f|    :n[ext] {arglist}	  :sn[ext] {arglist}	define new arg list
 							   and edit first file
-|:Next|	     :N[ext]		  :sN[ext]		edit previous file
+|:Next|      :N[ext]		  :sN[ext]		edit previous file
 |:first|     :fir[st]		  :sfir[st]		edit first file
-|:last|	     :la[st]		  :sla[st]		edit last file
+|:last|      :la[st]		  :sla[st]		edit last file
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 *Q_wq*		Writing and quitting

--- a/runtime/doc/repeat.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/repeat.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*repeat.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Jan 06
+*repeat.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Mar 23


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ q			Stops recording.  (Implementation note: The 'q' that
 			it was the result of a mapping)  {Vi: no recording}

 							*@*
-@{0-9a-z".=*}		Execute the contents of register {0-9a-z".=*} [count]
+@{0-9a-z".=*+}		Execute the contents of register {0-9a-z".=*+} [count]
 			times.  Note that register '%' (name of the current
 			file) and '#' (name of the alternate file) cannot be
 			used.
@@ -123,8 +123,8 @@ q			Stops recording.  (Implementation note: The 'q' that
 							*@@* *E748*
@@			Repeat the previous @{0-9a-z":*} [count] times.

-:[addr]*{0-9a-z".=}						*:@* *:star*
-:[addr]@{0-9a-z".=*}	Execute the contents of register {0-9a-z".=*} as an Ex
+:[addr]*{0-9a-z".=+}						*:@* *:star*
+:[addr]@{0-9a-z".=*+}	Execute the contents of register {0-9a-z".=*+} as an Ex
 			command.  First set cursor at line [addr] (default is
 			current line).  When the last line in the register does
 			not have a <CR> it will be added automatically when
--- a/Show More
+++ b/Show More